The “Five Most Important Shots in Golf” Clinics

Hi from Pleasanton,

There’s plenty of “good stuff” to report this week. The “Five Most Important Shots in Golf” clinics kick-started the season. The clinics are the core of our “Performance-Based Golf” program.

But the clinics were never intended to be “one and done”. Rather, they are a welcome entry point for golfers who want to examine an important part of their game – and develop a plan for real improvement.

Performance-Based Golf is not about reaching minimum skill levels with basic clubs. We’re looking at the other end of the scale.

Your ultimate goal is “Peak Performance” whether that’s to shoot your career best round or just to finish with the same ball.

The next step – “Leveling Up” after a clinic – is a “Two-Man Intensive”. That’s two 1.5 hour follow-up sessions with just two players to develop a higher level of skill. Levels II and III are well worked out for the Driver – Eric focused on “Balance, Alignment and Leverage” principles and drills from his “5 Keys to Distance” book. His goal is a 10 MPH increase in swing speed with correct shot shape. I saw that happen on Sunday for two amazed and delighted clients.

Level III introduces advanced concepts of “Target Awareness”.

We are putting the finishing touches on Level II and Level III for our “Scoring Clubs” and “Putting” clinics. You will receive invitations to help us polish the content of our “Next Level”. We are planning “Two-Man Intensives” for clubfitting and training as well. If you would like to be in the vanguard for the “Next Big Thing” in golf – get in touch. If there is a specific skill that you’d like us to address, please let us know.

Performance-Based Golf Clinics are the “laboratory” that Eric is using to create a complete course of instruction. If you would like a little more insight into what’s involved with the “Big Picture” – here’s a link to his “Introduction to Performance-Based Golf”. He is writing the final scripts and will film the entire course within the next couple of weeks. Keep in mind, this is draft material and could change considerably between now and then – but as of now, it’s the best description of the framework of Performance-Based Golf.

Here is a link to Eric’s “Welcome” script:

http://calgolflab.com/blog/the-new-golf-lab-for-2012-2/performance-based-golf-welcome-video-script/

Current Clinic Offerings:

We have “sold out” our Driver Clinics for May 18 and June 1. We’re now scheduling all “Most Important Shots in Golf” clinics for the rest of the summer. Here is a link to June, July and August.

http://calgolflab.com/blog/2013/04/12/schedule-for-eric-jones-performance-based-golf-most-important-shots-clinics-on-saturdays/

Book with Bob Pegram at 408-871-9983.

Please plan ahead and book your “Five Most Important Shots” clinics now. Filling the schedule will allow us to focus our attention on “Leveling Up”.

There is plenty of room in the Putting Clinic scheduled for 2:00-4:30 on Saturday afternoon, June 1 at The Bridges.

We have no room to expand our Saturday schedule so there aren’t that many clinic spots available for the rest of the summer. Just six players per week. Please refer your friends and playing partners. It would be great to “sell out” the rest of the summer. We could then turn full attention to developing “new content” rather than booking clinics.

Insider’s Tip from the Byron Nelson

I just got off the phone with my friend Russ Ryden who is filming the Byron Nelson. He posted a video on YouTube yesterday from the Nike Tour van. How’s that for speed? The video was filmed yesterday and posted last night. Check out the DevotedGolfer.com YouTube channel at https://www.youtube.com/user/DevotedGolfer/.

The “scoop” is that Tiger pulled the Graphite Design shaft that he’s been using and went back to his Whiteboard from Mitsubishi. Another example of a player going back to a shaft that’s six years old.

Russ has been working on his website www.golfshaftreviews.info. Check it out if you want the inside story on golf shafts.

Insider’s Group Launched

We are starting our “Insider’s Group”. All Golf Lab “friends and family” are invited to make themselves known if you would like to receive a “more intimate” level of communication.

Our concept is to manage our “Insiders” list with Salesforce.com and convert our focused communication to group email. There is a lot of “business as usual” that doesn’t fit broadcast over the Internet.

As an example, I owe everyone an explanation of what happened at The Bridges a week ago. I’m going to post my “personal travails” on the blog and not send out the full bloody description in a newsletter. Contact Bob Pegram if you want to hear about The Bridges.

On the same note, I’m planning to take a lot of the detailed clubfitting story out of the newsletters. That subject has it’s loyal following – but just does not interest everybody. We’ll locate that in the blog back on the  http://calgolflab.com/blog website.

Our “core group” of insiders is the 50 clients who have participated in one or more Clinics in the last two months. You guys are already “Insiders”. Any other reader is invited.

Next Steps for THE PROJECT:

Beta Test for “Two Man Intensive for Clubfitting”.

Leith is looking for two volunteers for a “Two Man Intensive for Clubfitting”. I have in mind a better way to fit irons.

Since irons all need to be tested outdoors from a natural grass surface for ball flight and feel – why not do that first? Feel and ball flight can be dialed in for wedges and six irons from our “Magic Fitting Bags” from Mizuno and Edel.

It only takes a few swings to compare shaft performance for ball flight and feel.

If you would like to be one of the “volunteers” who works out the method for fitting irons on the range first – by feel and ball flight – and then honing in on the final performance metrics with radar – get in touch by email. Leithander@gmail.com.

Ultimately, outdoor fitting with radar support is going to be “state of the art”. If you have to go to the range anyway to verify performance – why not start there? Schedule to fit around “coaching hours” Friday, Saturday and Sunday between 10 and 1.

Putting Clinic Passes “Beta Two”

We are ready for prime time with our “Putting Clinic”. We’ve been through two “beta test sessions” and we’re confident that we have a good framework in place.

We’re making our “half price” fee of $99 permanent. The next presentation of the Putting Clinic is Saturday, June 1 from 2:00 until 4:30 at The Bridges. The Driver clinic is booked for that morning but we still have openings for putting.

We plan to offer the Putting Clinic every other Saturday afternoon – following a morning Driver or Scoring Clubs clinic. That allows the player who wants a “full day” of golf to have his fill. It also provides an easy way for a “newbie” to get acquainted with our approach – mastering one key skill at a time.

Level II – Putting

We need a couple of “volunteers” who have been through the Putting Clinic to step up for a “Two-man (or woman) Intensive”.

Eric has a theory that Level II will take quite a lot of remedial work for most of the players we’ve seen come through the Putting Clinic. If you think that your putting stroke needs work – and hopefully if you’ve completed the Putting Clinic – we’d like to work with you to find out for sure.

Call Bob (408-871-9983) if you would like us to find a partner for a “Two Man Intensive” to focus on your putting stroke. “Beta volunteers” are accommodated with a $99 per session fee. You’ll have a chance to work with Eric, Leith and John Ruark as we study and perfect the process for the first couple of times out.

Final Opportunity – Beta for “Greenside”

The “Five Most Important Shots in Golf” actually includes three shots from “greenside”. The chip, the pitch, and the lob. Eric is planning to use the chipping green at The Bridges for the “Greenside” session.

It is a small space. Only four players can take part.

We want to run a “beta” for that session. It will involve Eric, Leith, John Ruark and four clients. You will get more attention for your greenside manner than you have ever imagined. It is sure to be a fabulous experience.

The session includes hanging around afterwards for a drink and conversation. $99 (beta price) for the afternoon. Call Bob to register. We will negotiate convenient times and could schedule weekdays for players who can control their time.

Another Invitation

Please, please – book the clinics that you haven’t taken. Then get in touch with Bob if you want information on “Two Man Intensives”, scheduling or the “Insiders’ Group”.

Leith is on email morning and evening: leithander@gmail.com. Eric is “out of the loop” for new ideas until he finishes his video filming (three more weeks).

Best regards,

Leith Anderson, Eric Jones, Bob Pegram, John Ruark, John Greenwood.

Posted in Working with the Golf Lab | Leave a comment

Exciting Things on the Range at Pleasanton

Hi from Pleasanton,

Exciting things happening “on the range” at Pleasanton – but the most important thing for today is to finish up scheduling our Performance-Based Golf Clinics for this week, next week and all of June.

We are nearing our goal of “selling out” all available Clinic spots 30 days ahead of time. The clinics are not an expandable program. We only have twenty-four spots each month. Four clinics, six participants for each clinic. If you’ve been “thinking about” joining one of our Clinics, now is the time to book your session. For the next month, we have only six spots still open – total.

We are offering the “Scoring Clubs Clinic” on Saturday. This core Performance-Based Golf clinic focuses on calibrating your wedge game. We have three spots open.

You learn your “full swing” and “partial swing” positions in a clock-face metaphor working with a partner. Then you hit each wedge ten times to a measured distance. You learn how far you hit each wedge in your bag for a full and partial swing. You will be surprised. You do not hit your wedges as far, on average, as you think. Adjust your wedge distances in your brain and combine that with a precise distance (by laser or GPS) and you’ll to take 2-3 strokes off of your scores if you’re currently shooting around 90.  $199 for the three hour clinic. That’s a big promise.

This Saturday we’re offering our “Putting Clinic – Version Two” in the afternoon. We’re focused on polishing our Putting Clinic. We presented a “beta” version a couple of weeks ago and it worked out well. We’re offering a “Beta Two” this Saturday. You’re invited.

  • You’ll learn how to read any green the simplest possible way.
  • You’ll learn to find the correct “aiming point” for any putt.
  • You’ll learn how to aim your putter to that point.
  • You’ll learn drills to make sure you roll the ball the right speed for perfect distance control.
  • We’ll test your consistency on 7 foot putts – the “round changers”.
  • We’ll give you a simple drill and simple tool to improve your consistency. (A string line).
  • We’ll give you another simple drill to improve your distance control.

All that together makes a full afternoon.

Please remember that even though we talk a good game for advanced players, you don’t need to be a low-index player to get the benefit of our Clinics. In fact, most of our clients are golfers who “play for fun”.

A perfect way to spend Saturday – “all golf all the time” – is to combine the Scoring Clubs clinic in the morning with the Putting Clinic in the afternoon. That’s if you have the stamina. We already have two for the afternoon so we’re scheduling the session. Both sessions are $299. Afternoon only: $99. Come for one or both.

The Saturday afternoon putting session will take place at The Bridges – Eric is on the teaching staff there as well. The Bridges has an “extreme” putting green that is the best in the area for conducting a putting clinic. The afternoon session starts at 2PM and will go until 5. After that, you can join us for a post clinic drink at The Bridges’ Bar.

Next Week: Driver Clinic May 18th

We have six spots booked for next week, May 18th. That’s sold out. We’d like to start a “waiting list” – just in case. Keep in mind; our Performance-Based clinics are not infinitely expandable. We have six spots each week – that’s it.

The next date after May 18th is June 1. We’re taking a week off in between. Eric is hosting a birthday party that Saturday.

If you are thinking about the next Driver clinic, please book for June 1. Reply to me by email and I’ll make sure that Bob Pegram gets the reservation. He is at 408-871-9983 or bobpgolf@dslextreme.com.

Click here for the remaining schedule for June and July … 

Here is an example of how these clinics can improve your game. These comments are from Kevin Powers:

Bob, so far I’ve taken Eric’s Scoring Shots and Drive clinics (and hope to take the others eventually). I’ll try and answer these questions for both clinics:

* What is one thing you learned from the clinic that will make the biggest difference in your game?

Driver Clinic: Center contact of the driver face on the ball has already made a big difference. I found I’ve been teeing the ball too high and consequently hitting the ball too high on the club face. Seems so simple…but it has made quite a difference.

Scoring Shots Clinic: Taking the time to measure the distance and accuracy of my wedges using Eric’s metrics sheet. There is less guessing involved when you know what you can really do with a club, whether a full swing or 3/4 swing. Again…so simple, but so effective.

* Would you recommend Eric’s Performance Based Golf clinics to your golfing friends? How would you describe them to your friends?

Driver Clinic: Yes, and I already have. I have described the performance based clinics as a way improve scores with simple metric-based methods. Working on the perfect swing is a whole different topic (and obviously important) but these methods give you a way of knowing your own game and using simple techniques to lower your score (which is what it’s all about, right?). The Driver Clinic impact for me is using simple adjustments (center contact) to achieve more consistency.

Scoring Shots Clinic: Same as above. The Scoring Shots Clinic for me was a way to better dial in my own wedge game, i.e., on the average, how far can I actually hit a pitching wedge; and it is more likely I will have better accuracy using a 3/4 swing on a 9 iron than a full swing on a pitching wedge.

* What was the most surprising thing you learned?   Read more …

Please Get in Touch

For questions: email Leith Anderson (leithander@gmail.com). We are focused on changing the way players learn to play golf at the “next level”.

Best regards,

Leith Anderson

Working with Eric on Alignment

Working on Alignment with Eric

  Following Eric's Example 3/4 Swing

Following Eric’s Example

  Testing Clubhead and Ball Speed with John Greenwood

Testing Clubhead Speed and Ball Speed with John Greenwood

Posted in Game Improvement Services | Leave a comment

If you plan to get better at golf this summer, now is a good time to start

Hi from Pleasanton,

In prior episodes of my Player’s Notebook, I offered myself as the prime example of a player “coming back to golf”.

I was a “single digit” player. I felt like I would break 80 most of the time at the Palo Alto Muni. Not that bad for a 67 year-old guy.

Then I suffered an injury and lost time to business. Over a year went by with very little golf and it showed.

So I re-committed myself to getting back to my old form. Or at least seeing how close I could get. One more thing about myself … I believe that testing your game is best done under “tournament conditions.”

That’s why I hooked up with JW Means. JW runs the “Player$ Tour” a private club that puts on just two tournaments a month – at good courses with “tournament grade” setups. Joining the Player$ Tour requires putting down greens fees plus a couple of hundred dollars on yourself. Players who bet $300 to “test their game” under tournament conditions have a lot of self-esteem. I like playing with confident guys who play by the rules.

To win your money back – and someone else’s – all you have to do is shoot your handicap. When you win you get a minimum of $1,200 cash. That’s a good indication of “performance under pressure.” Most players can’t shoot their handicap under pressure. That means the tournaments are wide open.

I journeyed to Wente Vinyards for my first “test” in March and came away shell-shocked after posting a 92. Ouch!

It might have left me wondering.

But I look at that as a real motivator. I’m determined to make that the bottom. The only direction I can go is up. But I also know I have to put in the work, and that’s just what I’ve been doing.

The Bridges – Sunday May 5th, 2013

It’s time for the next Showdown. Player$ Tour Tournament at The Bridges. First tee time: 10:30 A.M.

To me, The Bridges Golf Course is diabolical. I’ve played it dozens of times with my dear-departed friend Jim McKenna and I’ve never finished a round with the same ball.

And though that record still stands, check in again after Sunday. I’ve got some new weapons, and a new approach.

After the “Warning at Wente” - I went on a self-improvement program. I joined up with Eric Jones and his Performance-Based Golf Coaching Program.

Performance-Based Golf is really my own story.

I was looking for a way to get better at golf that made sense. The most logical way to improve is to combine coaching with practice. Lessons do no good unless you follow up with “the work”. Working with Eric, I’ve participated in and helped develop three intensive clinics:

  • Driver,
  • “Scoring Clubs” and
  • Putting.

We go deep into each specific shot. That’s why we call them “intensives.” There’s a specific approach to determining performance measures for these shots. Improve your measures, improve your results. No guess-work, and minimal swing interference. Immediate improvement for everyone who improves their performance measures.

Unlike March, I’ve logged a few hours of practice. Here’s why I think I’ll beat my record score at The Bridges this Sunday – hopefully by a lot:

The 80/20 Rule

You heard the 80/20 rule: 80% of your results come from 20% of your efforts. Apply that to golf and what you come away with are the 5 key shots to focus on:

1. Putting – the 6/7-footer

2. Driver off the Tee

3. Scoring Shots (wedges from 75-125 yards, or in my case from 60-110 yards)

4. Greenside Pitch (5 to 25 yards)

5. Long Approach Shots

The Performance “Measures”

Now take these shots one step further.

There’s only four outcomes you can improve with every shot:

1. Your Center Contact

2. Your Direction Accuracy

3. Your Distance Control

4. Your Shape Control

With each of the 5 key shots there’s one or two outcomes to focus on first.

Driver? It’s center contact and direction accuracy.

Putter? It’s direction accuracy and distance control.

That’s what Eric’s intensive clinics are all about. Taking the 5 most important shots in golf and showing you the key performance measures to improve – or as we say around the range – to “level up.” Level-up your performance, lower your scores.

The golfer serious about improving their game should be in every clinic. I am.

Prepare to Post a Score

My Driver

At Wente, I had little time to choose a driver so to “play safe” I took a “Thriver” – a 15* head with a square face angle. 43.5″ long. I spent no time choosing the shaft. Overall, it wasn’t bad although I managed to still hit one drive OB.

Since taking the Driver Clinic, I have “fine tuned” a Taylor Made R9 driver with a 44.5″ shaft that lets me make a controlled swing. I am getting the soft draw that I’ve been looking for.

I’ve still got time to work on this one. A Thriver will be an option.

Performance measures?

I was a “Level 2″ on Center Contact when I started. I’m working my way to Level 7, which is Eric’s threshold level. The results? More fairways hit, more solid shots, more distance.

“Intensive Driver Clinic” – hit your driver longer and straighter in one day. Saturday, May 4th, 2013. 9 AM – Noon.

We still have openings this Saturday, May 4th, for our Intensive Driver Clinic.

Join us this Saturday to work with your own driver. We combine analysis, instruction, inspiration and practice. Three hours on Saturday morning will save you strokes in your next round. Email me: Leithander@gmail.com  if you can come. Cost is $199 for the three hour program.

I have described the Clinics in detail before. Here is a link to one of those articles: http://calgolflab.com/blog/2013/03/20/repeat-of-a-sellout-eric-jones-longer-and-straighter-driver-clinic/

Since I’m on the subject, please have a look at the schedule of future clinics. Note that there is only one a week. Each clinic is limited to six participants. That’s just twenty-four lucky players a month. Here is a link to Clinic Schedule:

http://calgolflab.com/blog/2013/04/12/schedule-for-eric-jones-performance-based-golf-most-important-shots-clinics-on-saturdays/

Until now, only Golf Lab customers and Golf Equipment Chronicles readers have been invited to participate. We are about to open up the invitation list to Eric’s students. When that happens, we will sell out for the summer. Please have a look at the schedule and reserve the sessions that you want to attend ASAP.

My Putting

We presented the “beta” version of our PUTTING INTENSIVE “Five Most Important Shots in Golf” clinic on Saturday, April 27th.

It came out great. We’re ready for Prime Time in a couple of weeks. A link to the schedule is above.

The clinic tested a golfer’s baseline on two putts:

  • a 7 foot putt, straight uphill and
  • a 40 foot putt

Performance measures? How many can you make from 7 feet, and how many can you stop inside a 3-foot circle on a 40-footer.

Results were shocking. On the 7-footers the average score was 2. On the 40-footers the average was 4. I started at “two” and “six”.

Here’s what I learned: The most important tool in improving your putting as quickly as possible is a string line.

After conducting a series of skills and drills aimed at distance and direction control, Eric came back to the seven foot putt. We ran another test. Just as bad.

That’s when Eric pulled out the string line and started a drill for everyone. Hit 100 seven foot puts straight up a string line – no break – from below the hole. Position your eyes over the line and the ball under the line. Watch your stroke. Pretty soon you understand the natural “shape” of your stroke. Then, you start getting much more consistent.

Kingsley Wood improved from two to eight on the seven footers.

I was so inspired I spent the afternoon on the practice putting green at Stanford. I don’t see any way I’m going to three-putt eight times at the Bridges.

My Wedges

Know your wedge distances – Level Two.

“Scoring Clubs” are your wedges. The focus of our Scoring Clubs Clinic is calibrating a “repeating swing” so you know exactly how far each wedge will carry. Your “full repeating swing” is determined by finding your most comfortable position at the top. That drill is accomplished with a clock-face metaphor working with a partner. Your full wedge swing is most likely 10:00 or 10:30. You practice repeating your full swing – each one observed and checked with your partner. After half an hour you will have “calibrated” your wedge swing. Hitting to measured targets you will know your exact AVERAGE carry distances.

You will probably find that your wedges carry a lot shorter than you thought – on average. In our tests over the last two months, “over-estimation” of carry distance clinic participants is twelve yards. Convert that to feet. You’re putting from 36 feet at the front of the green. Or, worse case playing from the front bunker.

Last Saturday, we introduced “The 100 Yard Approach” as a “Level Test” for our Scoring Clubs Clinic. The 100 yard approach is one of the skills on the Performance-Based Golf “Most Important”. Last Saturday half of our players needed a 9 iron to reach 100 yard carry. That was a shocking eye-opener. Some players improved from two inside a ten yard radius to eight hitting the same target – by just calibrating a swing, learning true distance and practicing for consistency.

Quoting Hogan again: “Show me the man who plays full shots with his wedges. I want to play him”.

Once you have calibrated your full swing, you move to “partial swing” or the 3/4 shot. The goal of the “Scoring Clubs Clinic” is knowing the exact carry distance of each wedge in your bag – for a “full” and “partial” shot.

The BIG WIN comes when you calibrate your partial swing with a wedge. Your partial swing with a stronger wedge will go as far as a full swing with a higher loft. Your partial swing shots will be lots more consistent. Dialing in your distance with a partial wedge puts a new shot in your bag.

I now know my distances. My 50 degree wedge is good from 90 yards on a calibrated “full swing”. Two months ago, I played that club as 105 yards. Big difference. I won’t be at the back of the greens this Sunday at The Bridges. I’ll be tuning those distances this Friday and Saturday at Pleasanton.

My Long Approach Shots

Know your fairway distances – Level One.

At Wente I was unprepared. I judged distances from fairway markers conservatively and found myself at the back of the green most of the time. Overclubbing. Too far away to get down in two, I obliged with three-putts. Poor putting, in my case, was caused by careless approach shots.

Long approach shots are one of the “Key-5.” We’re working on an intensive clinic for that right now. What I can tell you is that it will involve radar – the next big thing in performance teaching.

Our next project is “Eric Jones and the Magic Irons Bag”. We’ve already started with Eric and his irons. He’ll be the first “proof of concept.” Once we’re done with that, we’ll know exactly how to apply it to your bag.

Eric has been playing the same irons for eight years. Miura Baby Blades and Rifle (Satin) Project X 6.5. We’re going to try to knock those irons out of his bag. Eric is committed to hands-on club testing every Friday at 9 AM until we finish the job.

Last week we narrowed the playing field of “possible clubs” and found some new ideas to try. We used John Greenwood’s radar system to measure performance. Accuracy here is the watch word, and there’s nothing comparable to the set up we have at Pleasanton with hitting balls outdoors, off real grass, with a radar. We will have the most precise, and most efficient shaft fitting possible – including for irons – the most difficult of all shaft fitting challenges.

The big test will be to see how Eric does with the AeroTech 95 Gram Steel Fiber shaft. We’re building test clubs at standard, single hard step and double hard step tipping. You’ll be hearing more shortly …

Eric Plans to Develop an “Inner Circle”.

Here’ my totally positive recommendation for why this is a rare opportunity to have a great experience getting to know an ambitious, qualified and successful golf teacher and Internet entrepreneur. And you get the best golf coaching of your life.

Eric is on a mission. His “Performance-Based Golf” approach to getting better at golf is already getting attention from the “Powers that Be” (I won’t mention a senior marketing exec at Titleist). This is the kind of stuff that makes a PGA “Teacher of the Year”, and when that happens there won’t be any room on Eric’s dance card.

The Clinics are Eric’s “Laboratory”, so not only do you have a chance to get in before word gets out, you also get to be part of creating “something new.”

I’ll let you in on a little scoop: He is incorporating everything we learn into a new Online Training Program. That project is nearing completion. The players who participate now and donate their results “to science” will have a chance to join the “Inner Circle” as a lifetime member.

The INNER CIRCLE

Once Eric’s new online Performance-Based Golf is finished, he’s planning on opening a new program for an inner circle of players.

Want to know how good you can be? There is no better setup than to have your inner circle coach play a round of golf with you

Sunday afternoons at the Bridges.

I’m joining that group.

If you can spare at least a day a week, we’re looking for serious golfers who want to follow Eric’s program of theory and drills. If you would like to join Eric’s “Inner Circle” – make yourself known to me. You need to go through the clinics, and you need to be willing to post your results.

I hope to be good enough before too long to join the Player$ Tour and put down a bet on myself to shoot my handicap. How long will that take? If ever?

I’m the first “case study” – following Eric’s Performance-Based approach to training.

Thanks for reading the best description that we can give at the moment for the “Vision” behind the Clinics and how they tie into the future. If you can make it to Pleasanton a day a week, we’d love to have you join us at the “Next Level”.

“If you plan to get better at golf this summer, now would be a good time to start”. – Eric Jones.

Best Regards, Leith Anderson and the “Eric Jones Gang” – John Ruark and Bob Pegram.

Posted in Game Improvement Services | Leave a comment

The Golf Lab – Scheduling a Club Fitting

Starting in January 2013, Leith’s club fittings and John Ruark’s Putting and FocusBand sessions are in conjunction with Eric Jones’ Performance Based Golf at the back of the Pleasanton Driving Range, at The Bridges Golf Club, or at Mariner’s Point (click ‘Contact Us‘ above for maps and directions). John can also meet you for putting at a convenient location. Our San Carlos location closed December 31, 2012.

Leith and John are doing their own scheduling. Leith’s cell phone is 650-743-8216 and his email is leithander@gmail.com. John’s cell phone is 415-497-7627 and his email is jwruark@yahoo.com.

Call or email Bob at 408-871-9983 or bobpgolf@dslextreme.com with any questions.

Leith will check your club specifications and determine which specs fit your swing. Leith and John provide outdoor Edel wedge fitting at either the practice area at Mariner’s Point in Foster City or the back of the driving range at Pleasanton (see directions below). Edel wedges are the most advanced wedges available. Both Leith and John provide Edel putter fitting.

John Ruark works with you to increase your putting effectiveness and also works with the Focus Band so you can learn to stay “in the zone.”

Maps and directions to all locations are shown if you click ‘Contact Us‘ above.

If Pleasanton is scheduled, location and directions are as follows: exit I-680 at Bernal in Pleasanton. Go east (away from the bay), turn left/north on Valley Ave., turn right/east at Gate 12 and go to the back of the range.

If Mariner’s Point is scheduled, directions are: drive to 3rd Avenue exit on I-101 (just north of the San Mateo bridge), go east toward the bay approximately a mile. Mariner’s Point Golf is on the left. Click ‘Contact Us’ in the header for a map.

If The Bridges is scheduled, go north on I-680 past I-580 to the Bollinger Canyon exit. Turn east (right) and drive several miles to Gale Ridge Road. Turn right on Gale Ridge Road and turn right again almost immediately into the Bridges parking lot.

Posted in Working with the Golf Lab | Leave a comment

We’re on a Mission and we’ve got a Plan

Hi from Pleasanton,

We make sense out of getting better at golf.

If you give us three hours on a Saturday morning we promise immediate improvement – measured by lower scores on the course.

One Saturday morning is all it takes to get started.

Why Not Golf?

In all other sports, there is an accepted Performance-Based Training Method. Why not golf?

Our “5 Key Shots in Golf” intensive clinics are based on the “80/20 Rule”. Invest your time and effort into practicing the 20% of skills that deliver 80% of improvement.

Performance-Based Golf provides a method to measure and track your performance. We help you set priorities for effective practice.

Our secret: Pick the low-hanging fruit first.

Think about your game. Where do you lose the most strokes?

My Three Most Dangerous Shots:

Catastrophic drives cost stroke, distance and an expensive ball. My round is never successful unless I finish with the same ball.

Making a seven foot putt under pressure is ultimate satisfaction. Miss the seven-footer and you’re in the doghouse.

100 yard wedge shots make birdies and save pars. Luke Donald hits 100% of his 100 yard wedge shots inside 15 feet. Amateurs MISS THE GREEN half the time from 100 yards.

Those are my Three Most Important Shots. I count fourteen drives, several “makeable putts” and a few wedges from 100 yards (or so) as my maximum potential for disappointment.

And my easiest route to improvement.

The Performance-Based Golf Framework:

We Focus on Mastering the “5 Key Shots in Golf”:

  1. Driver off the Tee
  2. Seven foot putt
  3. 100 yard wedge
  4. Greenside chip
  5. Fairway approach

Drilling down, there are more than five Key Shots. We add a 40 foot lag putt. Greenside: we add a 25 yard pitch and a bunker shot. From the fairway you need to prepare for medium (150 yards) and long (180 yards) distances.

That’s just nine shots. If you master those nine shots, you will have covered 80% of what you need to reach your goal for improvement.

The Key to Performance-Based Golf Training is Measuring and Tracking Your “Level”.

In wedge play, Luke Donald is a “Level 12″ on a scale of 1-10.

A great benchmark is the 100 yard wedge shot. The 100 yard wedge is your chance to hit it close for a birdie on a short par 4. One hundred yards can be your layup distance on a par 5 or your target for a skillful “up and down” from trouble.

The 100 yard wedge is easy to test and measure. It is a shot that every player needs in his bag.

“Tour Level” is 10 out of 10 inside 15 feet. That’s a “Level 10″.

The “Real World”

Very few players test higher than Level Five before Performance-Based Golf Training.

Most of our “Wedge Calibration Clinic” clients start at ZERO or Level One. Take the test. How many 100 yard wedge shots stop inside a 10 yard radius from your target? Thirty feet each way. That’s more than twice as big as Luke Donald’s target.

If you want to break 90, you need to be Level Five. If you want to break 80 consistently, you need to reach Level Eight.

The key to managing your improvement is discovering your weakest skill and working to “Level Up”.

You don’t need us to keep track of your improvement. You can “Level Up” on your own.

The “Business Proposition”

You get it. We test and measure your current skill level with a simple test. For “Scoring Clubs” it’s the 100 yard wedge shot.

You need to know your current skill level with each of the important shot-making skills.

Black and white. Cut and dried. Numbers don’t lie and all that.

Compare your current skill level with the game you want to have. If you’re looking to break par, you need to bring each of your five ball-striking skills to “Level 8″ or better.

In the past, signing up for “golf lessons” has been an act of faith. “Best efforts”. No guarantee.

With Performance-Based Golf we can predict improvement. Focus on the Key Shot. Raise your level. Lower your scores. Period.

We recommend (and enforce) a training program that is guaranteed to get results – measured by the only thing that matters – lower scores.

Our Guarantee

Join our “Scoring Clubs” Clinic this Saturday. We guarantee you will “Level Up” at least one Level within three hours. That is two to three shots off your scores immediately if you’re an average player.

If you do not improve by at least one level in three hours, you are welcome to repeat the clinic free.

You must schedule at least one practice session per week or all bets are off.

Our Method: Calibrate Your Wedges

No secrets. Here’s what we do:

Our Scoring Clubs Clinic is based on calibrating your wedge distances. Working with a partner, you will learn a comfortable, clock -face understanding of your wedge swing. What position does your left arm reach on a full wedge shot? Most players will find a comfortable full wedge swing between 10 and 11 o’clock. The secret to distance control is repeating your swing the same way – every time.

We’re not talking about a 10:00 sometimes and 11:00 other times. We’re talking about 10:30 arm position every time. You can do that. You need a partner to help you.

After calibrating your full wedge swing, you do the same for your “partial” swing. You might call it a “¾ shot”. Your left arm position at your partial swing position might be 9:30. That’s 9:30 every time.

You hit plenty of shots with your full and partial wedge swings. You keep track of distances, training yourself to repeat your calibrated swings time after time. Your distances tighten up. That happens right away. Three hours is enough time to achieve surprising consistency.

Another “Big Thing” happens quickly. You learn that you overestimate your actual carry distance with every wedge in your bag by about ten yards. That’s why so many of your first putts are thirty feet short from the front of the green.

Final enlightenment occurs when you compare the dispersion of your partial swing with a gap wedge (52*) against a full swing with your sand wedge (56*).

The partial swing is always straighter and more consistent than a full swing. The “Scoring Clubs” clinic gives you the knowledge and confidence to put a new shot into play – a partial swing with a lower loft wedge for scoring consistency.

That’s all there is to it. Three hours on a Saturday morning will pay you back with shorter first putts and lower scores – next week.

The Scoring Clubs clinic is scheduled for this Saturday. The location is the back of the driving range at the Pleasanton Fair Grounds. Bernal at 680 is the exit. Go east to the second light. Turn left. Go to Gate 12. Pass the entrance to the driving range and go past the ticket booth where they sell parking passes to Fairgrounds events. Tell they you’re going to a golf lesson. Take a quick left after the ticket booth and duck into the back of the range.

That’s where the sun is at your back, the breeze in your face and the surface is all natural grass. It’s the best public range in the Bay Area. Saturday morning, it’s private for our Clinics.

Send a quick email to Leith Anderson (leithander@gmail.com) to reserve your place. Our clinics are limited to six participants. We have four spots open for this Saturday. Cost is $199 per player.

Let’s meet up in Pleasanton.

Best Regards, Leith Anderson, Eric Jones, John Ruark and Bob Pegram

PS: Value-Added events this week. On Saturday afternoon, we’re working out the final “beta test” of our Putting Clinic. That will take place at The Bridges on Saturday afternoon between 2 and 4:30. If you would like to join us for the “Scoring Clubs Clinic” in the morning, we invite you to take part in the “Putting Clinic” in the afternoon. As you might expect, we’re making an incentive “half price offer” for the Putting Clinic. The Putting Clinic comes with a few extras. We’ll be conducting a “post mortem” after in the bar at the Bridges. You’re welcome to join up for the whole day. Email Leithander@gmail.com to reserve your spot.

PPS: “The Magic Iron Bag”. On Friday at 9 AM we’re bringing Eric Jones, John Greenwood and the “Magic Iron Bag” together for testing at the Pleasanton Range. Eric will be doing the “ball-striking”. The back story is that nothing has been able to knock the Miura Baby Blades shafted with Satin Rifle 6.5′s out of Eric’s bag for EIGHT YEARS. We have a few shaft companies who think that’s an insult. Starting this Friday and running who knows how many more Fridays – Eric will be testing “Magic Irons” with launch monitor assist provided by John Greenwood. You’re invited to watch if you’re in the neighborhood this Friday morning at 9.

PPPS: Eric is working on his next book – “Performance-Based Golf”. The key idea behind that book is “work on the most important recurring skills that you can test and measure”. Participants in the current “Five Most Important Shots in Golf” clinics can become test subjects for the book. We are working on proving Eric’s Master’s Thesis. Four players each shot their career low round during their participation in Eric’s program. If you would like to participate in the creation of Eric’s new book, make yourself known to Leithander@gmail.com.

That’s all from Leith, Eric and the Golf Lab Gang.

Posted in Game Improvement Services | Leave a comment

Schedule for Eric Jones’ Performance-Based Golf “Most Important Shots” Clinics on Saturdays

We have scheduled our “Four Key Shots” clinics for the next three months. Morning sessions will be presented at Pleasanton. Afternoon sessions will be at the Bridges (the best putting surface and the best short game area).

Eric is a two time Long Drive Champion. He has a Master’s degree in sports psychology and is a PGA pro. Details of the clinics are listed below. This is limited opportunity. Eric will use the results in his next book.

Here is the schedule. Details are in the article directly below and here: http://calgolflab.com/blog/2013/04/12/edel-wedge-fitting-and-free-coaching-program-intro/

April 13 – ——-

April 20 AM – Driver

April 27 AM – Scoring clubs (approximately 75 to 100 yards to green)

————————————

May 4 AM – Driver

May 11 AM – Scoring clubs (approximately 75 to 100 yards to green)

May 11 PM – Putting at The Bridges 2-5 PM

May 18 AM – Driver (all spaces filled – waiting list available)

May 25 – ——-

————————————

June 1 AM – Driver (all spaces filled – waiting list available)

June 1 PM – Putting at The Bridges 2-5PM

June 8 AM – Scoring clubs (approximately 75 to 100 yards to green)

June 8 PM – Greenside (chips, pitches, lob shots) at The Bridges 2-5PM

June 15 – ———————

June 22 AM – Driver

June 22 PM – Putting at The Bridges 2-5PM

June 29 AM – Scoring (approximately 75 to 100 yards to green)

June 29 PM – Greenside (chips, pitches, lob shots) at The Bridges 2-5PM

————————————

July 6 – ——-

July 13 AM – Driver

July 13 PM – Putting at The Bridges 2-5PM

July 20 AM – Scoring (approximately 75 to 100 yards to green)

July 20 PM - Greenside (chips, pitches, lob shots) at The Bridges 2-5PM

July 27 – ——-

————————————

Aug 3 AM – Driver

Aug 3 PM – Putting at The Bridges 2-4PM

Aug 10 AM – Scoring clubs

Aug 10 PM – greenside (chips, pitches, lob shots) at The Bridges 2-5PM

Aug 17 – ——————–

Aug 24 AM – Driver

Aug 24 PM – Putting at The Bridges 2-5PM

Aug 31 AM – Scoring clubs

Aug 31 PM- Greenside (chips, pitches, lob shots) at The Bridges 2-5PM

 

To reserve a time, contact Bob Pegram at 408-871-9983 or bobpgolf@dslextreme.com.

To contact Leith, his email is leithander@gmail.com or his cell phone: 650-743-2816.

For the putting sessions, contact John Ruark at 415-497-7627 or jwruark@yahoo.com.

 

Posted in Working with the Golf Lab | Leave a comment

Eric Jones’ “Four Key Shots” Clinics, This Week: Edel Wedge Fitting and Free Coaching Program Intro

Hi from Pleasanton,

There’s one question we all want to answer:

How do I get better at golf?

This article encourages you to “take the first step”. That’s not hard. You’ve taken the first step lots of times.

We’ve got great ideas for the “second step”- and beyond.

If you’re really committed to getting better at golf you know that you’re setting out on a journey.

A real trip. Not an airplane ride.

You need COMPANIONS WHO WILL BE WITH YOU WHEN THE RIVERS RISE. PARTNERS that RIDE FAST and SHOOT STRAIGHT.

That’s what we’re showing off this Saturday at Pleasanton.

We’re resisting common claims like “faster”, “more efficient”, “more professional”, “more experienced” and “cheaper”. Meaningless adjectives for golf.

Tomorrow morning, and every other Saturday morning – Eric Jones conducts his Performance-Based Coaching Program at the Pleasanton Fairgrounds. 680 at Bernal, go east to Valley, left to Gate 12, back of range. You’re there.

The underlying concept of Eric’s coaching program is that real improvement requires at least one day a week – for a couple of hours of intensive work with your coach. The first hurdle to joining Performance-Based Golf is commitment. Minimum commitment is one month, one day a week.

Way better is two or three times a week. Not forever. Three months is enough to guarantee improvement. You can finish before the summer is over.

Come over this Saturday for free – have a look around – hit some balls – and get to know Eric Jones. You can check out the best all grass PUBLIC range in the Bay Area. What it’s like to practice with the sun at your back and the breeze in your face. Solid contact. Perfect ball flight. Golf Nirvana.

The rest of THE TEAM will be there too. We’d love to talk to you about our mission. The goal of Performance Based Golf is to cut five strokes from your index within three months. Make a plan. Get results. That makes sense.

Performance-Based Golf tackles the four most important shots in golf:

  1. Driver off the tee – “Make Your Driver Your Best Friend”
  2. “Scoring Clubs” – wedges to 125 yards.
  3. The Seven Foot Putt – includes aiming, distance control and strategy
  4. “Greenside” – chipping, pitching, lob shots and bunker play

The foundation of Performance-Based Golf is four three-hour “Clinics”. Each clinic is three hours long. Each clinic focuses on conquering one of the most important shots in golf.

Performance-Based Golf doesn’t waste time changing your swing. Eric doesn’t care about your swing; he cares about your performance.

That means things you can see, measure and improve. Eric’s signature test for driving consistency is center contact. Train to hit at least seven out of ten drives inside the quarter-sized target in the middle of your driver. That takes care of center contact. Then you can “level up” and start working on distance, direction and shot shape.

You track improvement by more fairways hit and fewer catastrophic misses on the golf course. Scores come down quickly when you eliminate penalty strokes and catastrophic misses.

Background on “The Project”

I’ve described Eric Jones’ accomplishments many times before. Here’s what’s “behind the scenes”.

In case you missed the World Long Drive Championships last October – Eric won the World Super Senior Title. Two World Championships, ten years apart. That’s longevity.

Eric is finishing his book on “Course Strategy and Game Management”. His first book: “The Five Keys to Distance” has sold more than 30 thousand copies. He has packaged his book into series of lessons that he delivers the Internet.

Performance-Based Golf – based on mastering the “Four Key Shots in Golf” is the subject of Eric’s third book. He is already a candidate for “Teacher of the Year” in California thanks to his contributions on driving and the mental game. Eric’s vision is that Performance-Based Golf will change the way golf is taught – with much better results – in the future. He’s hoping that Performance-Based Golf will punch his ticket – a long-term career goal – to the Golf Teacher’s Hall of Fame.

You can be part of that.

We have scheduled our “Four Key Shots” clinics for the next three months. We are hoping to find ten clients who can commit to all four clinics – plus join the coaching program. You need to free up four Saturday mornings in the next three months – plus add at least one coaching session per week.

Your index will come down. Eric’s Masters Thesis documented an average of a five stroke improvement. Each of his Thesis subjects shot his career best score during the program. IF you’re willing to do the work – you will get results.

We are aiming to replicate the results of Eric’s Masters Thesis. Proof of concept for the new “Masters Class”.

We have scheduled our Saturday “Most Important Shots” clinics for the rest of the summer. Three sessions will be presented at Pleasanton. Two will be at the Bridges (the best putting surface). Here’s a link to the schedule:  Most Important Shots Clinic Schedule

Your total investment to participate in the program is $1500. That covers all four Clinics and the coaching program for three months.

Fair Warning on Limited Space

Next Saturday the 20th we are presenting our Driver Clinic. Three spots are already reserved. Three are available. The next Driver Clinic is not until May 4th. After that, it’s June 1. That’s too long to wait if you want to tame your driver this summer. The Driver Clinic is limited to six participants to assure plenty of personal attention from Eric.

First come, first served, based on the time stamp on an email to Leithander@gmail.com.

Check out the schedule and make all of your reservations for the summer. We are expecting to sell out all space available.

Edel Wedge Fittings this Saturday at Pleasanton – make your trip worthwhile.

If you want to get something extra done this Saturday, book an Edel Wedge Fitting.

For the last year, we have tested Edel wedges with our best customers. Emily Childs, now a pro, is at the top of the list. A list of NCAA players have Edel wedges in their bags. And dozens of Golf Lab clients. It’s a big responsibility to recommend a product that costs $50 more than “off-the-rack”.

If Edel wedges were the same as all other wedges, I’d say “don’t waste your time”. Edel wedges are different. The “bounce angle” is the most important key to better performance with wedges. All other wedge lines max out at 14* of bounce, that’s where Edel starts.

More bounce allows you to make a more aggressive swing – striking the ball first. Without fear of digging, you are free to make your natural swing. You get crisper contact. You see the result in ball flight. Your wedge shots hold their line better. An Edel wedge fitting lets you see true results for yourself. But only if you are outdoors, hitting off grass.

Edel offers the only shaft fitting system for wedges. You can test the entire range from lightweight graphite to the heaviest, stiffest steel. You understand feel and ball flight under the only conditions that matter: Outdoors from grass.

There’s a design theory and fitting system behind Edel wedges. The formula is “angle of attack” plus “forward shaft lean”. That is your position at impact. That defines the perfect bounce angle by scientific calculations. “The best bounce angle” for good players almost always exceeds 20*.

The key fitting proof is your divot. Edel’s mantra is “don’t disturb the roots”.

Is the Edel fitting theory correct? All Golf Lab “early adopters” still have Edel wedges in their bag. The conservatives who only bought one have come back to fill in their sets. If you haven’t tested high bounce in your wedges, you are not acting in your own best interest (regarding your golf improvement program).

Considering custom options that are free with Edel – that $50 doesn’t look so bad. We stamp your kid’s names on your wedges for no extra charge.

If you come over to Pleasanton on Saturday – your wedge fitting will take an hour. After that, you’re free to stay until your hands bleed. Eric will be there to meet you. Plan on doing some work.

The Edel wedge fitting is $99. If you buy a set of Edel wedges, we’ll waive the fee this Saturday only as an extra incentive. Your time with Eric is no extra charge.

Email me to reserve your time. One hour at 9, one at 10, two at 11 and two at 12. Get there early and make your practice time count. Leithander@gmail.com.

See you there.

Best regards,

Leith Anderson, Eric Jones, John Ruark and Bob Pegram.

Posted in Working with the Golf Lab | Leave a comment

The Best Deal in Golf Right Now

Hi from Palo Alto,

Report from the PGA SuperStore Sleuth in East Palo Alto.

Full disclosure: I joined the PGA Tour Golf Superstore as a clubfitter. I invite all of my prior clubfitting customers to meet up with me at the Superstore for a free fitting. I’m there on Friday and Saturday afternoons from 2 until 9 and all day Sunday.

The competitive advantage of the PGA Superstore is focused on “Services”. Equipment prices are “MAP” – “minimum advertised price” – there is no better deal available on current models. “MAP” is imposed by manufacturers who want to protect their distribution channels against discounting that smaller retailers can’t survive.

The Best Deal in Golf – Golf Lessons at the SuperStore

You probably wouldn’t be thinking about the PGA SuperStore as a great place to take lessons.

At normal pricing, lessons at the PGA SuperStore are a bargain. A six lesson series is $199. The first lesson is one hour for “evaluation”. After that, each lesson is 45 minutes.

This email is calls attention to a promotional price. Until the end of the month, a series of six lessons at the SuperStore is just $99. That special is good for the next two weeks – until the end of the month.

Who delivers the Lessons?

With golf lessons, it doesn’t matter if they’re cheap if the teacher isn’t up to par. The SuperStore has been open for a just couple of weeks. I’ve had a chance to get to know the instructors. There are all very good. They are all PGA or LPGA Class A professionals.

I’m real picky when it comes to golf instruction. For years, my advice to players looking for an instructor was to find a convenient range – Pin High, Stanford, Paly or Mariner’s Point – and take a place next to a teacher giving a lesson. Listen in. If you like the teacher’s style – invite him for a cup of coffee to get acquainted. You need to know what you’re getting into. Chemistry is a big part of golf instruction.

I’ve done that with each of the instructors at the SuperStore. The four instructors are very different in age and background. Here’s an overview:

Chris – the “old guy”. I first met Chris when he worked with Mitch Voges at Max Out Golf in Los Angeles. He’s a 35 year PGA member and was named “Teacher of the Year” in 2003. If you’re looking for a low key approach from a veteran – he’s your guy.

Andre – the “young guy’. Andre came to the SuperStore from Tahoe. He’s big and strong. If your chemistry includes pounding the ball and you want to hone your game for competition – I’d go with Andre.

Lionel – I’ve watched Lionel the most. I like his style. I brought him several fitting clients who were hitting the ball too high and leaking power. He made good fixes in a few minutes. If you’re not getting the ball flight you want – it’s not your clubs. With video and professional instruction – you might find that the “hard way” is really the “best way”.

Jessica – The lineup wouldn’t be complete without a female instructor. Jessica is a few years out of college where she played competitive golf. She has a very soft touch for beginners.

The Environment

The teaching bays at the SuperStore are private. Each one is equipped with an About Golf simulator and video.

The About Golf simulator is very accurate for spin. That is significant because the very same simulators are available in the SuperStore “practice bays”.

In addition to eight instruction and fitting bays – a unique feature of the SuperStore is six practice bays. There is no more economical way to practice.

$99 buys a “Player’s Plus” pass. That pass entitles to unlimited practice in one of the hitting bays for a whole year. You can make a reservation in advance. If all practice bays are occupied, sessions are limited to 30 minutes. If that’s not enough, you can get back in line.

If you’re planning to practice a lot – your breakeven is nine buckets.

Outdoor Demos

If you’re buying golf clubs – fittings usually narrow the field to a couple of “best choices”. From there, meticulous players want to take clubs outdoors – to a range or to their home course. Ball flight and sound seal the deal.

With a Player’s Plus Pass, you can take up to three clubs to “demo” for two days free. This is where the vast inventory of the SuperStore pays off. There are hundreds of demo clubs.

If you’re thinking about a new driver, we can make the choice accurate and efficient. New information on driver performance has been published in the last few days. Edwin Watts bought a simulator and tested all of the drivers in their inventory. A “rogue website” – My Golf Spy – just completed their own test focusing on performance – distance and accuracy. Both sources have named winners.

My next article is “All Drivers ARE NOT Created Equal”. I’ll sort out the “pros and cons”.

If you don’t want to wait, check out Edwin Watts and MyGolfSpy.com. For distance, the RBZ Stage 2 will be on your list. For accuracy, you’re going to want to try the Titleist 913.

Each model is ultra-adjustable. To avoid the frustration of random changes – we can set the specifications of loft and face angle in your free fitting. Your outdoor testing will be efficient and accurate.

“Growing the Game”

With all of the hoopla around making golf “more accessible” – the PGA SuperStore is doing something significant.

The SuperStore is not about country club members who already have access to all the help they need – and don’t mind paying “professional fees”.

The SuperStore is making professional instruction and practice available in a way that really counts. $198 covers six private lessons AND unlimited practice. That is the best deal in golf right now.

To make an appointment for a fitting or a lesson, call 650-600-5200. No appointment is necessary. You can just drop in.

Best regards,

Leith Anderson

PS – for any questions, email me: Leithander@gmail.com.

Posted in Fitting Methods and How to Buy | Leave a comment

PGA Tour Super Store opens in Palo Alto, “Scoring Clubs” Clinic this Saturday in Pleasanton**

Hi from Palo Alto,

If you’re planning to buy new golf equipment this year and you want to see every model from every name brand under the sun the new PGA Tour Super Store opens this week in Palo Alto.

Here’s a tip. This Wednesday, from 6-9 there is a “friends and family” event – part of the “soft opening” leading up to the Grand Opening on Friday. The incentive Wednesday evening is a 20% discount on most purchases. (Some companies prohibit discounting – Ping, Under Armour and a few more).

The best deal is a “Player’s Club Card”. It is normally priced at $199 but will be available for $99 on Wednesday night. If you plan to work on your game, the Club Card is a great investment. Here’s what you get:

Unlimited access to the “practice bays” at the Super Store for a whole year. The Super Store has six practice bays. Each bay is equipped with an About Golf launch monitor. The About Golf “3 Track” system is one of the most accurate in the business for ball speed, spin and trajectory. Practicing indoors, with launch monitor support is a great way to dial in your ball striking. Knowing your precise distances with every club in your bag – on average – is an important step in any serious program to take your game to the next level.

If you’re planning to hit a lot of practice balls, the Player’s Card is a big bargain. Compared to 10 cents per ball at the range – your breakeven is ten buckets. Plus, you can monitor your progress with the launch monitor. Indoor practice has not exactly caught on in California but until now, where would you go?

Free Fittings, Free Demos.  Club, ball and putter fittings at the PGA Super Store are free. The PGA Super Store has eight additional fitting bays – each with its own About Golf Simulator. One bay is dedicated to the Ping “In Flight” fitting system – also powered by About Golf.

When you find a couple of “winners” that you’d like to test outdoors – 48 hour demos are free.

Complete Set Demos. I’m a fan of the Taylor Made Rocketbladz irons. I wrote about a positive experience at the PGA Merchandise show back in January. Since then, a couple of Golf Lab clients bought the Rocketbladz and love them. The Super Store has a dozen sets of Rocketbladz for demo. Cost is $30 per day. If you’re thinking about Rocketbladz – there is no better way to be sure than taking them to your course. For details, see previous blog posts at http://calgolflab.com/blog/dashboard/.

Labor on re-gripping and repairs is free

Now you know the competitive advantage of the PGA Tour Super Store. They focus on “services”.

The focus on services carries over to lessons. The Super Store employs four PGA Teaching professionals. Single lessons are $49 for an hour. If you buy four lessons, you get six. Six forty-five minute lessons are $199.

Endless inventory. How about this? 200 LEFT-HANDED putters.

I lost count of the putters around the practice putting green. There are more than 300 Odyssey putters, 200 Ping putters and the best models from the other brands – including Scotty Camerons. The putter inventory is close to 1000 units. Total Super Store inventory is over 3 million dollars.

Putter fitting for length, loft and lie is free.

That should give you an idea of the best “Big Box” format in the golf industry. The PGA Tour Super Store is located on the east side of 101 at University Avenue in Palo Alto. If you know the neighborhood, it’s the former Best Buy location.

Scoring Clubs Performance Clinic this Saturday in Pleasanton

Our new focus at the Golf Lab is “Performance Coaching” – taking YOUR CLUBS and YOUR SWING to the golf course. For some players that means competition. For others it means “beating your buddies”. For every player it means “having fun”.

Collaborating with Eric Jones, we developed a curriculum and practice program aimed at reaching YOUR OWN “Next Level” of performance as quickly as possible by mastering the four most important shots in golf. The ultimate environment to reach your potential requires a natural grass surface, good targets and space to see ball flight. There is no better public location for serious game improvement than the natural grass range at the Pleasanton Golf Center.

The foundation is Eric’s “Golf Coach Program” – an original idea that he’s been polishing for the last eight years – now at Pleasanton and The Bridges Golf Course. Eric’s coaching program meets every Friday, Saturday and Sunday morning from 10-12. All twelve sessions in a month costs $245. If you can only spare one day a week, the cost is $165.

Players who really want to get better at golf – and are willing to do the work – know that they have to include theory with practice. Even better is when practice happens under the watchful eye of an accomplished coach who knows your game. That’s what the Golf Coach Program is all about.

“Scoring Clubs” Clinic this Saturday at Pleasanton Golf Center

A great introduction to the Golf Coach Program is an intensive three hour clinic devoted to one of the four most important shots in golf:

The Seven Foot Putt

Driver off the Tee

“Scoring Clubs” – wedges from 75 to 125 yards

Greenside chips, pitches and bunker play

This week we’re presenting our Scoring Clubs clinic – with the unique added value of fitting wedges for bounce and trajectory. Plan to arrive before 9 AM. The Pleasanton Golf Center is at the intersection of 680 and Bernal Road in Pleasanton. It is an easy 45 minute drive from the Peninsula and San Jose.

Your primary goal for the day is to CALIBRATE your wedge game – the all-important shots that score birdies and save pars. Working with a partner, the first hour is devoted to measuring the carry distance of each wedge in your bag – for full and partial shots. Your ultimate goal is consistent distance control.

Most players discover that their AVERAGE CARRY DISTANCE is at least ten yards less than they think. Simply choosing the right wedge to cover the distance to the pin rewards players with lower scores immediately – because it’s easier to hole a shorter putt. Previous clinic attendees report an immediate drop of 2-3 shots in their scores. What could be easier than that?

The next level of “enlightenment” comes when you discover that you hit your partial shots closer to the hole than your full shots. Knowing your carry distances gives you confidence to pull your gap wedge instead of your sand wedge.

An important concept in the Golf Coach Program is “Leveling Up”. When you find that your average distance from the pin from 100 yards is forty feet you know what to practice and how to measure and track your progress. Improve your average to ten feet from 100 yards and you will be performing to PGA Tour standards. You have a lot better chance to match professional performance levels with your wedges than with your driver.

Advanced Wedge Fitting for Bounce and Trajectory

For the last year we have worked extensively with David Edel’s wedge fitting system. Edel wedges are unique in the world. They are designed with HIGH BOUNCE sole grinds.

Suspend disbelief when we say that a wedge with 20* of bounce – or more – could transform your wedge game. If you want more information on Edel wedges – visit our blog -

Edel Wedge Fittings – Why Edel is Unique

and High Loft Wedges – the Shot You Don’t Have – Yet

or the Edel website: www.edelgolf.com.

The “short story” is that high bounce wedges provide MORE MARGIN FOR ERROR while still producing good results. A high bounce wedge allows you to strike the ball first with an aggressive blow. The bounce on the wedge prevents “digging”. Striking the ball first produces more spin. You will see your wedge shots hold their line in the wind and stop faster on the green.

After you have calibrated your wedge swing and measured your average distance to the pin you can compare performance of your current wedges to Edel high bounce designs. Numbers don’t lie. Are you closer to the hole or not?

The Edel wedge fitting system is designed with INTERCHANGEABLE SHAFTS. Once you have determined the best bounce to match your “angle of attack” – you can fine tune trajectory and feel with the best of over 25 custom shafts. Only Edel allows the seamless testing of every wedge head with every shaft.

After a year’s worth of experience with Edel wedges – fitting some of the most demanding players in the Bay Area – we know that the concept works. Every Golf Lab client who put Edel wedges in their bag is still playing them. Some players who tested the concept with a single wedge have come back to fill in their sets.

The Edel fitting system is especially important for women. Lightweight shafts at shorter lengths are much easier to control.

Edel wedges are totally different from every other wedge on the market. You can test for yourself at the Scoring Clubs clinic this Saturday.

The cost of the Clinic is $199. Only six spots are available. Email Leith Anderson (leithander@gmail.com) or telephone 650-743-2816 to reserve your spot.

Future Clinics and Special Events

We’re planning one clinic per week through the summer. On Saturday, April 13 we will present the “Driver off the Tee” clinic – a specialty for Eric Jones – two-time World Long Drive Champion.

On Sunday afternoon, April 14th, we will present the first “7 Foot Putt” clinic. If you would like to be part of that trial run – the cost is just $100.

Finally, if you would like to join me for a round of golf – the pinky is healed and the season is on. There is no better way for me to understand your game – and to help you make a plan for improvement than a round of golf. Call 650-743-2816 to make an appointment.

Best Regards,

Leith Anderson, Eric Jones, John Ruark and Bob Pegram

PS:

We have plenty of open time. If you want to do something privately, or at your Club, get in touch. Leith Anderson 650-743-2816. See you in Palo Alto and sunny Pleasanton. For other questions, call Bob at 408-871-9983.

A look at the Pleasanton facility:

Eric Teaching

Eric Teaching

Eric Teaching from side

Small Small Class Size for Personal Attention

Range side view Pleasanton Range View

Posted in Fitting Methods and How to Buy | Leave a comment

Repeat of a Sellout – Eric Jones “Longer and Straighter” Driver Clinic

Hi from Sunny Pleasanton,

Spending a weekend morning working on your game is a great way to bring your index down immediately. We’re holding another Driver Clinic this Saturday from 9-12 at Pleasanton. If you’re looking to cut your index by five strokes or more – the Driver Clinic is your best starting point. Four slots are open. Here’s what happens:

Eric Jones speaks a different language. His approach to getting better at golf is upside-down from conventional thinking. That’s why I like it.

I couldn’t care less if I had a one-plane swing, a two-plane swing or a JET PLANE swing.

Neither does Eric.

His goal is to help you shoot lower scores without going through a swing makeover.

That’s what we did last Saturday with six golfers from different backgrounds, different games and different goals.

Everyone always starts in the same place.

Find your level. With golf, it’s the easiest possible test. Draw a circle around a quarter with a sharpie on the sweet spot of your driver. Put a sharpie dot on ten range balls. Position the balls on the tee so the dot contacts the driver. Hit ten shots. Note how many impacts fall inside the quarter-sized circle.

With my favorite driver, I only hit one drive on center. Level One.

On Saturday, three out of six players reached 5 out of ten inside – or touching – the circle.

That’s not good enough. If you want to advance to work on distance, direction or shot shape, you’ve got to get seven out of ten on the line. Eric sets the level on acceptable performance to move up.

That’s Eric’s focus for getting better at golf. Master the most important skills first.

It’s for your own good. If you can’t hit the ball on center seven out of ten times, you are wasting your time and risking frustration by trying to hit for distance or shape your shots.

Master the CRUCIAL shots first.

Benchmark your own Driver.

John Greenwoood, the clubfitter and clubmaker who lives just up the road from the driving range is working with us. His Zelocity launch monitor reports ball speed, launch angle and spin rate. The starting point in driver fitting is knowing how you driver compares to “theoretically perfect”.

Last Saturday, three players launched the ball way to low – losing 20 yards. Correct launch angle is crucial to reaching your optimal distance. Correcting low launch might be as simple as an inch of ball position at setup. The launch monitor helps you understand your swing.

How many yards are you leaving on the tee? We find out. We also find out “why?”

Now, we know what to work on.

Measure Your Driver. Adjust if possible.

The problem with every mass-market driver fitting is finding the actual measurements of your current driver. If you don’t know where you started, how can you know where you end up?

We measure your driver with our precision gauge. We know for sure what your driver really is.

Most modern drivers are manufactured to a tolerance of 1*. Our real-world experience reveals much more variation. Most modern drivers are marked at least 2* low. We have found drivers marked 11.5* that measure 17*. Correct driver loft, matched to your “angle of attack” is how we fit for perfect launch angle.

Driver face angle is important. If you are missing drives to the right, a likely reason is that your driver face is open at impact. With an adjustable driver, correcting face angle is simple. Our advanced driver fitting techniques matches your swing path to the correct face angle.

Who else is even thinking of that?

Finally, we check the flex and bend profile of your driver shaft to make sure you’ve got the right face angle to match your swing path. That’s an important fitting detail that is overlooked by all of the mass-market programs.

On Saturday, we made a quick change to Linda’s R9 that added ten yards to her drive by launching the ball higher. Simple adjustment but it required launch monitor data and an accurate measurement of her driver.

Back to the Tee Line.

Eric homes in on posture, alignment, and balance. The unique experience that Eric brings to the clinic is from the long drive world.

Eric is “under size” by long drive standards. The only reason he won two World Championships is that he gets every possible ounce of energy out of his swing.

You may make adjustments to your setup and posture to allow more freedom of movement and improve your center contact.

Every player enjoyed an immediate improvement in center contact. Improved center contact means an immediate increase in distance.

Now Let’s Work on Maximum Distance.

The key to learning any physical skill is to practice the skill. That sounds simple, but with a driver in your hands it’s not simple.

Eric introduces a series of drills that you can do with your own driver that teach you to swing faster by SWINGING FASTER.

The key to distance with a driver is gaining full range of movement, engaging the “Big Muscles” of your CORE. Eric demonstrates three simple ways to help you make a faster swing.

Wrapup: Every Player Is Different

This was a very diverse group. Linda was a wisp of a woman but a very serious player. She increased swing speed five MPH in one day. An adjustment to her grip will allow her to generate a lot more power. On the men’s side John represented NCGA Tournament players. He is a high-tech corporate executive who phoned his reservation in from a snow-bound Chicago. He already hits it a long way but Eric’s range of movement drills will add twenty yards. Kingsley is in improvement mode, ready to step up his dedication. He’ll be joining me in the coaching program. Bill, raw talent, totally self-taught. Launch angle with his driver was the issue. We told him to move the ball an inch forward and swing up. Perfect trajectory, fifteen more yards. Jeff, an athlete – finding his swing. He hit some of the best drives I’ve seen. All different players from all different levels.

We didn’t confuse things by changing golf clubs.

After twelve years of clubfitting, I think that we have really discovered the right way to fit a driver.

First, benchmark your swing with your current driver. Find YOUR LEVEL of performance.

If you’re planning to buy a new driver this year – you will get a better fit if you go through our Driver Clinic first. Be sure that you fit your driver to your most efficient swing.

The Close.

The Driver Clinic costs $199. You get everything that I just described. We are combining all sorts of things that you used to chase all over to find. You could spend a lot of money and too much time checking all the boxes.

If you want a driver fitting, you should complete the Clinic first. It will make a difference.

Pleasanton isn’t on the moon. If you’re coming from the Peninsula, it’s 30 miles – 40 from Los Gatos. The best route is the Dumbarton, get on 880 South, go East on Auto Mall Parkway to meet up with 680 North. If you believe that McDonalds is the “Breakfast of Champions” – pull of at Mission for your Egg McMuffin. Five more miles and get off at Bernal. Go right two lights to Valley, turn left to Gate 12, turn right, go past the gate to the back of the range. See you there.

It takes 45 minutes if you stop at McDonalds. Leave an hour ahead of time and you’ll be calm on arrival.

For a reservation: call Leith Anderson at 650-743-2816. We have four spots open for this Saturday.

Best Regards,

Leith Anderson, Eric Jones, John Ruark and Bob Pegram.

P.S. – Here’s a Peek at the Golf Lab Plan – So Far

We’ve found a spiritual home with Eric at Pleasanton. I think that Eric will be recognized as an innovator in golf instruction by the PGA. He’s done the work. Two World Long Drive Championships, PGA Class A, Masters in Sports Psychology, eight years on the practice tee with thousands of golfers.

We’re working on proving the concepts covered in his Master’s Thesis – that you can cut strokes quickly without a major swing makeover.

I’m testing the theory myself. I set my benchmark at Wente. I’ll follow up at The Bridges in May and Monarch Bay on June 5. That will allow me the three month timeframe covered in the Masters Thesis. It will be worth knowing. For a player coming back to golf, how much progress can you expect in three months from three supervised practice sessions a week?

How important is honing in on the “Four Most Important Shots in Golf?” That’s what our three-hour Clinics are all about. You can spend a morning and get into depth mastering a shot you’re going to need every hole. An underlying concept in all of our presentations will be efficiency. How can you cover several subjects and get in some needed practice in a single trip?

  1. The seven foot putt.
  2. Driver off the tee.
  3. Scoring clubs – wedges from 125 and in.
  4. Around the green – chips, pitches, lobs and bunker play.

The problem with current methods of teaching golf is that there is no “How?” and “Why?” built into a structured program.

I’m behind the Player$ Golf Tour as a perfect environment for testing your game. I think that a formal test under tournament conditions.

Clubfitting in the Future

Start by looking at the past. Way too complicated. Fitting inside. Bag full of clubs to the range. Return to the shop. Discuss things you might not remember. That model deserved to die.

Ultimately, you need to test any new club outdoors, from grass.

The Golf Lab will be fully mobile. Radar works better outdoors than indoors.

I am building the ultimate set of test clubs for outdoor fitting.

One session should do it all.

In the very near future, we will be offering complete driver fittings outdoors. That will be the ultimate in accuracy and convenience. You have to go outdoors to finish testing golf clubs. Now you can do the testing and the analysis at the same time.

Prior Big Ideas that I Haven’t Given Up On.

Complete set demos. Why gamble? If you go through a fitting and a pretty good idea shows up, why not test that idea?

I have complete sets of “fantasy clubs”. If you really want to know the difference between Aerotech 70, 80. 95 and 110 gram shafts, I have a demo set built with each.

For the last two years, taking a demo set to your own course has been the way to seal the deal with exotic graphite shafts and Japanese boutique foundry heads.

I am making time to get back to clubmaking. I’m in love with the new ultra-premium iron shafts. Look for in-depth coverage of Aerotech, Matrix, Accra, Hybrix, UST and Nunchuk. There are so many cool shafts.

Testing is heating up. I’ve spent one extensive session with John Driver – an elite amateur for many years in Northern California. We’re working through all of the “likely suspects”. The first choice for a few clubs was the Aerotech 95.

I’ve started a new blog thread which will be a continuation of the “Golf Equipment Chronicles” – described as the “Clubfitter’s Notebook”.

Clubfitting for Current Models

We have a relationship with Cool Clubs at Mariner’s Point that allows any Golf Lab client to come in, with me, to go through the Cool Clubs fitting process.

If you are thinking about a new driver, Cool Clubs has all of the current models that can be tested side by side.

If you want to compare Nike with Callaway and Taylor Made – it makes sense to book a Cool Clubs Driver Fitting. Call Leith Anderson to work out a convenient time. Cost is $125.

A logical sequence would be to complete the Driver Clinic and then book a Cool Clubs fitting if you’re thinking about a 2013 driver.

PPS:

That’s all.

We have plenty of open time. If you want to do something privately, or at your Club, get in touch. Leith Anderson 650-743-2816. See you in sunny Pleasanton.

Posted in Fitting Services | Leave a comment

Player’s Journal

Hi from Sunny Pleasanton,

This was the weekend that I came back to golf.

Six months off means a long way back. I wanted to find out how far I have to go.

The first step on the journey is to benchmark your game. The only true test is tournament golf.

The ultimate pressure in golf is writing your score on the wall in front of your friends. (That’s facing me right now.) Next highest pressure is betting more money than you want to lose.

If you choose to bet more money than you want to lose, the Player$ Golf Tour is better than the Pepsi Tour. The thing that you get with the Playerf$ Tour is PERSONALITY. JW Means is one of those charismatic guys who believes in his vision of FAIR BETTING for significant money.

The Player$ Golf Tour is a unique operation. It is JW Means’ “private club” where players bet enough on themselves to make the game serious. The prize pool guarantees $1250 to the flight winner. If you’re willing to “invest” $200 for prize money and another $100 for greens fees – you’re a Player.

Make no mistake. It’s a zero sum game. The losers pay the winners. A normal flight is twelve players – three foursomes. Beat the other three guys in your foursome and you’ll cash most of the time. Three places pay out of twelve. Simple deal.

On Sunday, March 10th forty players showed up at Wente Vineyards in Livermore. They all put up the entry fee – except for me, Scott and Will – the “lookie loos”.

The field was divided into four flights. The first flight is scratch players – mainly young guys with dreams of playing on Tour – and older guys WITH GAME who like that kind of competition. The second flight is for handicaps from 2-8. The third flight is for 9 to 15. Fourth is for fifteen and up.

Here’s the amazing result. On Sunday, with forty of the most self-confident players in Northern California – not a single one posted a NET SCORE that matched his handicap. Not one.

If you had the guts to bet on yourself and shoot your handicap, you would have taken home $1250 in cash – and a trophy.

What’s with that?

Fact number one: Players melt under tournament conditions.

Fact number two: Tournament Golf Courses demand respect.

Fact number three: The Player$ Golf Tour manages its own handicap system. JW Means’ grandfather invented a handicapping system that eliminates sandbagging. Your NCGA handicap is a starting point. If you’re going to bet more money than you want to lose, you don’t want competition that manages their own handicaps.

The Player$ Tour handicapping system looks at the sequence of holes. If you make two bogies on the first six holes, you are limited to two bogies the last six holes. The handicapping system used by the USGA makes no such adjustment. The theory is that the first six holes catch a player at his peak. The last six holes can be influenced by match standing. Players that lose hope or pad their scores are penalized accordingly.

Most players believe that their Player$ Tour handicap is their real handicap.

Getting Ready – Saturday March 9, 2012

I never planned on going out dead cold.

But I only had time for one “Crash Course” with Eric Jones at his “office” – the back side of the range at the Pleasanton Fairgrounds.

Eric is a unique golf teacher. He played and coached at Stanford. Ten years ago he won the World Senior Long Drive Championship. That set him on a path to teach golf as his life’s work. He earned his PGA Class A membership. He completed a Master’s Degree in Sports Psychology. As a splendid encore, he won the World Super Seniors Long Drive Title again in 2012.

Ten years between World Championships – competing at the highest level every year – has made Eric a legend in the Long Drive World. Time and again, television analysts have credited Eric with the “best swing” among all contestants. He is not as strong as the Olympic Athletes who compete these days in Long Drive. His success and longevity is testimony to his technique.

Eric’s signature contribution to golf instruction is his Coaching Program. That is what is Master’s Thesis was about. Getting better at golf is a journey that requires continuous improvement across a range of skills. Eric’s coaching program offers a player six hours of personally-coached practice a week – and all the balls you can hit at the best public all-grass range in the Bay Area.

In the academic test – focusing on mental skills and key shot techniques – all but one player shot his career best round within four months.

Eric’s coaching program runs Friday, Saturday and Sunday mornings from 9-12. For a monthly fee of $245 you can hit unlimited range balls under Eric’s expert eye twenty four hours a month. Players who can only have one day a week can reserve a “half month” – four coaching sessions – for $165. Eric is a dedicated teacher. He has spent every Friday, Saturday and Sunday morning coaching golfers for the last EIGHT YEARS.

Eric’s coaching helps players perform under pressure with the swing they already have. Serious swing flaws need to be corrected, but very few players who schedule practice every week have swings that need a makeover. The key to efficient improvement is practicing the most important shots in the right sequence.

True improvement requires scheduling practice and instruction. How many hours to return to prior form? How many hours to reach your “stretch goal?” If you want to make something happen, you’ve got to do the work. Alas, I didn’t have time for “work”. I needed to post a score. Sound familiar?

My immediate problem was that Wente Vinyeards is both spectacular and dangerous. The golf course wends its way – up and down – through active vineyards. There are holes where out of bounds is ten yards off the green. The slope is 150 from the tips so that gives you an idea of level of difficulty. I was worried about writing my score on the wall.

My question: “how can I play better tomorrow?”

Find Your Level

Eric took my driver and pulled a Sharpie and a quarter out of his pocket. He drew a circle with the quarter on the sweet spot on my driver. Then he took his Sharpie and put a blue dot on the back of ten range balls. Instructions: “Hit the blue dot.”

“We’re finding your level”. With driving, the most important thing is CENTER CONTACT. If you can’t get to “Level 7″ – measured by how many imprints of the ball come inside the quarter-sized circle – you will wasting your time trying to hit for distance or to shape your shots.

Where have you heard that before? Never for me.

I hit one out of ten drives inside the line. It wasn’t dead center. I’m Level One.

That was a humbling, but enlightening experience.

Eric confessed that when he was down to his last ball – the one he needed to win the World Championship – he focused on the blue dot in his brain that matched the blue dot on the back of the ball. He hit that one dead center and the rest is “history”.

I made the immediate decision to play a “Thriver” at Wente. A Thriver is a 43.5″ driver with a high loft head that weighs over 205 grams. Players who hit their three metals as far as their drivers should take note.

My commitment to the Thriver came with an adjustment in my setup. “If you’re hitting it on the toe, move closer and line up on the heel”. It looked wrong to me but I started hitting the Thriver more on center. Simple fix.

Teeing Up at Wente

There is no doubt. The Thriver at Wente saved a bunch of strokes. The first two holes set the table. The opening drive is from a promontory into a valley. I’ve seen players pump five balls into the grapes from there. No place for a “Level 1″ to test his skill. I made the fairway and a one-putt par.

The second hole at Wente is “thread the needle”. You won’t find a smaller opening off the tee anywhere in the Bay Area. You need a rifle, not a driver. I threaded the needle and landed my wedge ten feet past the hole. Even par after two. I was in Golf Heaven.

A Lesson on Course Management

I felt like a Master of the Universe standing on the third tee. We measured distance. Uphill, into the wind. I chose a six iron for the 150 yard shot. It was a conscious choice of an “extra club”. I hit it solid and it went deep.

60 feet down hill. I came up short. Eight more feet downhill. Four feet uphill. Just like Seve when asked about a four-putt: “I miss, I miss, I miss, I make.”

OOPS!! Double bogey with a GIR. Wake-up call.

My lesson was to continue through the rest of the round. Above the hole is death. If you are lagging downhill from a distance of 60 feet – you’re a good bet for 3 putts.

A Lesson on Iron Play

All the buzz for the last several months has been about super-premium graphite shafts in irons. I have complete test sets of AeroTechs Steel Fiber, Matrix Kujoh, Radix and Program, UST Recoil Prototypes and the ACCRA pure graphites and the newest Hybrix graphite and Stainless Steel multi-material experiment from ACCRA. Don’t forget the Nunchuk. The options in premium graphite are fabulous examples of shaft design technology.

With all the newer options, I went back to “old school” steel.

I pulled a set of Shimada Tour shafts from Scott Cunningham’s tournament bag – “my Miuras aren’t performing” – on his way to Aerotech Steel Fiber 95′s. I took the Shimada pulls, set the flex a little softer and installed them in a set of UNITED Flat Back Forged Blade heads.

The Shimada shafts are about 115 grams which makes them a lot heavier than most of the graphite that has been so successful lately. I assumed that I would lose distance with heavy steel shafts.

I took that set out for a couple of “three balls in your pocket” rounds. They went farther than I expected. I felt a satisfying little “kick”. Shot shape was a baby draw – just what I had in mind.

So I stuck with the UNITED blades on Shimada shafts, Golf Pride Midsize Tour Velvet grips. Who would think that I would choose heavy steel shafts for my “gamers”.

All that is the good news. The bad news I that I had no idea how far they would go. I assumed that I would lose distance but the heavy steel seemed to go just as far as my favored lightweight graphites. I continually over-clubbed.

And there you have a key difference between heavy steel and graphite. Steel wants you to hit it hard. I obliged and went deep into every green.

Lighter weight shafts permit more finesse. The club isn’t whispering in your ear “hit me hard’. For me, graphite is still the choice when you need to take a little off the shot. I’m going back to graphite for at least the next couple of rounds.

Tournament Courses, Tournament Conditions = Always Below the Hole

Always above the hole. Eight three putts. And a four putt.

What’s with that?

Every week on TV the analysts emphasize “below the hole”. If you’re playing tournament conditions and you blast the ball into the fat part of the green, you’re going to be above the hole most of the time.

I was guessing about distance. When you need to hit the green below the hole you need to know exactly how far every iron flies – full and partial swings. Hit to the fat part of the green and risk three putting.

That gives you something to practice.

Here’s the Number

I shot 92. My score went up on the wall. If I were playing for money – I’m road kill.

Needless to say, shooting 92 was not exactly what I had in mind when I teed it up. After two holes I would have bet a million dollars that I’d break 90. Lucky I didn’t have that chance.

I set the benchmark. The good news there’s lots of room for improvement. My embarrassment was soothed by noting that my 92 would have been good competition for some of the scratch players. Wente is a hard course.

My three month stretch goal is to break 80 in competition (again). Thirteen strokes needed.

Player$ Golf Tour – Del Rio Country Club, March 24th 2013.

The next Player$ Tour event in the Bay Area is March 24th.

The tournament originally scheduled at the Bridges was moved to Del Rio – a trek from the Bay Area but a First Class private golf course. On the Player$ Tour, you get a “Tour”.

If you would like to test your game against devoted tournament players, think about joining me at the Bridges on May 5 or at Monarch Bay on June 2.

Here’s My Program

I can’t count the times that I’ve wondered “what will it take?” A few years ago Winn Wilson was working at the Pin High driving range and if you booked a lesson with him you went to the back of the range for a couple of hours of hitting shots from good grass with the sun at your back and the wind in your face. That was my previous best learning experience. Alas, Winn is now on the Celestial Golf Tour.

I’m joining Eric’s Coaching Program in Pleasanton. Good grass. Sun at your back and wind in your face. The perfect practice environment.

I’ll be in Pleasanton on Friday, Saturday and Sunday mornings from 9-12. My next serious benchmark rounds are Bridges and Monarch Bay. If everything goes OK, I’ll have a handicap I can play to by Monarch Bay on June 2nd.

I invite any Golf Lab client who wants to improve his scores by ten strokes or more to join me.

If you’re thinking about joining the Player$ Tour, you can take advantage of our “lookie loo” deal with JW. Two tournaments. Pay greens fees only. After that, if you think you can play with the Big Boys, you can join the Tour. That’s my goal.

The easiest way to get started is through one of Eric’s Clinics that focus on the “Four most important shots in golf.”

  1. The Seven foot putt
  2. Driver off the tee
  3. Scoring Clubs: Wedges from 125 yards and in.
  4. Greenside: Chipping, pitching and bunker play.

Eric’s “Performance Golf” clinics are a great way to get started on an improvement program. Each one is three hours. There is plenty of time for theory and practice. If you would like a quick peek at the “Driver off the Tee” clinic, here’s a link: http://calgolflab.com/blog/2013/03/15/bulletin-from-the-golf-lab/

See you at Pleasanton?

If you’re working on your game and want to see results, we have a unique environment at Pleasanton. Over time, all advanced Golf Lab fitting services – based on state-of-the-art Flightscope radar will be available outdoors at Pleasanton. It is no longer necessary to go indoors for fitting and outdoors for proof.

If you are dedicated to improving your golf game, get in touch with me: Leithander@gmail.com, (650) 743-2816.

Best regards,

Leith Anderson, Eric Jones, John Ruark and Bob Pegram.

Posted in Unclassified | Leave a comment

Driver Off the Tee Clinic

Hello from the Golf Lab,

I’m working on an important article.  It’s taking a couple of extra days and time is running short.

IMMEDIATE ANNOUNCEMENT I need five “volunteers” for a noble purpose this Saturday.

I’m working with Eric Jones to develop a completely new program for improving your PERFORMANCE on the golf course.

The “Open Front Door” is a three-hour Clinic.    Each three hour session focuses on one of the four most important shots in golf:

1        Driver off the tee.

2        Scoring wedges – hitting the green from 125 yards and in.

3        Greenside – pitches, lobs, chipping and bunker play

4        The five to seven foot putt

Each session is designed to include analysis, professional instruction, practice and calibration to produce measurable improvement in performance.

The three hour session makes preparation and travel worth the effort.  Three hours of work – focusing on one the most important shots in golf – will bring your handicap down.

This Saturday from 9-12 is the first production of our “Driver from the Tee” Clinic.  We are going all-out to make the morning as productive as possible.

Here’s what’s going to happen:  (Eric’s analysis and instruction part)

After warm-up, you’ll draw a circle the size of a quarter on your driver’s sweet spot.  Then, you’ll draw a blue dot on ten range balls.  You’ll hit ten balls on the spot.  We will count how many blue dots fall inside the quarter line.

When I took the test, I was shocked to see that I only hit one drive inside the line.  Everything else was high and off the toe.  I could see them peeling into the trees on the right.

I was one for ten.  A humbling experience.

(BTW:  I used that knowledge the next day to put a 43″ driver in my bag for Wente Vineyards, with great results.  Eric moved me closer to the ball.  Alignment inside center.  Better contact.  DUH.)

You will know your level.  My level was ONE.

Eric’s conclusion:  I needed to work on my swing move with a more manageable driver until I could meet a minimum LEVEL SEVEN.

The reason Eric gives the level test is that he knows until you can put the club on the ball consistently – measured by the quarter test – it will be a waste of time and source of frustration to practice the THREE NEXT MOST IMPORTANT THINGS for CONSISTENT DRIVER PLAY.

Eric’s priorities are:

1)      Center Contact – must be level 7 or higher to proceed.

2)      Direction

3)      Distance

4)      Shape – Trajectory

It does no good to work on Levels 2,3 and 4 until you have reached a minimum skill level for solid contact.  Once you’ve taken the quarter test, Eric will help you make adjustments in setup, alignment and ball position which could be very simple.

The essence of Eric’s coaching program is “Work on the most important thing until you’ve achieved sufficient skill to “level up”.

This example provides significant insight into a very different method for coaching a golfer.

Work on your swing for an hour.  Take the test again.  Are you ready to “level up?”

Added Value Services:

The Golf Lab is contributing some additional services to the Driver Clinic that would normally come as a value-added extra.

We will bring our precision gauge from the Callaway Tour Van to give you a true measurement of face angle and loft of your driver.  That is the first step in fitting a driver.  Driver adjustment is not precise.  Tolerances are plus or minus one degree.  In fact we’ve measured drivers marked 11.5* at 17*.

We will set your adjustable driver to the best angles to fit your swing.

John Greenwood – Launch Monitor Analysis

John Greenwood has been plying his trade on the East Side of the Bay for 17 years.  He’s going to join the party this Saturday and he’s bringing his portable launch monitor.

He’ll test your current driver.  You’ll get ball speed, launch angle and spin rate.  If you fall short of optimal performance, you’ll know why.

John is a master of the Vector launch monitor.  He is a highly skilled driver fitter having worked with dozens of top contestants – including Eric Jones.

The Magic Driver Bags

Everyone loves hitting a demo.  No point wasting your time.  I’m bringing TWO MAGIC DRIVER BAGS.  After the quarter test, you’re going to want to try something a little shorter.  We’re bringing a bag full of drivers, each measured for true face angle and loft.  Don’t waste your time with a driver that can’t work with your swing.

We’ll also have a bag full of the fancy Japanese brands and the latest from Adams, Miura, Vega and United.

Business Details

The cost for the three hour session is $199.  First-come, first served to my cell phone:  (650) 743-2816.

I want to make sure we have six participants – a strict limit for this first session.

Since this is very short notice, I’m going to accept bids for last-minute placement.  If a $50 ticket is incentive enough to make the trek to Pleasanton, give me a call.

Best Regards, Leith Anderson, Eric Jones, John Ruark and Bob Pegram

Posted in Unclassified | Leave a comment

Why Do You Play Golf?

Hello from the Golf Lab,

During my five month layoff, I’ve had a lot of time to think about “Why I play golf?”

I can answer.

To come through in the clutch.

Under pressure.

That’s the best way to test a golf swing.  Bobby Jones said it sixty years ago:  “There is golf and there is tournament golf and they are not the same.”

I like playing in competition where every swing is an opportunity to perform under pressure.   In the bigger picture, finishing a round under tournament conditions and shooting my handicap is a worthy goal.

The Player$ Golf Tour

The Player$ Golf Tour is a private club that you pay $200 per year to join.  That means under USGA rules you can bet and win as much as you dare.  Just like all the private clubs that hold Calcuttas.

After that, the entry fee is $200 per tournament.  The winner is guaranteed $1250.  That’s a big difference from your average club tournament.  Is a $1250 prize enough to raise the pressure on your game?

Six months ago I met up with JW Means at Roddy Ranch.  I wanted to see if I was wasting my money by betting on myself.  JW let me have a “lookie loo” round.  Show up, pay the greens fees, test the competition and see if you want to join.

I shot 85.  I wasn’t overly embarrassed – I could see slipping under 80 with attention to focused practice and specific shot mastery.  If not winning, I could see “cashing”.  Then I had the broken pinky. . .

If you join the Player$ Tour, it signifies that you’re willing to bet $200 on yourself.  That’s a pretty hefty entry fee.  However, given tournament pressure, net scores over par frequently win.  Under tournament pressure, the other players might crumble.

Several Golf Lab clients play on the Player$ Tour and love it.  They win money because they can play to their index under pressure.  Rick Kehr, David Olmeda and Walt Joyce don’t mind that I mention their names.  It was their recommendation that got me to come out.

Who Plays the Player$ Tour?

The Player$ Tour is fundamentally a “developmental tour” for hot sticks.  JW Means has a soft spot in his heart for the young guys who are trying to make it.  He puts up the ultimate prize.

Any player who scores five birdies a round in at least five tournaments gets his way paid to PGA Tournament Qualifying School.

JW has delivered on that promise.

As usual, there are a bunch of us “old guys” who need handicap strokes to make competition meaningful.

And that’s the big difference.  JW has his own handicapping system.  It doesn’t allow sandbaggers.  You’ve got to be an “honest golfer” to play.

This Sunday Wente Vinyards – Two Weeks – The Bridges

I’m back.  I don’t have confidence that I can finish a serious golf course like Wente without a catastrophe.  There’s a big difference playing a “real” golf course where making a million is a possibility.  I’m scared, but I’m not too scared to show up.

I recruited two recent Golf Lab customers to play with me this week at Wente.  It’s the same “lookie loo” deal.  We play at the end of the field.  We pay greens fees.  We suffer the ultimate pressure of posting a score at the end.

Thanks to Scott Cunningham and Will Hudson for screwing up the courage to join me this Sunday.

Two weeks from now, the Player$ Tour visits the Bridges.  That’s a great test.  In thirty rounds, I have never finished with the same ball.  I’m looking forward to that.

Link to The Player$ Tour:   http://theplayersgolftour.com/

Link to Wente Vineyards: http://www.wentevineyards.com/golf/

Link to The Bridges: http://www.thebridgesgolf.com/layout9.asp?id=233&page=8391

The Challenge for 2013 – Performance Golf

You don’t have to love tournament golf to have fun – and meet a challenge.  This year will be dedicated to getting better at golf.  That’s my personal goal.

If you have similar intentions, start thinking about setting aside some time to get better by developing a program.

I’m hooking up with Eric Jones at Pleasanton.  It’s the best public range in the Bay Area.  If you want to have a look, hop in your car Saturday morning and cruise 680 to Bernal Road.  Exit east toward Pleasanton.  Second stop light, take a left.  Quick right and you’re in the front gate at the Pleasanton Fair Grounds.  The driving range is on your left.  Pass that by and circle around to the back of the range.  That’s where the sun is at your back and the wind in your face.  It’s the perfect practice environment.

Come on by.

I’m at 650-743-2816.

Regards,

Leith Anderson

Posted in Unclassified | Leave a comment

In Depth with Bobby Grace – Interview by Biv Wadden – Orlando PGA Show – 2013

Hello from the Golf Lab,

I am excited to show the results of our video project.  We wanted to bring the experience of attending the PGA Show to life.  This is the closest I’ve seen to the true-life experience.

Biv Wadden is the perfect guy talk to Bobby Grace.  He is a former financial analyst turned teaching pro.  His hobby is the golf swing.  He has taken hundreds of lessons from every famous teacher over the last thirty years.  If you want to stay up past midnight discussing every possible swing motion, Biv is your guy.  Biv knows the Bobby Grace line because he played Bobby Grace putters for fifteen years.  What better guy?

Bobby Grace has a unique theory of putter design.  If these videos are good –  you will want to try out the new Bobby Grace models.

Here’s my invitation to join the conversation:

Orlando PGA Show 2013 Introduction
Orlando PGA Show 2013 Introduction

If you’ve been out of the putter market recently, Bobby Grace is one of the BIG NAMES in putters.  He looks like a young man – and he once was – back in the day when his “Fat Lady” helped Nick Price make one very long putt at a crucial time to win THE OPEN.  Annika Sorenstam played with a Bobby Grace model in her bag.  For a brief period, Bobby Grace putters were #1 on both the men’s’ and women’s Tours.

You win the trivia prize if you name the senior tournament that Bobby Grace putters covered first through tenth place.

Why is Bobby Grace relevant today?

Alas, Bobby has been out of style for the last few years.  He’s trying to get over his “Celebrity Designer” phase and revert to “plain old Bobby”.

In recent years, the most popular putters have been milled in the style of Scotty Cameron – conservative in design – and aimed at collectors.  There is zero technology in milled putters.  All responsibility for performance belongs to the player.  Thank Tiger for that.

Bobby Grace designs putters to help a player get better results from a less-than-perfect stroke.  He was the earliest supporter of extreme head shapes to resist twisting at impact.  His “zero loft theory” is well-explained in the videos along with his belief in face balanced putters.  His “variable rebound” face technology is “the one the USGA should have outlawed”.  If you want to know why Bobby thinks his designs and technology are on the cutting edge you will see him tell his story just like you’re standing in his booth on the PGA Show floor.

Here’s the link to Bobby’s discussion of variable rebound face technology, his “zero loft” theory of putter face design and Bobby Grace putter success on Tour:

2013 PGA Bobby Grace Putters Intro
2013 PGA Bobby Grace Putters Intro

Face Balance, Toe Down or MOI (heel down)?

One of the interesting debates over putters is balance.  Face balanced?  Toe down?  Or, David Edel’s concept of heel down for maximum MOI.  Here’s Bobby Grace’s view:

2013 PGA Show Bobby Grace Putters Face Balance
2013 PGA Show Bobby Grace Putters Face Balance

In this video Bobby describes the design concepts behind his new “MOI Face Balanced” putter – tentatively named the “Ass Kicker” – and misconceptions about loft.  Biv initiates a debate, but backs down.

2013 PGA Show Bobby Grace Putters
2013 PGA Show Bobby Grace Putters

And then there’s the Veteran’s marketing brilliance.  Bobby de-coded all of the likely outcomes with putter length and concluded that the only method that allows a form of anchoring will be the “Arm Anchored” method – employed by Matt Kuchar on Tour – and specifically exempted by the USGA.

Bobby analyzed the Arm Anchored putting style and concluded that the only way to make it work is a custom designed putter – fit to length and lie – but with up to 15* of onset.  If you are thinking of going to the Arm Anchored method you are wasting your time by trying to add a little length to your putter to make it work.

I made a quick Internet check for indications of current interest in the Arm Anchored style.  Callaway is out with an “Arm Lock” model – note the competition in trademarked terms.  If you’re thinking about adopting the last remaining advantage in putting – be sure you see what Bobby has to say.

Here’s the link to the Bobby Grace “Arm Anchored” putter information:

2013 PGA Show Bobby Grace Putters Arm Anchor Putter
2013 PGA Show Bobby Grace Putters Arm Anchor Putter

There are still plenty of times that the WRITTEN WORD is the best medium – but I don’t think that I’ll ever write another product review.  I am so excited and anxious to hear what readers think.  My email is  leithander@gmail.com.  Please let me know.

Best regards,

Leith Anderson, Bob Pegram and John Ruark

Posted in Golf Equipment Chronicles | Leave a comment

Live from Orlando – The War of the Gizmos | Bulletin on Focus Band and Mike Weir

Hi from Orlando,

One of the important trends that emerged at the 2013 PGA Show is the proliferation of swing and performance analysis tools – the category is “training aids” – but the new gizmos are way more than simple gadgets.  In some cases, they are third and fourth generation inventions that cost less than $200 and fit in your pocket.

Others like 3-D motion analysis (several vendors) represent research systems that used to cost tens of thousands and are now fit the budget of golf teachers.  Radar is becoming a mandatory tool at three levels:  clubfitting, swing coaching and training.

The underlying concept is to really get better at golf you have to do something every day.  Most instructors are happy with a few minutes of practice a day.  That demands drills and exercises that you can do at home.  If you need a gizmo, it has to fit the budget.

Examples include the E21 launch monitor at $199 (show special) to the SwingByte (under $200 show special) that came out last year and now might be ready for prime time.  The Focus Band is not quite in that “consumer” price range at $3000 but it is an example of technology that you take home and work with every day.

The Focus Band and Mike Weir

For the last three years, we have worked with practically every golf gizmo from the bleeding edge of technology.  The most exotic of those is the Focus Band.  You wear the Focus Band.  It detects the source and frequency of your brainwaves.  Go to the  http://calgolflab.com/blog/dashboard/  for past articles that tell the Focus Band story in detail.

The key to adoption of any technology is answering the question “Does it work?”  That normally means “What Tour Pros are using the gizmo with success?”

That has been a challenge for the Focus Band.  To begin, the entire company is just two people so that sets tight boundaries.  Second, they’re all the way down in Australia making communication difficult.  Third, progress is slow – especially when you’re trying to help a PGA Tour professional get better.

How long should it take to show results?  If there are no answers, it’s hard to crank up enthusiasm to spend time and treasure working with unproven technology.

Rod Pampling

The first Focus Band True Believer was Rod Pampling.  His wife is a psychologist and she has collaborated with the Boultons to develop Rod’s program.

Rod Pampling 1

 Picture of Rod Pampling at Golf Lab

Rod had better results but his performance was mixed.  He missed his 2013 Tour Card by a few strokes.  He finished high in his last tournament in Australia – bogeying the last two holes to lose the tournament.  So far, the Pampling example is good but not convincing enough to cause a rush to Focus Band.

Mike Weir Results

Now we have a story for you to follow this weekend.  Mike Weir bought a Focus Band just eight weeks ago.  He worked closely with Henry Boulton – in from Australia – and Jason Goldsmith – a Southern California golf teacher and entrepreneur.

He shot 66 on Thursday and came back with a 75 on Friday.  That’s the first cut he’s made in a long while.

Here is link to a very good blog article from an accomplished writer about Mike Weir’s use of Focus Band.

http://globeandmail.golfcanada.ca/blogs/lorne-rubenstein/article30981.ece

And finally, here’s what Mike Weir himself had to say about how much the Focus Band has meant to him after his 66 on Thursday.

Links to Mike Weir interviews:

http://youtu.be/Z6SO0arq818

http://youtu.be/gGphK_iNy2s 

This is the first indication of quick improvement.  Mike Weir knew nothing of Focus Band eight weeks ago.  He is now crediting his Focus Band training for significant improvement.

John Ruark – Focus Band Practitioner

We are fortunate to have one of only two US experts in Focus Band in the Bay Area.  That’s John Ruark.

John Ruark and Rod Pampling John Ruark (right) with Rod Pampling

If you want to improve your putting, it’s going to take a program.  If you really want to improve, here’s an example of the kind of program that can get results.

Link to “under 30 putts” Article:

http://calgolflab.com/blog/2012/10/18/30-putts-per-round-five-session-program-to-break-the-barrier/

Call Bob Pegram if you would like more details on “Under 30 Putts” 650-654-1770.

Best regards,

Leith Anderson and the Golf Lab Gang – Bob Pegram and John Ruark – and associate Joel Whittom in Sacramento.

Posted in Golf Equipment Chronicles | Leave a comment

Demo Day – Orange County National Golf Center – Metropolitan Hotel Room

Hi from Orlando,

Wednesday, January 23 and Thursday January 24, 2013

I needed an “incomplete” on this assignment.  So much already happened at ACCRA Day and Demo Day.  Wednesday got awfully long.  After hitting hundreds of balls at the Demo Day we headed over to the first meeting of the Professional Golf Teachers Group on Facebook.  We started at 7 and ended at 11.  But that’s what I came to Orlando to do.

I got all the answers I was looking for but it takes a while to tell the story.  Have respect for this article.  It cost me a day in a hotel room – away from the Show.  I want to cover the important subjects in depth.

Send an email to leithander@gmail.com if you have a specific question you’d like answered or product you’d like reviewed.  We’ve got until noon Saturday.

Demo Day 2013 – PGA Merchandise Show

This year was one of those charmed years when Demo Day was a huge success.  Rather than wind and rain, it was a little chilly in the morning.  The day turned sunny and the afternoon was the best ever.  The crowd stayed around until after five PM.  That is a sign of enthusiasm.  Most Demo Days are usually finished by three.

PGA Show registration is up.  In a couple of days, we’ll know if the enthusiasm and increased attendance shows up in the order books.

Faldo by Edel

The biggest story on the custom clubfitting side is Sir Nick Faldo joining Edel Golf as an equity owner.  The partners had a prime spot on the Demo Day range.  Their new Pixel logo emphasizes Faldo’s five Majors with a Signature “by Edel”.  David Edel is expanding to Global Markets and the Faldo name opens doors.  Joining with Faldo will be a breakout for Edel Golf.

The reason the association should work is that there is a close personal relationship developing between David Edel and Sir Nick Faldo.  This is way more than a financial deal.  Sir Nick is an active collaborator with David.  To really work, the partnership has to be about more than money.

The relationship started with an Edel putter fitting cart at the Faldo Institute introduced by Aimpoint founder Mark Sweeney.  Sir Nick took a putter fitting and was astounded by the problems with his stroke caused by faulty aim with his putters.  (He checked several from the bags in his garage.)  Then he ordered a custom Edel putter and it earned a place in his bag.

Wedges followed.  Sir Nick saw his wedge game improve after he switched to the Edel wedges – bounce angles from 18* to 22*.  When the wedges stayed in Faldo’s bag – a serious relationship was initiated by Faldo.

The first call:  “You got it right, twice?”

A lengthy courtship included a fishing trip to Colorado (David also designs fly fishing reels) and multiple visits to the Edel workshop.  The relationship between David and Nick is sustained with multiple daily text messages.  Nick is known for being meticulous about his equipment.  David Edel is the epitome of meticulous.

The key Faldo for Edel promise is “made for you”.  The markings on the Faldo irons include an issue indicator.  The trademark marking is “1 of 1″.  The notion is that every set is totally personalized, from all aspects of the grind and shape right down to the final weight and finish.  You own number one in a series of one.

(Faldo’s positive judgment on Edel’s “high bounce theory” for wedges must be noted.  All Golf Lab clients who switched to Edel high bounce wedges still have them in the bag.  If you haven’t booked your outdoor Edel wedge fitting and calibration session – call Bob Pegram.   As soon as the weather warms up a few more degrees we’ll be ready to go.)

Edel Irons Overview

Before the week is up you will surely see plenty of pictures of the new Edel iron line as well as the Faldo by Edel line.  For a quick look, click over to the Edel website:  www.edelgolf.com.   This is not a flash in the pan project.  The iron line has been in development for well over a year.  You will see pictures of many finishing options.  Finishing is “eye candy”.  What is really important is what you don’t see.

Here’s what’s unique about Edel custom irons:  Edel buys its raw “fattie” blanks from the foundry.  Each iron blank has 30 to 50 grams of excess material to be removed to produce the ultimate shape.  The blanks go to the machine shop where the cavities and faces are milled.  Then hand grinding sets the final weight and shapes the sole.  Like wedges, Edel irons come with high bounce soles.  Six and eight irons at the Demo Day were measured at 11* and 13*.  Edel is bringing the wedge story about bounce to the irons.

It takes two hours of shop time to finish a single Edel iron.  Machine shop precision is more accurate than foundry precision.

The key variable is head weight.  All “standards” for building golf clubs are based on iron shafts that weigh 125 grams or more.  The new “standard” for shaft weight is coming down to 95 grams for Tour Players.  For most amateurs, performance improvement continues with even lighter weights.  We have had success with iron shaft as light as 40 grams.

Maintaining club balance with lightweight shafts – think of that as “head feel” – requires a heavier iron head weight – at least eight grams more than “standard”.  It’s easy to do with lead tape (the PGA Tour solution).  We prefer tidy little tungsten weights that fit the tip of the shaft.

Alas, when you add weight to an iron head – even a small amount – it changes the center of gravity.  Weight near the heel moves the center of gravity toward the heel.  Over the years, the main performance problem with forged irons has been that the sweet spot is inside center.  That is a dangerous place for a sweet spot.

By milling and then custom grinding irons from heavy stock to a precise playing weight, Edel does not require manipulating head weight at build time.  The balance point stays in the center of the club face.  If your custom irons require a 265 gram five iron (ten grams “heavy”) – that’s what you get from Edel.  Edel is the only source of totally customized iron heads in the world.

How could you get excited about a “Limited Edition” of 500 copies when you can have “1/1″ on your irons?  1/1 is the ultimate sign of personalization.

Final Finishing

No other iron head has ever been treated like an Edel iron head.  Edel mills the cavity at the exact proportion to allow the final touch – hand grinding by David himself.

That’s where David applies his art.  The ultimate hand grind determines the final center of gravity, the final bounce angle, the final sole shape and the final head weight.  The current six iron is offered in two bounce options – 11* and 13*.  The end result is an iron head that not only matches a players’ swing for sole shape (bounce) but also hits the perfect weight for the final shaft choice.

This is artwork

Here’s my bottom line.  I own a large collection of forged irons.  None were made for me.  I’m putting in my order for my Edel set and I’m not looking back.  Cool as they ever were the old styles of forged iron heads were all made for Mr. Nobody.

If you are an aficionado or a collector – given the money you’ve already spent – put your order in right after mine.  From all of the irons that I have ever seen, I like the “to your eye” shape of the Edel forgings as well as any.  Check out our website  www.calgolflab.com/blog/dashboard/ in a few days.  I’ll make sure that we get all the pictures.  If you like a thin neck in your irons = you will love the Edel shapes.  With the excitement of the new line – David will be grinding irons well into the summer.

Give me a call and we’ll figure out the right thing to do.  If you are close to a clubfitter on the Edel “short list” we can make a referral.  If not, we’ll figure out the right shape, shaft choice and finish by email and over the phone.

The price is high by American standards.  Each Edel custom iron costs $350.  Multiply times eight you’re getting close to $3K for a set of irons.  Who would ever think that Edel would make Miura and Vega (at $200 per stick) look like a bargain?

Just for perspective.  The last time true custom grind irons were offered, it was by MacGregor back in the 50′s and 60′s.  MacGregor offered a similar program of custom fit and custom grind.  It cost $5000 way back then – those were bigger dollars.  You had to make two trips to Albany, Georgia.  If you compare to that, Edel is a bargain.

And then there’s the Asian obsession with the ultimate eye candy.  Brian Adair from SST is back from the new golf show in Beijing.  If you like gold plating, you can get your new top of the line Honma irons for a little over $300K.  The “normal” version is $24 K.  Everything is relative.

If you’re in the mood for surprises, by Brian’s report, the best American brand in China is MacGregor.  Go figure.

Faldo by Edel Putters

It’s high time for a new theory about putters.  Why not?

Face balanced or torque balanced?

David Edel’s new line of putters – an extension from his totally custom putter line that offers millions of options – the new line is about torque balanced, rather than face balanced.

This is a radical change.  You can explore the logic on your own.  Take one of your putters – choose the best if you’re not worried about the outcome.  Balance the putter shaft on your finger.  Note the angle of the putter head.  If the face is pointing up, you have a face balanced putter.  That’s what everyone used to think was the best balance.

David Edel thinks that face balancing is the wrong way to go.  Take your same face balanced putter, balance it on your finger, and the toe of the putter is to the side.  Take an Edel torque balanced putter and do the same.  The face stays square to the target as it does during your stroke.  The toe stays up.

That’s the secret.  Does your putter have a balance bias?

We have the “prototype” Faldo putters in the Edel putter fitting system.  John Ruark has been surprised by “how straight it goes” with the mallet shaped, torque balance putter.

After a few weeks in the Golf Lab fitting bag, John asked:  “What’s the matter with this putter?  I can’t miss.

David designed his new Faldo by Edel putters with the twisting action in mind.  That’s what torque is all about.

At a minimum, if you aren’t breaking that 30 putts barrier for expert putting, check out an Edel putter for a round on your own greens and know for yourself.

High Performance Graphite Shafts for Irons

UST is one of our key shaft suppliers.

Last year, the ATTAS series of driver shaft was our best performer in the “super premium” class of driver shaft.  No other shaft broke the $450 price point.

Their new “Recoil” graphite iron shaft is now ready for sale.  It comes in two versions.

For the Tour Player and aspiring single digit player, the “prototype” is in the line.  Weight choices are 125, 115 and 95 grams.  They are definitely in the Tour Weight neighborhood.

For the “rest of us” UST designed a variable weight shaft based on recoil principals that allows for flex customization in weight ranges from 60 to 90 grams.

The UST Recoil Design

The “secret sauce” around the new UST Recoil graphite iron shafts is new engineering based on new materials.

In the past, to gain stability in an iron shaft, a lot of material was layered up in the grip area.  That made the structure very thick under the hands.  That’s where the definition “boardy” comes from.  Very little feel under the hands.

New materials now allow UST to design an iron shaft with thin walls in the grip area and down the shaft.  With a thinner shaft, the graphite “ovals”.  “Ovaling” is a key term.  Ovaling describes the deformation of the shaft under load.

UST is going for the “spring back” effect.  You can do the experiment for yourself.  Hold a shaft tightly in a vice or clamped by your legs. Flex the shaft.  Notice the recoil effect.

On paper, there should is a 67% improvement in energy transfer.  So far, that efficiency has not been verified in lab tests, but there’s no denying the scientific principals behind the claim.  Graphite transfers energy better than steel.

Now you know why UST named their new shaft the “Recoil”.

Reaction from Aerotech and Inventix

I ran into Chris Hilleary of Aerotech at the show.  He was with his new employee – Jorgy Jorgensen.  Jorgy is a former mini-tour player so when you get him on the phone you know he’s a golf guy.  Both Chris and Jorgy said “That sounds crazy” when I described UST engineering ovaling into their shaft.  Is that a good sign?

From there, I visited Inventix – showing off their new Nunchuk for irons shaft.  Same result.  “Why?”

Professional Golf Teachers Meeting – West Metro Golf Course

This is a social media success story.  Check it out. With over 1000 registered members on the forum – 140 showed up for the meeting.  Chris Como – one of our bright young “new age” teachers was the moderator.

I have too little time to do this subject justice.  The bottom line is that teachers have discovered the value of radar.  Those who are successful enough to buy the new tools of the trade are euphoric in their praise of the insight that new radar technology offers.

All of the Old Guys who don’t make enough money on lessons to afford a Trackman or Flightscope are sitting in the Peanut Gallery – throwing peanuts about the dangers of technology in the golf world.  All that will end.  The new cadre of young guns – with their Masters’ degrees in biomechanics – will win in the end.

Rocketbladz – Taylor Made’s Next Blowout Success

I never hit balls at Demo Days – except this demo day.  I’m predicting that the Perfect Storm is building up behind the new Taylor Made Rocketbladz.  Rocketbladz is the first Taylor Made iron model that was designed with the “slot in the sole”.

I’m deferring more enthusiasm.  However, if you’re thinking about new irons this year – Rocketbladz will be a finalist.

I mentioned hitting balls at Demo Day with Rocketbladz.  Surprise of surprises.  All of the aftermarket shaft suppliers had all the Taylor Made Rocketbladz irons they needed in their PGA Show setups.

I worked the tee line with Biv Wadden, my PGA Teaching buddy from Chicago who can still shoot under par.  I wanted him to test with me.

Biv’s impression was that the Rocketbladz carried ten to fifteen yards farther when set up with a graphite shaft under 80 grams.

After several hours on the range, we remembered why we didn’t like testing clubs without precise knowledge of where the shots were landing.  That is my next mantra – be sure your practice pays off.

Wow!!  Our key lines are all alive and well.  Off to the show.

Best regards,

Leith Anderson and the Golf Lab Gang – Bob Pegram and John Ruark – and Joel Whittom in Sacramento.

Posted in Golf Equipment Chronicles | Leave a comment

Live from Orlando – ACCRA Day

Hi from Orlando,

Castle Pines Resort

If you are an Independent Clubfitter, there is one ticket that matters during PGA Show week:  ACCRA Day.  ACCRA owns the “A List of Custom Clubfitters”.  That universe is 500 accounts – worldwide.  Membership in a small club is highly valued.  My Golf Digest “Top 100 Clubfitter” gets me in.

ACCRA – a Company and a Brand.  Gawain Robertson and Dave Makarucha founded ACCRA eight years ago.  Since Day One they dedicated their company to supplying the custom clubfitter.  That was a welcome idea.  Before ACCRA the major shaft companies USED custom clubfitters to establish the performance of new designs at high prices in hopes that one of the Big Guys would take notice and buy a million units at a low price.

That’s where your $300 driver with a $400 shaft comes from.

I used to think that it was an advantage to buy direct from the shaft manufacturer.  Now, I think it’s a liability.  Once you have the engineering expertise and know your way around China, it makes sense to source your product from the very best factory to build exactly what you need – in quality and quantity.  In these days when potential supply far exceeds demand, buying on contract might be the best way to control costs and yield the best value.

Here’s the short list on key shaft suppliers to custom clubfitters who don’t own their own factory:  ACCRA, AeroTech, OBAN, House of Forged, SK Fiber and Nunchuk.  Each company has carved out a defensible niche in the market.

Companies that operate factories and are important to custom clubfitters are:  Mitsubishi, Matrix, Fujikura, UST and Aldila. The plot thickens with the buyout of Aldila by Mitsubishi.

It’s a tall order to create and run an independent shaft company.  In the beginning, ACCRA was very close to UST.  In fact, ACCRA was originally the UST Brand for their premium UST shafts.  Gawain and Dave reformulated the ACCRA line by tailoring it to the needs of clubfitters.  A single model, the original ACCRA Tour Series, came in five weights, each weight in five flexes.  No other line offered such flexibility.

Before ACCRA, there was a standard method for “fitting” fairway metal shafts.  Whatever a player chose for his driver – ten grams heavier – tipped an inch – was the accepted expert fitting method of the day.

On Tour, Gawain found that players rarely used the same driver shaft in their fairway metals.  Tour Pros like a little more flex in the tip and a little more spin on their fairways.  The result was Dymatch from ACCRA.  With Dymatch, shaft fitting is keyed off of the driver.  You fit the driver for weight and flex.  The “Dymatched” fairway shaft is ten grams heavier, but the flex profile is entirely different.  The responsive tip helps get the ball in the air and spin a little more.  If you’re having trouble hitting your fairway metals consistently, it could very easily be caused by the driver shaft in your 3 metal.

Just look at your driver and longest fairway metal.  If the shafts are the same color, schedule a trip to your clubfitter.

It’s just the opposite for hybrids.  Since hybrids are played like irons, the best flex profile for good players demands a stiff tip.  So, within the Dymatch family of shafts – there is actually very little that matches – and that’s a good thing.

Luke Donald has been the marquee supporter of ACCRA for years.  On Tour, ACCRA has accumulated a nice list of players.  ACCRA is not Taylor Made.  No one gets paid to play ACCRA.

The Gavin Robertson Rant

Now you know that ACCRA is dedicated to supporting the “TRUE CLUBFITTER”.

The proliferation of launch monitors and self-service fitting bays makes it easy and free to pick up a club and see how far you hit it.  Alas, at the self-service establishments the common denominator is “carry distance”.

The order goes in to the factory.  That’s where “custom” changes to “volume”.

You get whatever they already build.  If you hit “Stiff” then you’re going to get a set that matches the demo.  Even the best custom departments can’t be bothered with adjusting flexes – soft stepping and hard stepping to get the perfect ball flight and feel – and then building the clubs to the player’s specification.

You might just as well buy off the rack.  You do the custom fit, we choose L, A, R, S, or X.  Why bother with fitting if you don’t build to match?

Clubfitting has been dumbed down too far.

Gavin proposed a new definition for custom clubfitting:  “Build to the Fit – Can Your Clubfitter Match Your Spec?”  That could be a key, understandable differentiator.  The rant earned a round of applause.

If you’re an old marketing type and would like to see the ACCRA presentation as it was given on ACCRA Day, we’ll post a link to the ACCRA Day Presentation tomorrow.  Stay tuned.

ACCRA Partners:  KBS – KB Tour Shafts – “KB” is for Kim Braly

Kim Braly is always at ACCRA Day.  Same this year.  He’s the “Veteran of Veterans”.  Short story:  Kim has been out on Tour since the 70′s – in the early days with his father Dr. Joe Braly.  Father and son share credit for developing the concept of frequency matching.  They created Rifle shafts in the 70′s.  Kim followed with the Project X (now produced by True Temper), the KB Tour and the Tour Concept (produced by FST – the “Parent” of KB Tour Shafts).

Kim Braly is clearly the guru of steel iron shaft design in the world.

It takes a while to change a generation of golfers that grew up on True Temper.  The KB Tour shaft has been out for three years.  So far, there is an impressive list of converts and all-important Tour Wins.  If you would like to see the presentation delivered by KB Tour we’ll post a link to KB Tour Presentation tomorrow.  Stay tuned.

ACCRA Partners:  Hybrix is Back

Blast from the Past.  Hybrix is a shaft that was conceived by a scientific think tank.  The concept is that if you want an iron shaft that performs for good players – primarily requiring low torque and minimum dispersion in the shaft tip and minimum “ovaling” under the hands. You would reinforce those sections with the strongest available material.  That’s where Hybrix married titanium and graphite.

The company that invented the Hybrix concept licensed the design to ACCRA.  A former impossible selling price has been brought down.  A new selling price for Hybrix shafts will be around $125.  Considering that shafts last forever, good players might find that the ACCRA version of Hybrix is a good investment.

I hit the Hybrix matched up with the new Rocketballz irons as well as the Miura 501.  It felt like graphite.  I would expect that serious testing would show up tighter dispersion and the launch monitor would pick up a little less sidespin.  After a few hours – indoors and outdoors – we’ll have a very good idea if the Hybrix shaft matches expectations.

ACCRA Demo Day

If you read up on last night’s Live from Orlando, I’m all over the Taylor Made Rocketbladz story.

ACCRA had the new Rocketbladz shafted up with the Hybrix, and all the KB Tour shafts.  Both the standard Rocketbladz and the Tour model were available for testing.

Even though I rarely hit shots at demo days, I made an exception for the Rocketbladz.  It was a pretty surprising test.  The Rocketbladlz felt solid.  Matched up with the new Hybrix shaft the ball flight was low – one of the details we haven’t tracked down is the exact loft of the Rocketbladz irons.  At least, they’re one club strong.  One clubfitter has found Rocketbladz to measure two clubs strong.  If your 32* six iron is really a 25* four iron you really ought to know.

After one range test, I am a likely Rocketbladz buyer.  But there’s one thing nobody knows.  Is the ball speed off the face consistent?  Is that 90 MPH six iron swing speed producing a consistent 120 MPH ball speed, or is the ball speed inconsistent – perhaps ranging from 118 to 125.  That would be a bad sign.

I’m part way through the maze.  The Rocketbladz looks and feels like an iron that I could play – defining my game as single digit.  The next step is clearly the Taylor Made tee line on Demo Day.  Once again, we’re after confirmation.

Sitting with two old-timers, Woody Lashen (Woody’s on Long Island) and Jacques Intriere (Greenwich Golf in Greenwich, Connecticut) the consensus at the table is “we just don’t know”.  Jacques said if the claims hold true “the game is over” and everyone will buy Rocketbladz.  How do you know for sure?  We find a good player.  In a series of shots, it’s easy to see if the same swing speed is producing varying ball speeds.  That would be a bad sign.

Once again, to know for sure, we’re going to need launch monitor testing.  Feeling good and looking good isn’t enough.  We’ll surely arrange a launch monitor test before the week is up.

That Last Shaft Tip

ACCRA produces one super premium shaft.  It is the Tour Z – Platinum.  At ACCRA Day, they announced that in testing, the Platinum has produced ball speeds ten MPH higher than most players’ previous best.  Gawain and Dave suggest that it is because of the counterweighting in the shaft, plus a higher bend point – by about an inch.

If you can find a shaft that produces higher ball speed with your same swing speed, you’ve found the Holy Grail.

Best regards, Leith Anderson and the Golf Lab Gang:  John Ruark and Bob Pegram.

Posted in Golf Equipment Chronicles | Leave a comment

Live from Orlando – the Biggest Week in Golf

Hi from Orlando, 

Orlando at the end of January is the beginning of the golf year.  The annual PGA Show is the center of the golf world for seven days.

This year, the trip came with an unexpected surprise.  I awoke in Orlando to Inauguration Day in Washington.  With nothing on the agenda, I saw it all.

If you are ALIVE the next Inauguration Day, take the day off.  Watch it all.  It will help confirm your faith in America.

The First Visit – Edwin Watts Headquarters Store

I made my traditional first stop on the ritual trip after the President made it back to the White House.  Edwin Watts is one of the most important names in golf retail.  Surprisingly, Edwin Watts is a real person.  He built up his chain of retail golf stores throughout the southeast one store, one town at a time.  He’s one of those guys who have a great reputation with those who really count – his loyal employees.

Way back when – Orlando was just a speck of its present size – they went looking for a retail location that made sense in Orlando.  Alas, all the prime real estate was already bought but there was a plot a little north of where Sand Lake Road meets Turkey Creek Road available.   Edwin bought the land for his concept store.  It is set back off the road so you have to know where you’re going.  But the years have been kind -the real estate purchase is now near ground zero on Orlando’s famous Restaurant Row.

Three years ago, Edwin Watts was one of the first to embrace the “store within a store” concept.  Rather than mix up all the lines, they established mini-boutiques organized around brand names.  Since then, the idea has been adopted by all major golf retailers.  For me, a visit to Edwin Watts is a peek at the future.

This year, the impression of the store was astounding.  A new designer decreed that no display should be more than 5’5″ height.  The result is a wide open look that makes the store much more inviting.

As the manager said:  “Less inventory, more sales.  What’s the matter with that?”

The Taylor Made Fitting Center inside Edwin Watts

Another trend in golf retail is (unfortunately) that Major Brands no longer trust their retail partners to provide professional club fitting.  The Taylor Made Fitting Center at the Edwin Watts store is staffed by a full-time Taylor Made employee.  If you visit the Edwin Watts store in Orlando, you’ll meet Lee at the Taylor Made fitting center.  I thank him for his insights.  When you’re in the area, Edwin Watts is worth a visit.

There is a big TM story brewing – or not.  Taylor Made’s new Rocket Bladz – Tour Edition.  Is Rocked Bladz a new invention that changes the way we think about irons forever?

Or, is Rocket Bladz just another flash in the pan?

Here’s the scoop:

Rocket Bladz are an extension of the ultra-successful “slot” that was a proven winner in both TM and Adams fairways and hybrids.  How successful?  Most observers think that the reason Taylor Made bought Adams was the portfolio of patents around the “speed channel” popularized by Adams.  What no one expected was that the hybrid and fairway metal technology would extend to irons.

The even bigger surprise is the early and quick acceptance among TM Tour Players.

Sergio Garcia, after a dry spell, won playing Rocket Bladz.  Rocket Bladz are in Dustin Johnson’s bag.  After ticking off another winner and several more converts, the conclusion from the Fitting Center is that by the end of the year, most of the TM Tour Staff will be playing Rocket Bladz.  I can’t think of an iron model that was instantly accepted across a spectrum of Tour Players.  Changing irons is a big decision for most Tour Players.

Sergio’s evaluation:  “One club longer, straighter, more consistent distance control.”

If that is true, it is sure to create a rush to “new technology”.  If true, all irons manufactured in the last four hundred years are obsolete.  There is already an indication of pressure in the system.  The original release date for Rocket Bladz has been pushed back from February 1 to February 15.

Could all that be true?  I’m going to find out this week.

The Pro

If you pay your Taylor Made Clubfitter a visit, the demonstration will be to hold a finger at the center of your chosen iron and intone, “This is the sweetspot”.   He then lays two fingers on the center of the blade and says “this is the sweetspot with Rocket Bladz.”

The implication:  with sweetspots, bigger is better.

The Con

That all sounds good, but in the past irons that were designed with scientific principals all suffered performance defects.  Mostly, with distance control.  Scientifically designed irons tend to have a sweet spot that is “nuclear” – dead center goes a lot farther.  We’ve all witnessed “nuclear shots”.

Comparing “apples to apples” is also important.  Lofts on Rocket Bladz are at least 4* stronger than what you might be used to.  A club longer distance could easily be the 4* stronger loft.

What is the proof?

The Project

As you can see, one of my priorities for the week will be to find out what is going on with the “new technology” in irons.

BTW:  Taylor Made is not alone in promoting new iron designs.  United Golf -Graham Webb and Peter Lord – have released their own “new technology” iron – saying something for a company that built its reputation on forged irons.

Six more days to get to the bottom of that question.

The Dickie Pride Conundrum

Dickie lives in Orlando and is a regular at the Edwin Watts store to check his specifications.

He went through the test for Rocket Bladz.  He hit Rocket Bladz longer and straighter.  He didn’t put in an order – even for free clubs because he’s a TM Staffer.

His rationale:  “The Rocket Bladz might be longer and straighter, but I made $1.3 million dollars using his shorter TM forged irons.   I know what they’re going to do.”

So much for the compelling story.

The Week

Tomorrow is ACCRA day.  ACCRA is a company that was built around custom clubfitters.

Wednesday is the “Ultimate Demo Day”.

The PGA Show goes on from Thursday through Saturday.

Russ Ryden is in town with his small entourage of reporters and videographers.  Have a look at www.devotedgolfer.tv to get an idea of the project that’s been going on for two years.

The Vision

In just ten years we have come from a world where communication was SLOW.  In the old days, golf magazines sent reporters to Orlando.  Reporters reported, and by the end of deadlines you got to read your “news” about January in April.

Today, I’m providing a reporter’s eye view.  What I saw today, you’re reading tomorrow.  That’s the classic newspaper timeframe.

We used to think it was pretty good back in the print days when Golf Today published within 30 days.  That used to be fast.

Keep an eye on your email.  If things go well, we’ll try our first broadcasts from the PGA Show on Google Hangout.

That is a new record – if it happens.  Imagine conversation, back and forth, from your dream team of reporters – really live.

“Subscribe” and “Unsubscribe”

I’m planning a daily email – Live from Orlando.  If you don’t want that, let Bob Pegram know and he’ll take you off our distribution list.

Best regards,

Leith Anderson and the Golf Lab Gang – Bob Pegram and John Ruark.

Posted in Golf Equipment Chronicles | Leave a comment

Let’s Play Golf! Free On Course Clubfitting

Hi from San Carlos,

What a miserable winter!!

It’s time to go play golf.

I’m taking my own medicine.  I’m playing three rounds next week, minimum.  My pinky is healed (enough) and I need to benchmark my game after four months off.

Who wants to play?

There is one foolproof way to know that your clubs fit.  You can kill two birds with one stone by starting your clubfitting on the golf course.

We go play.

While we play, we watch ball flight.  If you’re getting the ball flight that matches your ambition as a golfer, your clubs fit.

The best way to start a clubfitting is on the golf course with your fitter.  Better yet if your fitter is also a coach who can make sure that your technique will get you to the level you plan to reach.

My mission is to help you play better golf.The Evaluation is Free

Of all of the innovations that I have introduced to Golf Lab Clients – nothing compares to the “morning at the Muni”.

I get to know a player’s game and his goals.

How many strokes are you trying to cut?  Where do you go first?  Are new clubs mandatory or can yours be modified to take you to the next level?

Does your swing give you the ball flight that you need to take you to the next level?

If swing work is required, I will recommend a swing coach to fit convenience, personality and style.

The point is to set a goal for improvement.  Name a realistic number and then develop a plan to get there.

How many strokes are going to come from distance, accuracy, short game, wedge play, putting, greenreading, playing strategy and mental game?  Our goal is to make a plan and go get the improvement with a balanced approach.A few months ago, I worked with a journalist for My Golf Spy - Golf Spy Tim.  He documented a three stroke improvement in his index from two days of fitting and club work.  Here’s a link:

http://www.mygolfspy.com/united-golf-lab-fitting/

Fittings at Cool Clubs

We are beginning to work out of Cool Clubs  at Mariner’s Point.  Our first combined fitting appointments were this week.  For most clients, I’m recommending that we start with a Cool Clubs fitting.  If you have questions, give Bob Pegram a call – 650-654-1770 – the old number.

Kevin Bresnahan and Billy Grant – Cool Clubs fitters at Mariner’s Point – are both lifelong golf professionals.  Combine an expert eye with proprietary fitting software and every name brand and you have the perfect starting point for a broad overview of every available option.  How else would you find a needle in a haystack?

It’s easy to be skeptical about club fitting software.  To check out the Cool Clubs software, I took the Cool Clubs fitting – hitting my clubs with the Trackman collecting data.  The software recommended the Aerotech Steel Fiber shaft in 80 gram weight.  That’s exactly the same shaft I’d recommend for myself after daily testing for ten years.  Spooky.

Cool Clubs does the research that puts together the best performing shafts with the best current name brand head designs.  Only Cool Clubs crosses brand boundaries – offering any shaft with any head.

Once we have a good view of the landscape of options, we can put together a plan.  Clubs first or technique first?  We’ll make sure you don’t waste your time and money on the wrong bet.

I’ll be telling the Cool Clubs story in depth over the next few weeks.   We’re going to be making the transition to video.

Also, keep in mind that the 2013 PGA Golf Show is only two weeks away.  Look for “Live from Orlando” – this year by video.

For More Information:

Call Bob Pegram for answers to any questions.  650-654-1770.

Best regards,

Leith Anderson, John Ruark and Bob Pegram

Posted in Fitting Services | Leave a comment

This Week at the Golf Lab – Nakashima Drivers $500 off

OK Guys, it’s Christmas Season which means somebody, somewhere must be thinking about a present for someone they know.  Here are a few suggestions that will make a big difference in a couple of weeks when the New Year starts.  The weather is getting better.  We’ll be playing golf seriously in a month.

This will be your last chance to take advantage of some of the fabulous Golf Lab “one of a kinds”.  Going into next year – we’ll be doing away with all of the cool things that take too much personal attention.  Stop by any time this week or next.

We’re open in San Carlos until the end of the month.  After that, we’ll meet up at Mariner’s Point or your own golf course.

Number ONE DOORBUSTER SPECIAL – Doesn’t that sound like Target?

Enough hype.  If you are looking for a very interesting buy – for a very exotic club – the Nakashima driver is a great choice.

The True Nakashima Story

This is going to sound a little strange coming from a guy who doesn’t sell Nakashima products.  Nakashima could be the “best of the best” drivers ever made.  We bought a small Nakashima inventory and we’re moving them along for a low price.  This is strictly a chance opportunity.

The original Nakashima driver was created by a brilliant club designer, Scott Son.  He was one of the first to combine the “sculpted face” with the removable, adjustable hosel that can adjust lie angle, face angle and loft at the same time.  There is no doubt, Nakashima drivers were ahead of their time.

Going back ten years, Nakashima drivers have been top performers.  As an example, Emily Childs played her amateur career and right through Cal with the Same Nakashima 420 cc head (10* marked loft, 12* actual loft).  It’s still as good as anything out there.  Can you even imagine hitting the same driver in competition for that ten year period?

Nakashima was small and didn’t have much marketing muscle so the early versions of Nakashima drivers didn’t sell all that well.  At one point the financial partner behind the company said:  “The only way this business makes sense is if we double the prices.”

That did it.  It just didn’t make sense for “the Best” not to be the most expensive.  John Nakashima doubled his prices and the Nakashima driver instantly became the most popular driver among serious tournament players – especially seniors – in Northern California.  It was the Perfect Storm.

From that time forward, Nakashima has been the most popular high priced driver in the market.  If go to any NCGA Seniors event, you will see Nakashima drivers in about half the bags.  No other driver comes close for senior following.

$800 Nakashima Drivers are now $300 – while they last only.

What makes a driver worth $800?  There is only so much you can do with a driver head.

Balance and weight distribution are major factors.  Most of the guys who really know their driver heads agree that a cast body provides the best way to move weight around inside the head.  The club designer then fits the face to the head.  The face could very well be a different, more resilient material.  It could have “sculpted shape” behind the hitting area.  The sky’s the limit when it comes to driver head designs.

I think that Nakashima offers the most elegant of the adjustable hosel designs.

Here’s a picture of the inventory.  We have a nice selection of hosels.  We can adjust your Nakashima driver to precise specifications assured with our Tour Gauge.

Nakashima Drivers

Picture of Nakashima Drivers

Our special fitting offer for the week.

Come in for your driver shaft fitting.  We’ll find the perfect shaft for your new Nakashima driver with our Flightscope radar.  We have a killer offer to come in this week or next.  While they last:  Nakashima drivers $300 each – per head.  Combined with a Golf Lab Driver fitting – we’ll put the whole premium deal together with a premium Accra or UST Shaft that passes the radar fitting test.  The whole shebang – Nakashima driver, shaft fitting and shaft – $450.  Call Bob Pegram for an appointment.

If you ever wanted a Nakashima, this will save you $500.

OR, Measure and Adjust Your Taylor Made Driver

Here is another one of our “quick fix” services.  Bring your Taylor Made driver in to the Golf Lab.  We’ll test your swing with your driver.  Considering swing path, face angle at impact and angle of attack, we will adjust your Taylor Made driver to the best specifications.

We are sure of the adjustment because your driver will be measured on our precision Tour Gauge.

Most Taylor Made drivers are 2* to 4* different from the number on the bottom.  Incorrect face angle adjustment can cause inconsistent results.

Test, Measure and Adjust – just $75 – by chance or appointment.

Driver Gauge with Club

Here’s a picture of that Tour Gauge

The Thriver is on the Charts

If you have not bought your Golf Lab “Thriver” yet, you need to make plans now to come in and get one made to measure.

There are two theories behind the Thriver – each one designed to help players play better golf.  You are probably prejudiced – you think that a 43.5″ driver that has 14* of loft is for a beginner.

Tell that to John Dillon.  John is a low index player who likes to play for a little money.  To give you an idea of the level of “club junkie” that John is – we just finished liquidating his garage full of clubs.  John has the Thriver in his bag as his gamer.  Distance is not an issue – that John has decided that “14 Fairways” is his next reasonable goal.  His Taylor Mades are all gone.  He’s playing the LaJolla “Big Ti” Thriver.

Then there are the players who are true beginners.  The Thriver is great for them because it puts a normal player in the correct position to make a swing with perfect balance and alignment.  It so happens that 43.5″ is a very good length for a driver.  That’s probably why it was the standard for 100 years.

A 43.5″ driver with 14* of loft is a lot like a 3 metal in every dimension except for face size.  That’s even better.  The Thriver offers the specifications of a 3 wood with the forgiveness of a driver face.  The Thriver will make it much easier for any player who is working on developing a repeatable swing.

Here’s what the Thriver looks like:

Mr. Ti Crown   Mr. Ti Face

The Coolest Putter for the Collector

I’m saying “for the collector” because I truly believe that the only way to decide what putter goes in your bag needs to be fitted – first for aim – then for tempo and timing.  Fitting a putter is even more complex and sensitive than fitting a driver.

But, if you just like cool putters, here’s a good one for your collection.  You might even find that it has all the right features to take to the golf course.

There was a guy a while back who commissioned one of the better milling houses to make his own putter design.

That’s the Kokopelli.

This is what it looks like.  It is very cool.  Here again, we found a small inventory left over.  Come in to the Golf Lab over the next couple of weeks and we’ll build you your own Kokopelli putter.

That’s just a few ideas for the Christmas season.  If there’s anything that you’re looking for that we can help with – let us know.

Best Regards, Leith Anderson and the Golf Lab Gang.

 

Posted in Golf Equipment Chronicles | Leave a comment

Portions (or All) of the Golf Lab Indoor Putting Green Are For Sale

Greetings from The Golf Lab,

Because, as we mentioned before, we are closing the San Carlos facility and moving our game improvement services to Cool Clubs at Mariner’s Point, our 2,200 square foot putting green is for sale in parts or as a whole. Here is a picture of it:

Interior View Golf Lab

There are other pictures of it in our blog: http://calgolflab.com/blog/dashboard/

The “foundation” of the putting green is blocks of styrofoam built to give the green either 2 or 3 percent slope depending on the portion you take. The styrofoam blocks are fastened together for stability. They can be unfastened and re-assembled at your location.

The “Stimp” measurement (the speed of the green) is slightly under 10 (about 9.6). That is about average.

Have you ever wanted a backyard putting green to practice your putting and chipping? Now is your chance!

Call Bob at 650-654-1770 for more information, or stop by to take a look at it.

Regards, Leith Anderson, John Ruark, Bob Pegram and Joel Whittom

Posted in Unclassified | Leave a comment

Donate Your Brain to Science this Friday – Free Offer for the Fearless

Hi from San Carlos,

I finished my first article on the Focus Band just last week. That was a hard article to write. It just scratches the surface. I think that mental game coaching will be the “Next Big Thing” in training for elite level performance.

And then something like this comes along. Here’s a feature article from the New York Times. The article references “The Quiet Eye” – Joan Vickers seminal work that has been incorporated into the Focus Band.

When our subject starts getting that kind of coverage, it shows that there’s an undercurrent of interest that’s beginning to boil up.

http://well.blogs.nytimes.com/2012/11/28/keeping-your-eye-on-the-ball/ 

Then John Ruark was talking to Graham Boulton last week. Graham reported working with a couple of the professional clubfitters at the Callaway Fitting Center in Melbourne, Australia. He said that after a short spell of Focus Band Training they were each able to increase their swing speed almost 10 MPH.

Now that gets our attention.

Can we offer and deliver 10 MPH higher swingspeed with just one hour of Focus Band Training? It sounds preposterous, but it’s worth a test. Besides, the golf courses are no fun this time of year.

We’re going to try that experiment this Friday. I’m going to work with John Ruark. We’ll test your swing with a six iron and driver to establish a benchmark. Then you’ll spend some time getting acquainted with your right brain – with the help of the Focus Band.

Until now, we have assumed that Focus Band training required a long-term commitment. Graham’s report suggests that might not be true.

Remember, your goal is to suppress conscious thought and trust your athletic performance to the instinctive control of your right brain. The Focus Band enables an athlete to train himself to enter the state of “Mushin” on demand.

The acid test is to see if you can learn to stay in Mushin through your complete “Performance Routine” – from visualization through execution. Does staying in Mushin through the shot improve swing speed?

If you’re interested in giving the Focus Band a try this Friday – we’re offering “Donate Your Swing to Science” sessions.

Call Bob Pegram at the Golf Lab (650-654-1770). Discuss your game and your goals with him. If it makes sense to give science a try – we’ll schedule a session.

We’re making this “free” – but we’re asking for donations for Bob Hoover’s junior program at Palo Alto Muni.

This is exciting stuff. All of the work putting together a comprehensive putting improvement program “Under 30 Putts” is beginning to pay off. If you’re ready for a breakthrough, call Bob.

Best regards,

Leith Anderson and the Golf Lab Gang.

Here is a link to the Focus Band website with videos taken at The Golf Lab: http://www.focusband.com/#/how-it-works/4563704055

The Focus Band in place:

Focus Band in place

Posted in Golf Equipment Chronicles | Leave a comment

My “Top 3″ Equipment Picks for 2012

Hi from San Carlos,

I ask an interesting question to you to ponder:  “If you were to pick one thing about your golf game to improve yet this year, what would it be?”  Here are my three best recommendations to make a change that works.

Pick one and give us a call.  Bob is waiting at the switchboard.  (650) 654-1770.

My personal high point this year was building my “best ever” set of irons – Vega VC-03 forged heads – Aerotech 70 gram Steel Fiber shafts in “S” flex – soft stepped once.  The complete story about my “Greatest Ever” iron sets starts with moving to ultra-lightweight graphite shafts.

I found success with players all the way down to 40 gram iron shafts from Matrix – previously unheard of light weight.  I thank my buddy Craig Allen for trying that idea – and buying the result.

We tested 50, 60, 70, 80 and 95 grams.   The favorite weight on the PGA Tour is 95 grams – pioneered by Kuchar and now championed by Snedeker.  Most amateurs will choose graphite shafts in the 60-80 gram range.  Standard steel shafts weigh around 130 grams.

There is no doubt.  Moving to lighter graphite iron shafts can produce dramatic performance improvement.  Players changing from 125 gram shafts to 65 or 70 grams are rewarded with longer distance and better accuracy.  With lighter weight, you take an easier swing and make better contact.

My next unlikely choice was “game improvement” heads.  No experienced club fitter would ever recommend oversize Vega VC-03 heads for a low-index tournament player.  Forget looks, they perform the best.

VC-03 face VC-03 gray

For comparison take a close look at this year’s Mizuno MP-59 played by the most consistent ball striker on the PGA Tour – Luke Donald.  MP-59′s are surprisingly large.  Do not be afraid of larger sizes in iron heads.  Be sure to test the MP-59 if you can’t find a Vega VC-03.  The conventional wisdom that says forged iron heads must be small is wrong.

Mizuno MP-59

Finally, we complete the tweak with “shaft reinforcement and balancing”.  Success with lightweight graphite requires more than simply swapping shafts.  Balance is important.  My irons are state-of-the-art when it comes to unconventional.  Nevertheless, it is the best setup I’ve ever played.

I played better golf with my unlikely set than any other I’ve ever owned.  My Vega VC-03′s go all the way from the 3 iron at 21 degrees to the Pitching wedge at 46 degrees.  No hybrids improve on the super-forgiving VC-03 heads.  Vega added a Gap Wedge to the VC-03 lineup – filling the hole at 50* and providing a nice progression to my preferred 54* and 58* combo to finish my iron set.

If this saga interests you, test 40 to 80 gram graphite shafts chosen to match your swing for weight, flex, torque and feel.  Your test clubs will be a tad longer than normal.  The iron heads will be a tad heavier than normal.  That will lead to solid contact and improved distance with the same swing.

Here’s a description of our “Advanced Calibration and Tuning for Irons”:

1)    Start with our “Iron Optimization Fitting”.  We compare the performance of your current irons against “bionic irons” from the Mizuno fitting cart.  We compare custom shafts from Aerotech, Matrix, UST and ACCRA together with Balance-Certified shaft inserts.  Any performance improvement is detected and pinpointed.

Our mantra is “light weight graphite shafts” but we go beyond swapping shafts and heads.  Adjusting balance by adding weight inside the shaft can improve consistency and feel while improving distance and accuracy.  Radar reveals subtle differences in shaft performance.

Utilizing radar to optimize shaft fitting is on the “bleeding edge” of shaft fitting – where art and intuition merge with science.

Balance-Certified Accurizer – Structure and Balance for Stability

The essence of lightweight iron shafts is that they’re THIN.  The new Balance-Certified Accurizers provide structural reinforcement at the point of maximum pressure – where the shaft might “oval” at transition or impact and become a bit unstable.  Earlier versions of Accurizers have proven themselves by delivering improved accuracy.

Accurizer for Irons

Bulletin:  Lightweight graphite iron shafts are not just for “oldsters”.

Tyler Garrett, a young tournament player chose 70 gram AeroTech Steel Fiber shafts for his gamers.  He added Accurizers after lengthy testing for consistency and feel.   He is our best evidence that expert players like the consistency and feel of Accurized iron shafts.  Tyler played the set all year and so far they’re going into next year.

Improvement in stability with Accurizers is not limited to lightweight graphite shafts.  Kaz Hoffman, another tournament-player who tests equipment reported that his KB CT shafts in X Flex felt “broken” without Accurizers installed.  We didn’t expect that – CT’s are very stout.  Kaz is in his second year with the same setup with no desire to change.  Kaz chose Vega MB-1 blades.

Test an iron from your current set.  Try first without the Accurizer and then with.  Let Flightscope radar judge the winner.  Improved iron play may be no more elusive than adding Accurizers to the irons you already own.

Aerotech i95 shaft

Radix shaft gray

Shaft Reinforcement and Counterweight Too?

In addition to improving stability, the Accurizer provides a measure of counterweighting.  The effect of increased weight under a player’s hands is frequently more consistent swing path and face angle at impact.  It is easy to measure “before and after” with Flightscope radar.

Accurizing and counterweighting are “tricks of the trade” that cover “tuning and tweaking” to improve a set of irons that’s already good.

Accurizers come with a money back guarantee.    That means that indoor testing will be proven with play on the course.  We stand by that.

The new model for irons weighs 19 grams.  This is what it looks like:

New Iron Accurizer gray

We helped Balance-Certified launch their new line of Accurizers last summer.  One thing we didn’t like was that the Accurizer was a little heavy for irons.  Jeff Lindner went back to the drawing board and brought out a new model that is under 20 grams.  We now have the new model in house.  Jeff sent them to us before Sergio.

2)    Get a Putter You Can Aim. Check your Stance and Alignment.

This is not a “chicken or egg” choice.

The first step in any putting improvement program is tomake sure that your putter allows you to aim inside the hole with your stance and alignment within normal means.  Fundamental putter fitting is a question of length, loft and lie.  Your putter must fit your stance and your stroke to optimize consistency and touch.  That should not be a surprise.

We have followed “Aim is Paramount” theory for years which lead to our close association with Edel – a putter company that bases its fitting method on aiming inside the hole.  In the Edel world, shape influences aim.

Aiming is a rare skill among golfers who have not been trained.  Most players require coaching to set up correctly, eyes over the ball, forearms aligned with the shaft with upper arms held firmly against the body.  That’s the form I learned in my putter fitting with Mark Timms at Cool Clubs, Mariner’s Point, San Mateo, CA.  If you want to putt like a tournament professional, you might as well copy the key things they all do alike.  That made sense to me.

With Mark’s preferred setup, my putter was too short.  I had been guided by the popular conventional wisdom of putter fitting that advocates “swinging arms loosely like an elephant’s trunk”.  That is not correct according to Timms – based on personally fitting more than 50 PGA Tour players.

Mark’s experience is that very good putters among PGA Tour players hold their upper arms closely against their body – thus stabilizing the stroke.  There are no loose-hanging arms in his model.  You can compare yourself side by side with your choice of Tour Players.  Mark chose Camilo Villegas for me – a compliment.

Another key common denominator among tournament players is that forearms and putter shaft are in alignment.  The ball is positioned under the player’s eyes.  You should be bent over between 40 and 50 degrees.  That is probably more bend at the waist than feels comfortable.

A final check point is an extremely stable lower body.

Mark’s theory is that correct setup and posture is paramount.  The face angle at the moment of impact is responsible for 85% of direction.  Mark’s focus is lengthening the distance the putter face stays square through impact.  He doesn’t care about the path of your putting stroke as long as it is consistently repeatable.  His comment:  “Tour Pros are not pretty.”

I adopted Mark’s suggestions and now have a putter, setup, stance and aim that will allow me to groove a consistent stroke.  Bring your putter to the Golf Lab and we’ll make sure that it’s the right length, lie and loft.

The following question is “What’s Next?”

That’s where our ”Under 30 Putts” Program comes in.

There’s a progression of skills that is required to go from “good” to “great” in putting.  Those steps include calibrating your stroke and adjusting pace and tempo to promote “rolling the ball”.

Check out the link to the Golf Lab “Under 30 Putts” program archived on our website at http://calgolflab.com/blog/2012/10/18/30-putts-per-round-five-session-program-to-break-the-barrier/.

Players who are planning the journey from “good” to “great putting” will appreciate the experience that allows us to facilitate your performance at the “next level” – whatever level that might be.  “Under 30 Putts” is presented by the Golf Lab Professor of Putting – John Ruark.

3)    Get a “Thriver” – Hit the Fairway. 

Here’s our “most spectacular golf club ever” – that came out of a fortuitous eBay purchase.  We found an orphaned trove of very good driver heads – if you value playing from the fairway and having a lot of fun.

Do not confuse the Thriver with a lollipop.  It is a full-fledged driver that was made to precise specifications a few years ago.

The maker of our Thriver head was LaJolla.  Back in the Day, LaJolla was among the best of the “component” providers.

The batch of LaJolla drivers that we found was built for players needing extra loft but with a square face to promote a healthy inside-out swing.  The lofts are 14* and 15*.  It is a very rare combination to find a high loft driver with a square face angle.  Most high loft drivers are designed to help players fight a slice – with closed face angles.

Mr. Ti Crown   

This is what they look like.

You can stop by or call any time this weekend – we’re here all day Friday and Saturday.  Karnak will be available all weekend to make inspired shaft selections from our extensive collection of very high quality pullouts.

Can you believe that your new Thriver will only cost $200 including a hand-picked premium shaft.  For $500 we’ll sell you five so you can give them as Christmas gifts.

Stop by the Golf Lab this weekend or next week.  We’re here all the time, plying our trade to help you shave a few strokes from your game.

Best Regards,

Leith Anderson and the Golf Lab Gang, Dian, Bob, John, Joel and Clint.

Posted in Golf Equipment Chronicles | Leave a comment

Get into “The Zone” = Prepare Your Mind for Peak Performance

Hi from San Carlos,

Elite athletes train for years to perform ”in The Zone”.  Peak Performers – golf tournament winners – credit “playing in The Zone” for their victories.

But what does that mean for ordinary golfers?

What is The Zone for golf?  Why is The Zone important?  How do you get there?

And, is the journey worth the reward?

Brain Science and Athletic Performance

This discussion will be interesting to help understand the roll that mental game training plays in speeding the progression from novice to elite athletic performance levels.

The basic principles are simple.  Brain science identifies the left lobe of the human brain as controlling conscious thought.  Left brain control is important while athletes train their bodies and perfect their form.

But performance in competition at the elite level is a different matter.

The essence of “performing in The Zone” is to disengage your left brain and release athletic performance to the instinctive control of your right brain.

The Focus Band is an electronic device that tracks the source and frequency of the athlete’s brainwaves during his performance.  Performance “in the Zone” is verified by the Focus Band.

Combining brain wave measurement and real time video pinpoints the moment in a routine that an athlete loses Focus.  “Leveling up” to constant right brain control is more precise and efficient with video playback.  The Focus Band provides the ultimate tool for learning and perfecting a Competition Performance Routine.

Who is Interested in Focus Band Training?

Reading brainwaves sounds like voodoo, but it’s not.  In the last year, four PGA Tournament Professionals visited the Golf Lab and took part in Focus Band training.

PGA Tournament Players know that physical skills are pretty equal at the elite level.  The difference between winning and losing is the mental game.

Rod Pampling credits the Focus Band in part for his improved performance.

Focus Band training has also proven effective in baseball and tennis.  Professional actors have employed the Focus Band to find their “character”.

This is not as exotic as you might think.  I have surprising personal experience to report.

Concentration, The Zone and Focus

I think that I shared a common understanding of The Zone with a lot of other golfers.

In my past, The Zone was a “bubble”.  The essence of staying in The Zone was avoiding penetration of the bubble.

Underlying concepts included isolation, withdrawal and silence.

You can’t play golf that way.

The outside world always gets in your way.

There’s a better way to understand Focus.

The Asian Concept of “Mushin” as it applies to Martial Arts

“Mushin” is the Japanese word that translates to “mind of no mind”.  (Pronunciation:  Moo-shin).  Mushin is the word a Japanese athlete uses to describe playing in the Zone or maintaining Focus.

Imagine the Samurai Warrior for interpretation.  Mushin encompasses “total awareness” of the entire battlefield.  You focus on your opponent but you maintain acute awareness of all the flashing swords.

Mushin is a convenient word to learn and use because it carries no baggage.  We insiders now understand each other.  Mushin.

Focus Band – the Gizmo

The Focus Band is a training device that you wear that reveals brain activity in full color – bright red for left and deep blue for right.  You learn to enter Mushin on demand with the Focus Band reporting success.

I’ve been writing about the Focus Band for two years.  Of all the cutting edge Gizmos that we’ve introduced to Golf Lab clients, the Focus Band is unique and persistent.  The best players keep coming back for more.

Until recently, I didn’t fully understand the Martial Arts concept of Focus or the Focus Band.  The early Focus Band required an experienced operator to interpret the data.  Analysis was tedious.  That’s over.  The latest release of Focus Band software is revolutionary.  It’s visual, personal and immediately understandable.

My recent experience was an awakening.  I discovered that living in Mushin is not a fragile condition.

If you think that the Focus Band is only for Tour Players – not at all.  I think that Focus Band training can have a dramatic effect on any player’s game.

My Personal Enlightenment

I now have a totally different understanding of Mushin thanks to the Focus Band.  Here’s how it happened:

I was working with John Ruark and the Focus Band one Saturday afternoon to gain experience.  “Working” means watching my reactions in real time communicating with a human-looking “Avatar” face that mimicked my reactions.

I learned to affect the various sensors with breathing, facial tension, conscious thought, speech and posture.  It is an amazing experience to see your motions and emotions translated electronically into nearly lifelike form.  That’s your Avatar.

It takes a while to learn to communicate through the Focus Band with your Avatar.  It’s kind of like teaching a baby to speak.  Pretty soon, you begin to learn how to control your entry to Mushin.

While I was teasing Mushin, I was using my best memories of Zen and Yoga techniques to mimic a trance-like, ultra-focused state.

Then, Bob called from across the room.  We needed to work out details of an order.  I left the Focus Band on and walked over to discuss the problem with Bob.  That conversation lasted ten minutes.

When I returned, John said “You were in a perfect state of Mushin during that entire time with Bob.”

What a shock!!  I’m looking for a trance-like state, concentrating, ultra-focused state.  Quite the contrary, I was in Mushin – fully focused and engaged while I was conducting business as usual.  It never occurred to me that Mushin was a state of mind that existed with normal human interaction.

  Rod Pampling 2

 PGA Pro Rod Pampling Practicing at The Golf Lab with the Focus Band

Practical Application for Normal Golfers

The Focus Band is introduced in our “Under 30 Putts” program.  That’s our five-session comprehensive program aimed helping good putters become great putters.  That’s our “Calibration and Tuning” program for putting.

It is important for a golfer to have a well worked out and rehearsed “Performance Routine” before embarking on Focus Band training.

In our “Under 30 Putts” program, the Focus band is normally introduced in the third session – after a player has developed a strong awareness of their stroke practiced for consistency.

Accomplished, low-index tournament players will find immediate benefit from Focus Band training.

Private sessions are available Friday and Saturday each week by appointment.  John Ruark presents the sessions.  Call Bob Pegram at the Golf Lab for an appointment.  (650) 654-1770.

Here is a link to the Focus Band website with videos taken at The Golf Lab: http://www.focusband.com/#/how-it-works/4563704055

The Focus Band in place:

Focus Band in place

Posted in Golf Equipment Reviews | Leave a comment

This Saturday 9-12 – Cool Stuff Sale – Free Prizes for Earlybirds

No early sales – The “Good Stuff” will all be here at 9 AM.

We’re getting ready to make a big announcement and we want to clear the decks.  There’s some great stuff that we’re going to put out at incentive prices.  We have also scoured our warehouse for some of the fabulous “odds and ends” that have been hanging around.  Some very unusual and interesting objects will be on sale.

There’s another incentive for coming out on Saturday.  We have a $50 discount coupon on any fitting service for everyone who arrives between 9 and 12.

First is FREE:

If you don’t like to spit on your clubface, here’s an invention that is one of those things that you never knew you were missing.

A spray container of FIZ.  Squirt it on your clubface and you’ll never spit again.  12 available.

FIZ

For the guys who really love their Miuras we have some free posters.  The picture of Mr. Miura is the same one that we have at our Miura Shrine at the Golf Lab.  10 available.

Miura Poster   Miura Putter poster 1

One free gift per customer.

From the Estate of the Late Jim Mayer:

A near-new Titleist bag and push cart combination.   This is a little too big to ship conveniently from an eBay sale so we’re going to give the eBay price to our own customers.  Here’s a great bargain at $125.

Mayer bag 1

Mayer bag 2

Also, one of the nicest Sun Mountain Cart bags you’ll ever see.  Never one better for $75.

Sun Mountain 1   Sun Mountain 2

We are ready and willing to help liquidate any equipment you might have standing around in your garage or basement – losing value every day.  Now is a good time to “cash in” your unused golf equipment.  Just drop it off.  We handle everything.  If you would like to donate the value of your used equipment to junior golf – Bob Hoover at the Palo Alto Muni deserves all the support he can get.

Give yourself an early Christmas present with “found money”.

Extra nice Nakashima Bag.  If you want a home for your Nakashima driver, here’s the ideal bag.  If you buy one of these from Nakashima, you can expect to pay an arm and a leg.  This is one of the very first they made – back when the quality was a little higher.  Don’t pay $300.  Buy this one – like new – for $125.

Nakashima bag 1   Nakashima bag 3

For the guys who want to practice their putting strokes:

This is one of the very best training aids available.  The Z-Factor – “Perfect Putting Machine”.  We have used this gizmo with our Science and Motion Putt Lab.  It gets perfect marks from the most demanding judge.  Use your own putter with the Z-Factor to groove your stroke.  List price is $249.  We’re selling them for $99 each.  2 available.

The most stylish way to view a golf tournament is with your own stylish sport seat.  This one is an antique.  You’re going to have to stand intense jealousy at the next golf tournament when the rest of the gallery is tired from standing and you’re rested up from sitting.  These are two “antiques” from Leith’s personal collection.  $75 for choice.

Seat Stick 1   Seat Stick 2

The world’s most expensive shag bag.

A couple of years ago one of the Fashion Designers from Seventh Avenue decided that he would produce a line of the most outrageously priced accessories in the world.  (He must have thought he was in Japan.)

This is the one that I bought for myself.

Original retail was $249.  Buy in Now for $125.

Shag Bag 1   Shag Bag 2

For more information, call Bob at 650-654-1770.

Best regards,

Leith Anderson and the Golf Lab Gang.

Posted in New Golf Lab 2012, Unclassified | Leave a comment

Radar for Shaft Fitting – A Technical Breakthrough

The time has come for you to update your clubfitting.  In the last year, there have been two technical breakthroughs that have revolutionized shaft fitting for irons and drivers.

The first breakthrough is radar.  Choosing shafts with launch monitor numbers is obsolete.

Radar shows the movement of the shaft just prior to impact.  We get a picture of shaft performance – not a number.  You have to see it to believe it.

The second technical breakthrough is Fit2Score Shaft Profile EI graphs.  For the first time, we know the exact playing characteristics of every shaft we test.  For the in-depth story on Russ Ryden and Fit2Score – go to www.Fit2score.com and click on “Equipment.”

The “missing link” is the player.

But you can see where we’re aiming.  We know the flex profile of the shaft.  We know the results with your swing.

After we find the shaft flex profile that works for you – by radar – we know all other shafts that match that profile.  We also know the flex profiles that don’t work.  You can save a lot of time by not trying to figure that out on the driving range.

You have probably been fitted before – maybe a dozen times.  Take one more fitting.  You will be amazed.

The Key to Shaft Fitting is Radar

After thousands of launch monitor fittings I can say that traditional launch monitor “fitting by the numbers” is obsolete.  Numbers don’t tell the story.

The key to fitting with radar is that shaft performance is displayed visually.

Swing Speed Graph

We rely on two graphs.  The first is speed of the clubhead from waist level to impact:

FlightScope Speed Profile 1

This graph tells us a lot about the player’s swing.  A player with consistent swing speed will lay tracks down one on top of another.  If there is a “power leak” in a player’s swing – this graph reveals it.  Notice the little dip just before impact.  That’s a power leak.  There is some inconsistency in swing speed.

Radar is becoming increasingly important as a teaching tool.  You can see why.

Club Head Acceleration Graph

This graph reveals the magic.  Think of the radar “window” from belt level to impact.

The acceleration graph picks up the moment of release and tracks the movement of the clubhead into impact.

FlightScope Acceleration Graph

If there is a “perfect graph” this is an example.  The “hump” is the player’s maximum acceleration – the moment of release.  It is well inside the radar window.  Declining acceleration with no random movement just before impact is imperative for consistency.

But if you look closely, you’ll notice that only the last shot loaded the shaft.  The earlier swings indicate an early release – indicating that the shaft is too stiff in the butt.

Shaft fitting with radar is an emerging science.  Look for continuous updates on the Golf Lab Blog.   www.calgolflab.com/blog/dashboard.

Understanding Shaft Flex Profile

Each shaft has different characteristics.  The most important characteristic of a golf shaft is the “EI Curve” or in more formal terms the “shaft flex profile”.

The guru of shaft analysis is Russ Ryden.  He invented a machine and wrote software that produces the only professional, independently verified EI Curves.  He built 15 of the machines.  The Golf Lab is a licensee of the Fit2Score System.

This is what a Fit2Score EI Curve looks like:

ATTAS3 EI Profile

You read an EI Curve from right to left.  In this case the UST ATTAS 3 indicates a very stiff butt section with a relatively soft mid-section.  The tip firms up.  The Fit2Score system allows comparison of any common shaft in the North American market.

What We Learn from Your Radar Fitting

We know the flex profile of every shaft that we test.

We know how every shaft we test performs with your swing.

When we find the shaft that produces the radar tracing with the correct pattern and consistency, we will have found the shaft that performs the best with your swing.  We will then know the flex profile that matches your swing.

That’s the most certain and accurate way to fit shafts.

Radar Shaft Fitting:  1.5 hours.  $150.

Incentive Deal

You know we’ve been working on a “new model” at the Golf Lab.  We’re looking for the players who are looking for us.  We are focused on finding the guys who want to get better – and are looking for a program to help make it happen.

If you need a boost, here’s a $100 Coupon good for any Golf Lab service or product – after the radar fitting.  You can use the credit any way you choose.  If you decide to buy a $200 Thriver as a result of “14 Fairways” – that brand new driver will cost you $100.

$100 Certificate 2012-10-22

Link to PDF: $100 Certificate 2012-10-22

If you’re interested in our “Under 30 Putts” Program – the credit is good there too.

Best regards,

Leith Anderson and the Golf Lab Gang.

Posted in Fitting Methods and How to Buy | Leave a comment

30 Putts per Round – Five Session Program to Break the Barrier – Henry Boulton Visit – Focus Band Australia

We have a rare opportunity to work with a world leader in “Performance Theory and Practice”.

Graham and Henry Boulton have been leading the development of their own Performance System in Australia for almost ten years.  (That’s the magic number for “overnight success”).  Graham and Henry invented the Focus Band.

Henry is in the United States.   He started his trip in Southern California working with Jason Goldsmith – the only other Focus Band practitioner in the country.  They made a trip to Orlando last week.  They’re working in LA and San Diego this week.  Henry will then visit the Golf Lab.

For players who are dedicated to playing better golf, the Focus Band is a great tool to help understand manage your mental game.

Add John Ruark to the program.  Outside of a few practitioners in Australia – and Jason in Southern California – there is no one more experienced with Focus Band training than John.  Take a close look at how well Rod Pampling is doing this year.  He started working with Henry, Graham, his psychologist wife and the Focus Band a year ago.  He credits the Focus Band for his recent success – competing on Tour well into his 40′s.

Focus Band training is an integral part of our “Under 30 Putts – Breaking the Barrier” program.  If you would like to book a session with the “Masters of the Focus Band” – get in touch with Bob Pegram at the Golf Lab to reserve some time.  A great way to get started is our five session – “Under 30 Putts” – program.

To take full advantage of a private session with Henry – enrolling in the “30 Putts” program would be a good start.  Details follow:

Meet John and Henry:

Rod Pampling and John Ruark

John Ruark at The Golf Lab with Rod Pampling

 

Rod Pampling and Henry Boulton

Henry Boulton at The Golf Lab with Rod Pampling

Rod Pampling 2

Rod Pampling 1

Rod with the Focus Band at the Golf Lab During U.S. Open Week

(he made the cut)

Link to the Focus Band Website: http://www.acadps.com/

 The Golf Lab ”Under 30 Putts” program is designed for the player who wants to become a good putter.  Becoming a good putter requires investing time and attention to accomplish your goal.  A comprehensive program with professional coaching is the key to success.

Our “Under 30 Putts” program presents leading theories and methods of aiming, setup, stroke, distance control and green reading.  We integrate mental and physical performance in orderly sequence to build an expert putting routine.

The Golf Lab AimPoint- inspired precision indoor putting surface is the ideal environment to perfect green reading and targeting.  After the first session you can expect fewer putts per round.

The Golf Lab “Under 30 Putts” program reveals your putting stroke and allows you to monitor your progress.  Several Northern California PGA teaching professionals contributed their ideas to ”Under 30 Putts” and include it as an extension of their own instruction.

First Session – Aim, Setup, Alignment and SAM PUTT LAB Analysis.

The starting point.  The foundation of a solid putting stroke is aiming inside the hole.  Without training, most players aim outside the hole and compensate for poor aim with subconscious stroke adjustments.  That’s death to good putting.

Player stance, alignment and grip are checked – consistent with fundamental principles like “eyes over the line”.  Benchmark stroke information is recorded with the Science and Motion (SAM) Putt Lab.  Putter is measured for length, Lie, loft and grip and modified if required.

At the end of each session, progress is evaluated and exercises are recommended for completion before the next session.

Second Session – Tempo, Pace and Distance Control

You will have a decision to make at the beginning of the second session.  Will you choose to perfect a calibrated, gravity-assisted stroke?  Or, are you going to follow the “straight through” style?  Your natural putting stroke is determined.  You learn to roll the ball.

Drills are introduced to calibrate a player’s stroke, test green speed, and train for targeting and distance control.

For the next week, recommend two visits to an outdoor practice green to putt to a string line.

Third Session – Aiming, Targeting and Green reading

The basis of all green reading systems is finding the “Zero Line”.  From there, the direction of the break is predictable.  You’ll never miss the direction of a break again.  Scientific green reading is a powerful tool.

The value of scientific green reading is multiplied with a repeatable putting stroke that rolls the ball on the right line at the correct pace.  There are three green reading systems competing for attention.  We present the basic concepts of each system.

For the next week, we recommend two visits to an outdoor practice green to find the “straight putt” from above and below each hole.

Fourth Session – Performance Routine and Focus Band

“Mental Training” with the Focus Band is introduced.

Player develops his own “performance routine” based on principles of visualization, alignment, targeting, focus, setup, alignment and execution introduced in prior sessions.

During the next week we recommend two visits to an outdoor practice range to get comfortable with the new performance routine.  The performance routine applies to the full swing as well as putting.

Fifth Session – Putting it All Together

The essence of a “performance routine” is the player is able to maintain focus on their goal – executing his swing motion “in the zone”.

The goal of the final session is to perform a complete putting routine from preparation to stroke wearing the Focus Band.

“Under 30 Putts – Breaking the Barrier” – Five Sessions – $625.

John Ruark is at the Golf Lab every Friday and Saturday.  Sessions can be scheduled weekly at player’s convenience.

It helps to come with a playing partner.  It works very well to work with two players at the same time.  That is especially true if they play together.  With two players we extend the sessions to an hour and a half.

5 Sessions – 2 players – $500 each.

Openings are available for this weekend. Call Bob at 650-654-1770 to set up a time.

Regards,

Leith Anderson and the Golf Lab Gang.  John, Bob, Clint, Dian and Joel

Posted in Putting Club | Leave a comment

Mariner’s Point Edel Wedge Fittings – Why Edel is Unique – This Friday and Saturday – Free Fitting with Order Call for Time – Congratulations to David Olmeda

If there is only one thing you’re going to do to improve your short game in the next six months – take the Edel Wedge fitting at Mariner’s Point.

Imagine a wedge company audacious enough to say “Only we have the answer- and the answer is high bounce”.

Edel is right.  We have proof.

Our most demanding players – the kids who are playing for their scholarships – were the first players to put Edel wedges in their bags.

The key test is from tight lies around the green.  Even good players fall back to gap wedge lofts or lower and run those shots up.

But what if there’s a bunker in the way?

Every Edel wedge player said the high bounce, high loft wedge put a new shot in their bag.  That was very big for all of them.

The Source of the New Bounce Theory – Mike Adams – Top 100 Instructor

From years on the practice tee teaching short game, Mike Adams observed that most players gravitate toward a “center right” weight distribution for their wedge game.   A low-bounce, high loft wedge requires a very delicate touch to slide the club under the ball and avoid digging.

Adams discovered that the most consistent wedge swing requires a player to put weight on his left side, make sharp contact and finish low left.  Ball flight is lower with less dispersion and more spin.  Adams created a wedge fitting system that matches bounce angle and sole grind to a player’s wedge swing.

For years, Adams had access to the Titleist “Private Stock” – forged wedges in unique grinds available only to Tour players.  But then the groove rule changed and Titleist decided that there would be no more Private Stock.

Working with David Edel, the new partners created a line of wedges with eight sole grinds per loft in 58* and 60*.  Measured bounce angles run from 14* to 22*.

Your wedges are just as important as your driver.  Why not take the same care fitting your wedges?

Beautiful Custom Finishing

Here are some examples of custom finishing that came in recently.

Keith K. wedge 1

John Doyle wedges

More examples are here:

http://calgolflab.com/blog/2012/07/26/edel-wedge-bling/

and here:

http://edelgolf.smugmug.com/Wedges/Edel-Golf/23924834_2PkQsj#!i=2056774758&k=5KvKnVK

Edel Wedge Fitting at Mariner’s Point – now available Saturday morning.

Our wedge fittings are comprehensive.

We start with “calibration”.  The key to distance control with wedges is knowing the precise average distance that you carry each wedge in your bag with a full swing and with a three quarters swing.

The first eye-opener is that your average distance will be way less than you think.

The second eye opener is that your dispersion will be much tighter with a lower-loft wedge at three quarters swing than the higher loft with a full swing.

Understanding your carry distances will help determine the exact lofts that produce correct distance gapping.

From there, we go to bounce.  You hit through the sequence of bounce angles.  You’ll know the best.  You’ll see the evidence in the divot.

The Golf Lab – San Carlos, CA – Regional Edel Golf Certified Fitters

The Golf Lab and the Golf Academy at Pebble Beach are the only two certified Edel fitters in Northern California.

Congratulations to David Olmeda

I’ve been talking about the Player$ Tour as the place where you go to prove you can play for your own money.  David Olmeda had a good weekend.  He got the crystal.

Congratulations David.

David holding trophy  David Olmeda's Trophy

Posted in Unclassified | Leave a comment

Player’s Journal – Out for the Season – Preparing for 2013 – This Saturday at the Golf Lab

I had an accident.  Just a slip and a bump and a broken finger.  I didn’t do anything about it for a week.  I thought it would get better.  Then I went to the doctor.  He thought it might get better.  Two weeks later, I’m going in for surgery on Thursday.

I don’t want you to think I’m a wimp.  Here’s a picture of the pinky.

Leith's broken finger

The bad news is I’m out for the season.  Doc says two months with no squeezing.  The good news is that I don’t squeeze a putter.  Look for increased attention to “putting science” – starting right now.

The Concept of Competition – Player’s Golf Tour

My apologies to JW Means and his Player’s Golf Tour for suspending my “Competition Test”.  He thinks I broke my finger on purpose.  The Tour will be at Chardonnay on Sunday.  If you’re in the mood and don’t have a tournament, give JW a call.  (775) 852-4653.

I’ll be back out there as soon as the pinky problem goes away.

John Ruark’s Success

It’s time to do a serious plug for a guy who’s been a friend for a long time and who has distinguished himself with his dedication to learning all he can about putting, short game and performance.  John Ruark.

Here’s what happened last Saturday.  John had two appointments.  Both were taking the “Analysis and Performance” test.  We test aim, stroke, tempo and pace.  We check the putter.  And we talk about putting.  What does it take to get better – really?

On Saturday, both clients signed up for our “Under 30 Putts” program.  After almost two years of working out every detail of what it takes to “get better at putting” – we found it takes a minimum of five hours to work through all of the details – plus a few more hours of practice on your own.

If you want to become a better putter than you are today – here’s a link to “Under 30 Putts”

http://calgolflab.com/blog/2012/10/10/1817/

The Old Time Golf Shop

Karnak is still in town.

Karnak is selling THRIVERS like hot cakes.  Alan Whiteside came by on Wednesday with his new Cleveland driver.  It is a beauty.  10.5* – actual loft was 15* by our measurements.  46″ long – D1 Swingweight – even at that length.  (That means a very light head).

Unhittable.

He took a Thriver to the range.  When he  came back the quote was:  “It feels like it was made to be in my hands.”

He walked out with his new $199 Thriver and we kept the Cleveland to cover the fitting.

The Radar Fitting Article

One of my best-ever articles was the one I just completed and sent out this week on “Radar Fitting”.  We have never done a better job matching driver shafts.  On the iron side, there are even more amazing breakthroughs coming – regarding optimal iron spin.

Get ready for the future with this article.

http://calgolflab.com/blog/2012/10/10/new-golf-lab-iron-build-heavier-heads-lighter-shafts-radar-shaft-fitting-explained/ 

Come on out this Saturday.  We’ll be at the Golf Lab all day.

Posted in Fitting Services | Leave a comment

New “Golf Lab Iron Build” – Heavier Heads, Lighter Shafts Radar Shaft Fitting Explained

This might be the most important article that I’ve ever written.  It describes new ideas about weight and balance in irons.  I also explain how we use radar as the ultimate tool to fit shafts.

With over a year in development and testing the “Golf Lab Build” for irons is a proven success.  We discovered a better way to build irons with lightweight graphite shafts.

The “Golf Lab Build” could be controversial.  As far as I know, no other clubfitter in the world recommends 65 to 80 gram graphite iron shafts for low index players with high swing speeds.  It goes against tradition.

It’s about time for a change.  60 years of the “same old thing” in irons is enough.

$2000 sets of irons require hands-on testing to appreciate feel and prove performance.  To be sure, we built ten complete sets of custom irons for on-course testing.  Miura and Vega forged heads – AeroTech, Matrix, UST and ACCRA shafts in weight ranges from 65 to 95 grams.   Best of Breed across the board.

In head-to-head testing over the last year, 30 out of 36 players chose the “Golf Lab Build”.  That is a severe test.  The minimum price for our Miura and Vega irons is $250 per club.  The “competition” is half that.  When players buy at double the price, you know there’s something special happening.

“Golf Lab Build” irons feel better and perform better than any iron you have ever hit.  (Probability:  85%)

AeroTech Steel Fiber Acceptance on PGA Tour

We are in a new era for iron shafts.  Matt Kuchar and Brandt Snedeker have been playing 95 gram Aerotech Steel Fiber shafts on Tour with great success.

Two dozen PGA Tour players are testing AeroTech Shafts.  Every major shaft manufacturer is trying to get their graphite iron shafts in play on the PGA Tour.

There is no doubt.  If you are over 40 and still playing heavy steel shafts, you will achieve measurable, immediate improvement in distance and dispersion with lightweight graphite iron shafts.  That claim is easy to test indoors with radar and outdoors with your hands, eyes and ears.

Lightweight shafts are not for seniors only.  Tyler Garrett – a professional tournament player – has been using 70 gram Aerotech Steel Fiber shafts in his irons for the last six months.  He wouldn’t still be playing them if they didn’t perform better.

If you are wondering “which brand?” – the choice is easy.  All the buzz on the PGA Tour is about AeroTech Steel Fiber.  If you are buying your first lightweight shafts, AeroTech is the logical choice.  Why not take the Pros’ choice?

  Aerotech i95 shaft

In one of the most interesting examples of “it ain’t broke, don’t fix it, AeroTech has not changed their Steel Fiber shafts in twelve years.  Not even the paint job.  Your clubs won’t go out of style in a year.  That’s nice.

The Simplified Physics

With Tour Players moving to 95 gram graphite shafts from 130 gram steel shafts, there is room for normal amateurs to go even lower.

Substitute a 65 gram graphite shaft for a 130 gram steel shaft.  That’s two ounces of club weight.  In the golf club world, that’s a ton.

Lighter weight shafts produce higher swing speeds.  That’s a natural result – but not our main goal.  We’re looking for more efficiency from the same swing.

We change the balance between the shaft and the head.  Our custom irons take 6-9 grams of extra head weight.  That adjustment increases head feel in contrast with the light shaft weight.

Extra head weight promotes a subtle change in a player’s swing.  More club head mass transfers more energy to the ball with the same swing.  Most players see an immediate five yard increase in distance with no increase in swing speed.

We don’t fit for distance.  We fit for accuracy and consistency.  Distance is a nice extra.

Any irons can be rebuilt with lightweight graphite shafts.  You can revive your favorite set from the past for a whole new set of memories.  Rebuilding a set of irons with AeroTech Steel Fiber shafts is $85 per club.

The Key to Shaft Fitting for Irons is Radar

After thousands of launch monitor fittings – I know that traditional launch monitor “fitting by the numbers” doesn’t work for irons.

Radar looks at the player and the club.  If you haven’t been fitted with radar – you owe it to your game to book a radar shaft fitting.  The key to fitting with radar is that shaft performance is displayed visually.

Swing Speed Graph

We rely on two graphs.  The first is speed of the clubhead from waist level to impact:

FlightScope Speed Profile 1

This graph tells us a lot about the player’s swing.  A player with consistent swing speed lays tracks down one on top of another.  If there is a “power leak” in a player’s swing – this graph reveals it.  Notice the little dip just before impact.  That’s a power leak.  There is some inconsistency in swing speed.

Radar is becoming increasingly important as a teaching tool.  You can see why.

Club Head Acceleration Graph

This graph reveals the magic.  It tracks clubhead acceleration in a “window” from belt level to impact.

  FlightScope Acceleration Graph

If there is a “perfect graph” this is a close example.  The “hump” is the player’s maximum acceleration – the moment of release.  It is well inside the radar window.  Declining acceleration with no random movement just before impact is the pattern that indicates consistency.

Shaft fitting with radar is an emerging science.  Look for continuous updates on the Golf Lab Blog.   www.calgolflab.com/blog/dashboard.

Understanding Shaft Flex Profile

Each shaft has different characteristics.  Shaft design is revealed in an “EI Graph”.

The guru of shaft analysis is Russ Ryden.  He invented a machine and wrote software that produces the only professional, independently verified EI Graphs.  He built 15 of the machines.  The Golf Lab is a licensee of the Fit2Score System.

This is what a Fit2Score EI Graph looks like:

ATTAS3 EI Profile

You read an EI Graph from right to left.  This is the UST ATTAS 3.  The graph indicates a very stiff butt with a relatively soft mid-section.  The tip firms up.  The Fit2Score system allows side by side comparison of any common shaft in the North American market.

What We Learn from Your Radar Fitting

We know the flex profile of every shaft that we test.

We know how every shaft we test performs with your swing.

When we find the shaft that produces the radar tracing with the correct pattern and consistency, we will have found the shaft that performs the best with your swing.

That’s the most certain and accurate way to fit shafts.

Radar Shaft Fitting:  1.5 hours.  $150.

Best regards,

Leith Anderson and the Golf Lab Gang.

Posted in Golf Equipment Chronicles | Leave a comment

This Saturday at the Golf Lab – Free Testing and Analysis – Putter and Driver

It’s starting to get a little chilly outdoors.  There’s good reason to stop by the Golf Lab this Saturday for a technology update, a little practice and golf talk.  Bright lights and warm inside.

This week we added several Feature Attractions and a Bargain.  Read to the bottom for all details.

Please forward this email to your playing partners and friends.  We are running smoothly.  We’re ready to expand the Golf Lab Community.

Free Putter Aim Test – Science and Motion Putt Lab Analysis (SAM):  If you don’t aim inside the hole – any putt you make is a miss.  Take a step into science this Saturday.  We’ll test your aim with your putter.  Free.

Then, we’ll analyze your stroke with the SAM.  If you aim right, you will “compensate” by pulling left or closing your putter face.  If you aim left, you will push right or open your putter face.  It is amazing to see how measurable and predictable “compensations” are.

The key to getting better at putting is “knowing your stroke”.  You need a putter that you aim inside the hole and a stroke that finishes the job.  We can show you how to do that this Saturday.  Free.  Walk-ins welcome.  Call if you would like to reserve time.  Bob Pegram – 650-654-1770.  It will take half an hour.

Brainwave Analysis – Focus Band:  “Finding the Zone” requires controlling your conscious thoughts.  The concept is managing “right brain” and “left brain” activity.  The goal is to shut down left brain activity (conscious thought) and turn performance over to your right brain (subconscious).

The Focus Band is an electronic gizmo that you wear on your head.  It records the source and intensity of the electrical activity in your brain.  When your “avatar brain” goes from red on the left to blue on the right – you’re ready to play.

John Ruark has worked with multiple PGA Tour Players and College Golf Teams.  He is the only American “Certified” with Focus Band.  That’s a small club.  There are only four certified Focus Band practitioners in the world.

John will help you develop your own method to “get in the zone”.  That becomes part of your pre-shot routine – just like he does with the Pros.

We will demonstrate the Focus Band on Saturday at 10 AM – as the feature attraction at this week’s Putting Club.  The demonstration will be one half hour.  John also schedules private sessions.  If you are serious about improving your performance under pressure, the Focus Band the best mental training method.

Free Driver Testing We’ve been offering our Driver Test and Analysis for several weeks.  It is the starting point for improving your driving.  We measure your driver on our precision gauge.  We determine the true loft and face angle.  (It will be very different from what you think).

You hit your driver with the Flightscope radar looking over your shoulder.  The radar reports your “launch ballistics”.  More important, you get your swing path and face angle at impact.  That’s what you need to make sure your driver specifications match your swing.  Driver heads need to be matched just as accurately as driver shafts.

If you have an adjustable driver, we will make the adjustments to match your swing.

Then we take a close look at your shaft.  The radar reveals how your shaft is working with your swing.  If you are leaving distance on the table – we will tell you how much.

The Driver Test and Analysis takes half an hour.  You can drop in or you can schedule by calling Bob Pegram at 650-654-1770.

This Saturday – KARNAK the Clubmaker is Back in Town.

If you want to replace your driver shaft – KARNAK is your guy.  If you’re looking for a new fairway metal or hybrid.  If you’re thinking about new grips or making adjustments to your irons or putter.  KARNAK is your guy.

If you’re wondering if you’ve got the right mix of clubs or if there might be a new model that makes sense – KARNAK is your guy.

If you want to talk about golf clubs this Saturday, KARNAK is in town.

KARNAK takes appointments too.

And for Collectors – the “Ultimate Collection” is on Display – and for sale.

We’re getting ready to launch a new website - Vintage Blades - the only Custom Golf Shop on the Internet.  We’re going to attract attention by auctioning the “Private Reserve” Collection on eBay over the next few weeks.  These are the best sets from a 20 year collection.  On Preview at the Golf Lab this Saturday.

The Vintage Blades website will collect and preserve the history of the most famous iron models of all time.  Johnny Miller used modified MacGregor 985’s to win at Oakmont – shafted with graphite – in 1973.  Payne Stewart used Wilson Progressives to win his U.S. Open.  Every model has a history.

Vintage Blades will bring history to the present by offering custom, Playable Classics rebuilt to our “Golf Lab Build” specification.  There is a very good value story in “recycling classic forged iron heads”.  You get a great set of irons – equal to any modern forging – for the most economical cost.

Choose a set of classic iron heads that suit your eye and we’ll rebuild them – adding a little head weight and reshafting with high performance AeroTech Steel Fiber shafts.

When Mr. Miura visited the Golf Lab a couple of years ago he said “If you can’t afford Miuras, buy a set of Wilsons, Hogans or MacGregors from the old days.  They’re high quality.  I would be proud to play them.”

Thanks for reading to the bottom.  Here’s the special offer.  This Saturday only.

Choose a fabulous set of Playable Classic iron heads from our collection this Saturday.  We’ll build them to your specification.  The complete “Golf Lab Build” for the price of the shafts alone.  The classic forged heads are free – but only for this week and just to see who’s looking.

AeroTech Steel Fiber shafts – built to exact specifications – $90 each.  $720 for a fabulous set of irons with your choice of MacGregor 985, Hogan GCD Forged, Spaulding “Bird on Ball”, Wilson Progressive or Hoffman Balliwicks.

They are all Big Time, Tournament Winning Heads.  If you’ve been reading all the good things about Miuras and Vegas at $2000 for the set – if all you need is performance – this is your answer.

There are plenty of other choices.  We have most of the Japanese Domestic Market forgings – the Joe Blades – and most of the models made by Miura under contract.

To be sure about the exact shaft that fits your swing, book an iron shaft fitting.  We will find out.

Posted in Fitting Services | Leave a comment

Private LONG BALL Clinic with Eric Jones – Ultimate Driver Fitting

October weather is fabulous. Join us this Sunday at the Pleasanton Golf Center at 9 AM. The sun at your back, breeze in your face and the Bay Area’s best natural grass.

For the next two weeks, we’re offering a twist on our Wedge Calibration and Fitting session. We’re turning to the LONG BALL.

Eric Jones won the Senior World Long Drive Championship in 2003. Since then, he has been a competitor at the “Worlds” every year. He’s a contender every year.

The Worlds are in three weeks so Eric is deep in preparation. A couple of weeks ago we imagined that Golf Lab clients would be interested in the same things that Eric is working on.

This Sunday at 9 AM Eric will discuss and demonstrate his long drive concepts – and reveal the latest update to his “Five Secrets”.

Eric captured all of his knowledge in one of the first “electronic books”. How better to illustrate a swing concept than to show a video of exactly what you mean? Eric was an innovator. Since then, electronic books for golf have become the standard. I wrote the forward to that First Edition.

Eric just finished an update to his “Five Secrets” book. Follow this link to get your brand new copy.

http://tinyurl.com/9kk7oct

The Full Sunday Program is Better with Preparation

Our Sunday Programs start at 9 AM. Eric works with the “Special Interest” group for the first hour. This is an intimate session. The group size limit is 6.

Then, the Coaching Program starts. That’s two hours of “supervised practice”. That gives us two hours to work on the concepts – and do some exploration and hands-on testing.

That would be a natural time to try out a few new drivers and driver shafts.

If there is one thing we have learned over the years it is hitting random drivers at a demo day is a waste of time.

If you want to get the very best out of this Sunday, book a Driver Fitting this week. Our Flightscope radar, combined with the Fit2Score shaft profile encyclopedia, has made shaft fitting for drivers a science. We will find the best shaft to match your swing.

Our precision measurement gauge will reveal the exact loft and face angle of your current driver. It is surely not what you think. The new dimension in driver fitting is matching HEAD SPECIFICATIONS to a player’s ideal swing. You will know the exact loft and face angle that will improve your consistency.

You will know how close your driver comes to your ideal specifications.

If other drivers test better, we’ll bring the best to the Pleasanton for OUTDOOR CONFIRMATION. That is the most efficient way to find your new driver.

If you’re going to take your technique seriously, then you’ve got to make sure you’ve got the right tools.

Before and After

If you take the Package Deal – you’ll have a very good idea of where you stand RIGHT NOW. That will include swing speed.

Join us on Sunday.

Return next week to the Golf Lab. We’ll measure your swing speed again. You’ll see the ultimate “Before and After” comparison in a single week. Combine technique, technology and tools for efficient, quick improvement.

You will see amazing results.

The Deal:

Long Drive Secrets Clinic and Coaching Program – $199.

Radar Driver Fitting and Tune-up – $150

Package Deal: Radar Driver fitting and Sunday morning session: $299.

No charge for the “After” test.

Call Bob Pegram 650-654-1770 to book a fitting and reserve your place for Sunday.

This will be good for the next two weeks. After that, Eric is off to the Worlds.

Free Measurement and Test Offer

If you would like to see what this is all about – we’ve got a free offer. Bring yourdriver to the Golf Lab. We will measure the loft and face angle. We will test it for flex. We will look up your driver shaft in our Fit2Score shaft profile encyclopedia so we know exactly what you’re playing.

Then you’ll hit a series of shots with your driver. The Flightscope looks over your shoulder.

The radar analysis will show you all of the normal “launch ballistics” and compare your performance against “theoretically perfect”.

Then we peel back the covers. You will see a “radar tracing” of exactly how your shaft behaves. Is it loading correctly? Is there any random acceleration at impact? Those questions are only answered with radar.

You will know exactly how much distance you’re leaving on the table and more important “WHY?” Is it the shaft, the driver head or your swing?

This test will take about 15 minutes. Back in Indiana we always used to say “open by chance or appointment”. Call ahead if you don’t want to wait around.

Call Bob Pegram for an appointment: 650-654-1770.

Best regards,

Leith Anderson and the Golf Lab Gang

Posted in Fitting Services | Leave a comment

Player’s Journal

A week ago, I promised a PLAYER’S JOURNAL to record my commitment to see if I have WHAT IT TAKES to put down $250 of my own money – on my own game – in a BIG MONEY tournament on the Player$ Golf Tour.

The Player$ Golf Tour is all about amateurs who don’t mind playing for more money than they want to lose.

Or, should I retire to the FUN DIVISION and start scoring by STABLEFORD – playing for PRO SHOP CREDIT.

I made a commitment to join Eric Jones’ Performance Coaching Program on Fridays and Sundays – an INTENSE COUPLE OF MONTHS – intended to get ready for the next test COMPETITION at Eagle Vines in October.  My goal is to drop six strokes in three months.

And I skipped my first Friday session.

I’m struggling with the concept of COMMITMENT.  It’s one thing to SAY and another to DO.

That’s the first big hurdle in golf.  SHOW UP FOR PRACTICE.

But Sunday was my BIG DAY – first meeting with my PERFORMANCE COACH – Eric Jones.  We planned to work after our Sunday “Wedge Calibration and Fitting Program”.

I brought the set of irons that I’ve been touting for the last year to get in some practice time.  I chose the Vega VC-03 – “Game Improvement” model.  Fancy Matrix Program 80 shafts – stiff flex.  The grass tees at the Pleasanton Golf Range are variable from one end of the tee line to the other.  I chose the closely-mown hard surface.  I started not liking the irons.  They began to look “clunky”.  They wanted a little more grass.  I was too lazy to move to the other end of the tee line.  Then, my hands started slipping on the new Golf Pride Tour Wrap grips – serious danger if you have slippery hands.  And the grips were a little too small.  I started thinking about the clubs I wanted to try next.  I was just banging my shots down range without any good idea of what I was trying to do.  That’s a bad state of mind for the practice tee.  I didn’t put myself in a good mood.

Did you ever have a practice session like that?

I noticed Eric watching me.  He didn’t say a thing.

That’s because he never says anything until he sets a performance benchmark.  Why make a random change in a player’s swing without knowing how the player performs right now?  Benchmarking current performance allows you to measure improvement.

After the other players left we sat down for a lengthy HEARY TO HEART.  Eric’s first question was ARE YOU READY TO DO THE WORK?

Where’s he been?  I said I was GOING TO DO THE WORK.  I even wrote that down.  I just haven’t quite got around to it yet.

Wednesday Morning at the MUNI.

One big part of the PROGRAM is to complete one round PER WEEK FOR SCORE.

Give Bob a call and join up tomorrow morning for 18 holes at the MUNI.  We’re playing it down and keeping score.  650-654-1770.

Posted in Fitting Services | Leave a comment

Getting Better at Golf – COMMITMENT to PERFORM

When you start thinking about a Balanced Program to get better at golf the first question to answer is:

“What are my goals?”

If you are COMING BACK TO GOLF you need to decide whether to make a COMMITMENT to IMPROVE – or take a more relaxed path – playing for FUN.

I used to think of myself as a pretty good player.  Maybe not PGA Tour good, but good enough to play on the State Champion High School Golf Team in Illinois (1961) and later on the Stanford golf team (1966, 1967). Since then, my sports highlights have been an occasional trophy from the Palo Alto Muni Men’s Club.  My handicap was under five for fifty years.

I know what it’s like to PERFORM UNDER PRESSURE and to CHOKE under pressure.

There is a fork in the road for every player.  It’s been three years since my last competitive round.  I’m wondering how to set realistic new goals.  Will I take the road toward PERFORMANCE- or FUN?  Should I take the FUN FORK and change my scoring method to STABLEFORD?  Or is that giving in?

“Shooting your age” is the highest honor in golf for seniors. That honor requires keeping score.

I need more information to make an informed decision:  These are my key questions:

Can I get better?

If so, what does “getting better” mean, and how do I go about it?

How long will it take?

How much will it cost?

And most important, will I be successful?

I want facts before I make a plan.

The Proving Ground

“There is golf and there is tournament golf, and they are not the same” -Bobby Jones’ famous quote describes a fundamental belief about golf.  Performance in golf is tested and proven under tournament conditions.  Nothing else counts.

The PERFORMANCE FORK in the road is all about POSTING SCORES.  The FUN ROUTE doesn’t care about lower handicaps.

The CHALLENGE

I want to know my current playing level.  “Tournament Conditions” are the only true test.

I want a serious competition on a championship golf course – with enough friends watching the scoreboard to give me BUTTERFLIES.

The greatest pressure for most amateur golfers is posting their score on the wall for their friends to see.  Another good way to increase pressure is to BET MORE MONEY THAN YOU WANT TO LOSE.  You can do that on the Player$ Golf Tour (PGT).  On the Player$ Golf Tour you bet $350 on yourself.  I first learned about the PGT from Golf Lab customers who compete on the Tour “proving ground”.

The Player$ Golf Tour is about PERFORMANCE and MONEY.  That’s what the PGA Tour cares about.  The Player$ Golf Tour keeps an Official Money List.  That’s how the PGA Tour measures performance.

Walt Joyce – playing partner, friend, long-time Golf Lab customer with a bag full of Golf Lab clubs – won over $6000 last year on the Player$ Golf Tour.  I know Walt, he loves the venue. He knows how to play “in the money”. Walt says:  “Come on down.”  That is a first-class testimonial.

If you can shoot your handicap on a Player$ Golf Tour competition course you can make money on your tournament golf.  Walt, David Olmeda and Rick Kehr have all been successful on the Player$ Golf Tour.  All you have to do is shoot your handicap.

The Player$ Golf Tour offers the purest form of high level “amateur” competition in Northern California.  I’d like to be out there playing with the guys who bet on themselves.

The PGT Tournament Handicapping System

You will get to know JW Means – the 70-something TRUE BELIEVER who founded the Player$ Golf Tour ten years ago.  His goal in life is to provide THE TRUSTED COMPETITIVE PLATFORM for amateur golf – playing for money – in Northern California.

JW has his own handicapping system.  It is more trustworthy than NCGA handicaps.  Once you join the PGT -”outside rounds” are no longer considered. Players cannot manipulate handicaps between tournaments.

If you’re going to play for $350 of your own money – you want to know that some sandbagger isn’t going to get away with the Pot.  Every PGT player that I talked to trusts the handicapping system.  That’s crucial for a BIG MONEY game.  That’s why PGT players come back to play -and continue to bet on themselves.

JW likes the guy who has CONFIDENCE IN HIS GAME and wants ACTION.  That’s in keeping with JW’s personality.  You can bet SIX WAYS FROM SUNDAY at a PGT event.

JW knows that Golf Lab clients are potential players on his Tour.  The current drawback is travel distance.  The TERRITORY that JW defined over the last ten years stretches from the East Bay to Reno.  You’ve got to be ready to play golf in Brentwood, Sacramento, Livermore, Stockton and Reno – if you want to join the Player$ Golf Tour you see the sights.

I drove an hour and twenty minutes to Roddy Ranch.  On the first tee, I felt the butterflies I was hoping to find.

The Roddy Ranch Course Setup

If you haven’t been to Roddy Ranch – it’s as inspiring – in its own way – as Pebble Beach.  The course has sweeping views of the surrounding central California ranch land. If you haven’t seen that panorama recently – it’s worth the trip by itself.  This time of year, it’s all golden.

Roddy Ranch Is difficult.  Slopes are over 130 from all tee boxes.  Unfamiliar players have NO CHANCE.  There are lots of false green fronts that mean blind shots.  Players with little experience with extreme uphill approach shots find themselves three clubs short.  Greens are hard and fast.  Breaks are subtle.

Course setup is meticulous in leveling the playing field.  JW’s system puts correct skill on appropriate tees.  JW aims to make a player hit every club in his bag. I hit every club in my bag. I don’t remember the last time I did that.  Spooky.

Amateurs of normal ability play 6400 yards – plus or minus a little. That means you’re on a course you can handle.  Scratch players go back to 6900 yards.

The BUSINESS DEAL

The Player$ Golf Tour was not set up to let newbies see if they are ready for PRIME TIME.

There are always three divisions or more guaranteed on the Player$ Golf Tour.  The SCRATCH DIVISION attracts some of the best players from Northern California.  There is good reason for that.  JW offers a guarantee to any very good player.  Make 61 birdie points in 12 Player$ Tour events in 12 months and he pays the way to Q-School. He’s done that twice.  There’s a PGT Player on BIG BREAK this season.  Plus, the payout is $1500 to $2000 for the winner – highest stakes in Northern California for a one-day event.

The real motivation behind the Player$ Golf Tour is JW is looking for the best young players and giving them a LEG UP.  That’s another good reason to support the PGT.

If you’re wondering what’s behind $6000 in winnings for an amateur? The Player$ Golf Tour is organized as a “Private Club”.  The USGA doesn’t care if members at any exclusive private club play for $30,000 in prize money – or more – in a CALCUTTA because it’s a “game between friends”.  There is an intentional loophole in the USGA Rules to accommodate gambling at private clubs.

If you join the Tour you pay $200 for an annual Membership.  You’re in THE CLUB.  You’re now “playing with friends”.  Your tournament fee goes down to $250.  There are plenty of other incentives for MEMBERS – but the biggest incentive is LEVEL PLAYING FIELD.

Your winnings from your PRIVATE CLUB are no more important to the USGA than the winnings of any other player from any other private club in the USA.  The key distinction is MEMBERSHIP.  Player$ Golf Tour events are not open to the public.  First-time players need a SPONSOR – a recommendation from a current PGT player.

When you have WINNINGS you can deduct EXPENSES for tax purposes.  If you need advice about how to turn your interest in tournament golf to a business expense – Walt Joyce can help you out with bookkeeping when you join the Tour.

That’s an interesting new twist on budgeting for golf.  Expenses like lessons and golf equipment become deductible.

I PASSED MY FIRST TEST

My first goal was to FINISH THE ROUND.  Roddy Ranch is the kind of course where around can go south in a hurry.  I was worried about “making a million” at Roddy Ranch.

I shot 86 on Sunday.

14 over par.  My current NCGA index is 6.1.  That’s a six stroke problem.  The high number is correct.  It surely was on Sunday.

I want to take six strokes off my score.  It would be great to get more.

I’m not thinking of jumping to the FUN DIVISION and accepting a 12 handicap.

I have work to do.

I’m planning on GETTING IT DONE in three months.  My ultimate goal is to join the Player$ Golf Tour and play for money in 2013 with a legitimate handicap, against other players with legitimate handicaps.

I’m not planning a MAKEOVER.  I have a FOCUSED PROGRAM in mind.  I want to fix my score, not my swing. My competition experience demonstrated the importance of concentrating on the most important skills for practice.

I’ll change my swing if I have to, but only if it will improve my performance. The challenge is to identify the top priorities that will lead to better scores, and then to knock them off one by one. I’ll to be working with Eric Jones in his Targetcenteredgolf.com Golf Coach program.  He’s the only guy who teaches performance this way – and you can join me in Pleasanton to find out what it is all about.

My Three-Month Program to Drop Six Shots

You’ll find my PLAYER’S JOURNAL on the Golf Lab Website.  That will be THE STORY about me as a player with a commitment to improve by six shots in three months.

There will also be a CLUBFITTERS NOTEBOOK – constant analysis of equipment.

I’m both guys.  Two views.

It should be fun.  Both guys have access to the best information, advice and technology on the Internet.

It will be a good read with a lot of original material – I’m hoping to turn the experience into a book.

I will answer the BIG QUESTIONS:  How much does it cost – how long will it take – and is success certain?

The daily journal won’t go out on the Internet.  You’ll have to bookmarkwww.calgolflab.com/blog/dashboard/.

If my Project is interesting to you as a personal project – if you are thinking about bringing your index down by five strokes or more – you qualify as a “soul buddy”.

If you want to take a look at a Player$ Golf Tour event without laying down $350 on yourself – you have two chances.  I made a special deal with JW for me and three players – $100 to play but not eligible for prize money.  I can bring three players to EAGLE VINES in October and three more to SUNOL in November.  We’ll play together in a foursome and meet up with JW after he pays off the winners.

My moment of truth comes on January 1, 2013.  Will I have the game to join the PGT?  If you’re thinking about playing at YOUR NEXT LEVEL – get in touch.

I’m looking for a few players who want to take the same journey.  Not forever, just three months.  Six stroke objective.  Simple.

Best Regards,

Leith Anderson

PS:  The MINIMUM COMMITMENT if you want to come along:

Join Eric Jones’ Performance Coaching Program at Pleasanton

One day per week – two hours

 

Join Golf Lab Putting Coaching Program at the Golf Lab

One day per week – one hour

 

Join Golf Lab High Performance Demo Program

Coordinates with Pleasanton Golf Coach Program – hours as required

 

Play one round of golf per week scored under tournament conditions.

 

Adopt Eric’s Score Tracker stat sheet to record scores – if you don’t already have another record keeping system – (you can see how he does it here:http://targetcenteredgolf.com/scorecard-stats-your-secret-weapon-for-improving-your-golf-game/

Posted in Unclassified | Leave a comment

The Hottest Irons on the Planet? Compare to Know.

Donate your Swing to Science?

I apologize for the headline.  I wrote it to get you to open the email and consider an new iron design that – as far as I know – is unique in the world.

As usual, I want to go into some depth to describe where this model comes from – why it is different – and why it has a chance to be very successful.

The Brand is UNITED.  UNITED is a creation of Graham Webb and Peter Lord.  I’ve introduced Graham and Peter to Golf Lab readers.  Peter is the designer.  He has ten years of experience as chief designer for a Spanish golf company in the last decade.  He knows his way around the best factories in Asia.

The UNITED line is multi-cultural.  Imagine this:  designed in the UK, produced in Japan, finished in China for worldwide release in KOREA.

The most dynamic market for golf in the world is KOREA.  Imagine that.

So while all attention is focused on KOREA – Graham and Peter are letting me handle the USA.  You could call this a “soft launch”.

Here’s what the heads look like:

SB3 Face

SB3 back

SB3 back 2

SB3 topline1

SB3 topline2

The STORY:

The UNITED SBC2 – is a CONSTRUCTION.

The next wave in iron heads – the best chance for rejuvenated interest in irons – is delivering longer distance.  That actually happened over the last couple of years.  Mizuno was the most successful in the “game improvement irons” category with their JP – 800 and 900 series.

All SUPER HOT irons share one characteristic:  They are hollow.  They are just tiny little hybrids – designed and engineered to give POP OFF THE FACE – and combined with strong lofts – a little more distance.

I never thought that was an advantage.

The downside of the HOT HEADS has always been the NUCLEAR REACTION that propels the ball when hit dead center.  Players came in with stories of 290 yard three irons – layups.

The UNITED SBC2 is not that kind of construction.

It is not hollow.  It is a FORGED BODY with a “Maraging steel” face.

“Maraging” is one of those MYSTERY WORDS.  Maraging steel faces were what made Adams and Orlimar hot back in the 90′s.  The goal is to put less spin on the ball.  The underlying concept is a clean, consistent hitting surface.

The plague for many players is “too much spin” – low index and high index alike.  Today, players look for “boring ball flight”.

Too much spin “rides the wind” going that way and “climbs and drops dead” going the other way.  After all these years of pursuing “more spin” – the new Holy Grail is “less spin”.

The reason is simple:  DISTANCE CONTROL.  You’ve got to know when your ball is going to come down.

One more technical detail . . .

The unique part of the SBC2 construction is that it is a POCKET CAVITY design.  That allows the steel face to “free float” in the forged body.  The design concept behind that idea is “maximum forgiveness for off-center hits”.

Never been done before.

Here’s another angle on the pocket cavity.

SB3 Floating Face Sole

SB3 Floating Face Topline

Testing Results

I’ve built and tested two sets of SBC2′s.  The first one was set up with OZIK 80 gram Program shafts that are stock with Adams irons.  I wanted to see how the OEM shaft compared to the aftermarket version.

We built the second set with Matrix Kujoh shafts.

In two rounds, I’d put the UNITED SBC2′s neck and neck for performance with my current favorite – the Vega VC-03.  The big difference is head size.  The SBC2 will be a welcome alternative for the players who just can’t stand the large head size on the VC-03.

I love the ball flight.  It is easy to see less spin – even with high spin shafts.  I had a very good ball-striking day with the OZIKs – less spin into the wind an obvious advantage that day.  I hit some beautiful little soft draws and then made a five iron go right to left.  I found I could work the ball.

I think that the SBC2 head could become the STANDARD for low spin – NON-NUCLEAR REACTION – iron heads.

The Challenge

I have the last six sets of SBC2 heads in the WESTERN WORLD.  The rest of the world is sold out.  (KOREA bought everything.)

I’m including the SBC2 in our HIGH PERFORMANCE DEMO program.

A natural follow-up – after a fitting – is to test a couple of sets on your own course for feel and ball flight.  No more “I wonder . . .”

I have them for testing – right now.  If you were thinking about new irons – the UNITED SBC2 is a NEW IRON.

You should at least give it a test.

New Mizuno Fitting System in House

All of the new Mizuno designs for 2013 arrived this week – heads for the Mizuno fitting system.  We rely on the Mizuno system for fitting iron shafts and heads.

In addition to all of the Mizuno custom shafts, we have all of our favorites set up for radar testing with the Flightscope launch monitor.

Complete Iron Fitting:  $150.

Give a call.  We have plenty of openings this week.  With the season drawing to a close – the season for playing with new golf clubs is starting.

Posted in Golf Equipment Chronicles | Leave a comment

Bobby Dean Private Putter & Wedge Fittings – Edel Golf

Pleasanton Wedge Fitting and Short Game Clinic with Eric Jones

Morning at the Muni and the 14 Fairways Challenge at the Bridges

Our goal is to bring the highest level of golf knowledge, talent and experience to Golf Lab Clients.

Take your game to YOUR NEXT LEVEL as quickly and efficiently as possible.

The Golf Lab is good for BOGEY GOLFERS and Serious Beginners. We’re “high handicap friendly”.

I cancelled my plans to attend the LAS VEGAS PGA Show to create an intricate schedule for Bobby Dean from Edel Golf – Thursday, Friday and Saturday this week. Edel is at the Show so Bobby will have the latest news.

This will be a VERY PRODUCTIVE WEEK if you have time to invest in your golf game. There is plenty of hands-on testing and practice.

Our goal is to create extraordinary experiences for Golf Lab clients. TOTAL PUTTING ENLIGHTENMENT starts with Bobby Dean.

Bobby’s eyes see different things with a putter. If you are ever planning to have a putter fitting - IN THE REST OF YOUR LIFE - schedule it for this week. Bobby is that good.

Why is Bobby Dean that good?

Bobby has been the principal fitter – and General Manager – at Edel Golf for six years. During that time, he fitted an average of 350 putters per year. Over two thousand custom putter fittings. A quarter of Edel’s total business. There is no one in the world who knows more about fitting and building custom putters than Bobby Dean – and that includes Scotty Cameron.

Bobby goes way beyond the routine fitting parameters of aim, loft, lie and length. Bobby can see tempo and timing in a putting stroke. He can see the shaft flex. He knows how to influence the stroke with Tour Lock counterweights in the shaft.

Bobby hangs out with the Tour Players who live in Austin so he’s got lots of good stories. He is the best we know.

If you have been fitted for a custom Edel putter before – by any Edel fitter – it is a great insurance policy to let Bobby have a look at what’s going on with your stroke and putter RIGHT NOW.

Putting strokes don’t last forever but Edel putters do. It might be time for a little re-work – both your stroke and your putter.

If Edel Golf is new to you, click on this link http://www.edelgolf.com/

Edel is the STATE OF THE ART when it comes to fitting and then building a custom putter – including AIM, LOFT, LIE, WEIGHT, BALANCE, SHAFT TYPE, FLEX and BALANCE – to fit your stroke.

When Phil Michelson comes to town, he has six putters in his bag – each with a slightly different balance, loft and lie. He chooses the “right one” based on that week’s conditions. How many putters do you have in your bag?

You only need one Edel Putter.

Detailed Schedule – Week of August 20-27.

All sessions “Open” – Size Limited – Reservations Required

Thursday August 23 – 8-9 AM – Yogurt and Nut Breakfast and Get Acquainted Session. My favorite time to get to a meeting is before it starts. Get there early. That’s when “things happen”.

Thursday 9-10 AM – Bobby Dean SPEECH and CONVERSATION with Golf Lab Staff – and FRIENDS - in the Golf Lab Meeting Room. Comfortable, sit-down presentation environment.

One of our principal goals is STAFF TRAINING and DEEP PRODUCT KNOWLEDGE. Edel is a “new kind of company” – one that requires a high level of local technical support – Edel fitting systems for putters and wedges must be learned, refined and practiced.

Bobby Dean is focused on his goal to make sure that the few custom golf shops representing Edel are supremely qualified to SUPPORT THE BRAND in a region. The Golf Lab is proud to share that responsibility with Laird Small at Pebble Beach.

Our joint goal with Edel is to recruit and support a network of teaching professionals in the Bay Area who want access to the highest level of putter and wedge fitting in the world.

Golf Lab customers with a sincere interest in Edel Golf – own an Edel Putter or wedge – or thinking of ordering one of the 100 sets of Edel irons that will be available this year – are welcome to join Bobby and the Golf Lab Staff for the Morning Program.

Thursday 10-11 AM – Bobby Dean Fits Leith Anderson with an Edel Putter.In public forum – proceeds filmed by John Taylor.

There’s a great twist to add some fun to this session. Leith owns and plays an Edel putter that was fitted by David Balbi. Bobby does not know the specifications of that putter. Leith’s putter has been confiscated by John Ruark and is in a “safe place”.

The essence of any fitting system is that the results are “repeatable”.

We would never expect two putter fittings to be exactly the same. With 250 million variables, that would be a tall order. But how much difference should one expect? Inquiring minds want to know . . .

What will Bobby recommend for Leith? At the end of the fitting session, when all of the new specifications are written down and Leith is holding the test putter Bobby built for him from the Edel Fitting System – we’ll bring out the “original Edel fitted putter”. Will it match?

You might think that would be a scary result. What if that $900 Edel putter is not the best fit?

Would you rather NOT KNOW?

Book the MORNING SESSION and you’ll be there at the Moment of Truth.

The point is that even Edel Putter owners should spend a little time getting a “checkup” – especially when Bobby Dean is in the neighborhood.

If your putter needs adjustment – Edel is equipped to handle any modification and return your Edel putter better than new.

Eight spots – call Bob Pegram – 650-654-1770. It will be the most interesting next Thursday morning of your life.

Thursday 11-11:30 – Break – Time for “Private Conversations.”

“Button-hole time” is valuable. Bobby Dean is available for brief conversations.

Thursday 11:30 – 12:30 – Buffet Lunch

No need to leave the Golf Lab to eat.

Group lunch, group discussion.

The complete morning program – including lunch – $250 – limit eight players to assure high quality experience. Golf Lab Members = 2 session units.

Thursday Afternoon 12:30 – 6:00. Private Edel Putter Fittings – Bobby Dean working with John Ruark, Leith Anderson, Bob Pegram and John Taylor.

If you book your Edel Putter Fitting for Thursday afternoon – you’re going to have the biggest brain trust in the history of putter fitting working for you.

One of the most interesting dynamics in the putter world is watching the debate about LONG PUTTERS. John Ruark is one of the most accomplished of the “long putter fitters” – a completely different product from what Edel has been all about – until now.

Edel is introducing a LONG PUTTER.

If you are struggling with a conventional putting stroke – you might consider an alternative. We’ll be ready for that.

One Hour Fitting Session with Bobby Dean - and helpers – you get all the time you need with Bobby. On Thursday your Edel Putter Fitting is $150 - the cost of the fitting is waived if you buy an Edel Putter.

We would like to reward Bobby for his dedication to helping raise the level of awareness of Edel and success at the Golf Lab with a pocket full of orders to take back to Texas. Free Edel Putter Fitting with Bobby Dean. You can’t do better than that.

Bottom Line BEST DEAL:

If you want to spend a full day understanding the Edel Putting Story – seeing “all there is” with an Edel fitting – and then enjoying private time with Bobby Dean to design your own Edel putter – Thursday is the day. Book the “Morning Program” for $250. Reserve a private fitting time for the afternoon.

Total cost for the day and the Edel Putter: $250 for the Morning Program – $395 – $950 for your Edel Putter – depending on custom features.

You are not obligated to buy an Edel Putter. $400 covers the Morning Program and the Putter Fitting. (Things you learn about your stroke and putters in an Edel Putter fitting are transferrable to other putters. It is one of David Edel’sPET PEEVES that Tour Pros take his fitting specifications to their SPONSORS TO COPY.

You get everything we learn, nothing held back. If you want to buy a Scotty – we’ll help you buy the best Scotty to fit your stroke.

Friday Morning 9:00 – 12:00 – Edel Wedge Fitting – Mariner’s Point

If you want to fit wedges – you’ve got to go outdoors.

We’ve extolled the virtues of Mariner’s Point as a short game training facility for several months.

Fitting wedges is – like all club fitting – part art and part science. The science part is knowing what you’re playing. That’s a problem. There’s no good, universal way to measure and understand “bounce” and “sole grind” on a wedge.

Edel takes care of that. The Edel wedge line is modeled after an IDEA that Mike Adams invented as he became one of the most renowned short game coaches in the world. PROGRESSIVE BOUNCE.

Matching wedges to your swing – especially if you have an aggressive angle of attack – will improve your wedge game immediately.

We have a limited number of wedge fitting sessions between 9-12 on Friday morning. Call Bob Pegram for current openings. 650-654-1770.

We want to send Bobby home with a pocket full of orders. If you place your custom Edel wedge order with Bobby – the fitting is free. Custom Edel wedges are $200-$250.

Friday Afternoon 1-5 PM. Still Open

We’re keeping Friday afternoon schedule open depending on demand. Wedge fittings could be expanded at Mariner’s Point or we can return to the Golf Lab for continued putter fittings.

Friday Evening – TGIF reception with Bobby Dean – 5-7 PM. Do not miss your chance to meet one of the most brilliant personalities in the golf industry. Bring a bottle of wine or a sixpack of your favorite brew. This is for the guys and gals who can’t get off during the day. (Hi, Heather.)

Saturday Morning 9-1 PM – Pleasanton Golf Center – with Eric Jones’ Targetcenteredgolf.com. Open Clinic 10-12 – Wedge Fitting and Wedge Playing Clinic – with Bobby Dean and Eric Jones. $30.

This could be one of the best values in golf instruction. The Clinic is from 10-12 – an interactive conversation between Bobby Dean – showing and fitting Edel Wedges with Eric Jones – and then Eric discussing the wedge game for tournament players with Bobby. This will be a unique, unpredictable and totally interesting presentation.

We’re limiting this clinic to eight players (from the Golf Lab) so everyone can have a front row seat. This is a great introduction to Eric’s Coaching Program.

To make your morning even more productive, book an Edel Wedge fitting with Bobby at 9:00 or at 1:00. Get your outdoor wedge fitting and seminar and hit all the balls you can in the next hour for $150. First come, first served. Hard stop on this: only eight spots available.

Saturday Afternoon: Say “Good-Bye to Bobby” at the Golf Lab. We’re leaving a few hours open to accommodate last minute requirements. Saturday afternoon is one such time.

Bobby heads back to Texas on Saturday evening.

If you have any questions or would like to discuss setting up a special event – call Bob Pegram at 650-654-1770.

Other Events This Week:

On Wednesday morning we have one more spot for the “Morning at the Muni”. That makes Bob Pegram very sad. If only one guy shows up – I play. If two guys show up – both Bob and I play. We ride carts and swap partners after five holes so everyone gets acquainted. What are you doing on Wednesday morning? The very best deal in golf is a “morning at the Muni” with me. It’s free.

On Sunday, I’m going back to Pleasanton with Eric and a bag full of test clubs from UNITED.

Here’s a SNEAK PEAK buried at the end of a long email. In the next couple of weeks, I’m going to start telling the UNITED GOLF story in detail. You know how that goes: who are the guys, why do they deserve to be successful and all that. . .

I received a test set of the new UNITED model – the SBC2 last week – shafted them up with some Adams OZIK shafts and took them to Pleasanton last week.

I’m not sure what I was seeing but it felt like Peter Lord (United designer) described as “shooting bullets”.

The model is unique as far as I know. The body is forged. The face is “maraging steel” and the design is “pocket cavity”. I think that this design will be the Cat’s Meow for the players who really wanted to follow the herd with the VC-03′s but in the end just couldn’t stand the size and the offset.

This is an early warning. If you’re looking for a breakthrough product in irons – this is the most likely possibility that I’ve seen in a long time.

I’ll have them at Pleasanton on Sunday morning. If you’re serious about getting better at golf – Eric Jones’ Target Centered Golf Program at the Pleasanton Golf Center is a great start. Go to www.targetcenteredgolf.com.

On Sunday afternoon we’re heading over to the Bridges. This is the “free pass” weekend – the greens will have week old scars but you get a free replay with your round.

I’m going to be there with my 15* – 43.5″ driver. I promise to report how deep I get into the round before I lose a ball. Last time it was three balls gone on the second tee so you can see the exact location of the first hurdle.

I think that The Bridges is so diabolical as a golf course – I’m IMAGINING A TOURNAMENT – later on this fall. Can you finish The Bridges? We’ll get a good prize package together and see who shows up with ATTITUDE. How far can you get with one ball at The Bridges? That’s the FOURTEEN FAIRWAYS Challenge.

How’s that for a cool week? Get better at golf RIGHT NOW.

Posted in Fitting Services | Leave a comment

Taylor Made Driver Loft Follow Up – La Jolla Drivers and Outdoor Fitting

Fresh Air, Taylor Made Drivers and Convenient Scheduling

 Planning Your “Performance Program” with the Golf Lab

I struck a chord with my last article on “The Driver that Could Change Your Game”.

You might not know that you’re playing a high loft driver – but you probably are.  Our average difference in measured loft – compared with the number stamped on the sole plate is 2.5* on Taylor Made Drivers.  If your driver says 9.5* on the bottom it is probably a 12*.

We found a Taylor Made Super Tri 11.5* driver last week that measured 17*.

That should make a difference in your thinking about your driver swing.  The problem is that even 12* is probably too low a loft for the average amateur.  I’m only saying that because Tiger Woods is playing 11.25* with his driver.

Don’t Forget Face Angle

The current “style” in drivers is to prefer an open face angle.  That’s what the PROS LIKE.

Open face angles on drivers are DEATH to players who “fight the rights”.  The real danger in the HIGH LOFT CONSPIRACY is not high loft.  It is open face angles.  We have seen Taylor Made drivers with 4* and 5* open face angles.  That’s Vijay Singh country.

If you’re “losing it right” even when you make a good swing – an excessively open face angle is probably the culprit.

How do you fit a driver if you don’t know the true loft and face angle of the driver you’re fitting?  Since there could be several degrees variance – either way – matching driver head measurements to player swing characteristics requires precision.

Do you know your driver loft and face angle?

Drop in to the Golf Lab at 1100 Industrial, Unit 10, San Carlos, CA during business hours 9-5 and Bob Pegram will give you a free driver measurement.  Might as well start with knowing the facts.  We’re one minute off 101 going south.  Exit at Brittan and left on Industrial.

Bottom Line Recommendation:

Most golfers would shoot lower scores immediately if they chose a 14* driver at 43.5″ length.

If that sounds like a preposterous claim to you – schedule a driver fitting at the Golf Lab.

If our recommended combination of driver head and shaft does not beat your current driver – measured by shot dispersion and improved launch ballistics – the fitting is free.

No risk in that.

From a Distance:  It is not necessary to do a COMPLETE FITTING for a 14* or 15* driver.  Think of your new club as a 3 wood with a very big head that you hit off a tee.  If you’re picking a shaft – I recommend stiffer and heavier rather than lighter and more flexible.

The goal is to put a club in your hands that you don’t try to hit for crazy distance.  You hit the short, high loft driver into the fairway.  Then you hit your next shot onto the green.  Then you make the putt.  Birdie.  No lost balls.  Any questions?

The La Jolla driver was “top shelf” back in the day.  Five years ago, LaJolla drivers were $500 – with a cheap OEM shaft.  Today, we can match up that 14* or 15* head with a premium shaft for $200.  We found a “lost shipment” on the Internet.  This is a top quality driver head with very rare measurements.  You get a bargain.

This is not a clubfitting decision that requires two hours of sophisticated radar work.  Three woods are much less shaft-sensitive than drivers.  The shaft for a fairway metal should be a little heavier and a little stiffer than your driver.  We can make that match over email, by phone or in person in a few minutes.

LaJolla 14* or 15* driver – your choice – paired up with a premium Fujikura, Matrix or Aerotech Shaft – $200 – plus shipping.

It’s the best deal in golf because it will change your thinking about what you’re supposed to do off the tee.

Break the belief that “longer is better”.  Hitting your drive into the fairway is better – every hole.

How about “Fourteen Fairways” as your new goal?

The Great Bridges Challenge

There is no doubt; The Bridges in San Ramon is one of the most diabolical golf courses in Northern California.  I can’t count how many players have reported “I’m never going back there”.  Some lost a dozen balls.

I feel that way myself.  I’ve never finished a round at the Bridges with the same ball.  I hate that.  For me, good golf means “no penalty strokes”.

I hit the shot that went “over the cliff” – I can’t blame the golf course for that.  You get some of the most scenic shots in the Bay Area at The Bridges – and some of the most challenging.

I’m dedicating My Sundays for Golf.  My program is two hours at the Pleasanton Golf Center from 10-12 – then heading out to The Bridges for the Ultimate Test.

I’m looking forward to reporting the day that I finish a complete 18 hole round with the same ball at The Bridges.

I’ll be playing a 14* driver at The Bridges until I accomplish that goal.  No BIG DRIVERS until I finish a round with the same ball.  Swear on a stack of Bibles.

But not this Sunday.  They’re punching the greens at The Bridges this Sunday afternoon so anyone who wants to join the Golf Lab Gang on Sunday can meet up at the Palo Alto Muni – twilight rates start at 2:00 and that’s when the wind blows.  You can work on your “wind game” Sunday.

If you want to join the Sunday Morning Session at Pleasanton and then play golf on Sunday afternoon – give Bob Pegram a call at the Golf Lab – 650-654-1770.  He’ll set you up.

Next Sunday – Back at The Bridges.  They’re a little sensitive at The Bridges about punched greens.  But when you’re focused on finishing the round with the same ball, you can give a little slack for the greens.  Next Sunday, you get a REPLAY CARD for a second round – no charge.  That’s a good enough deal to risk your self-esteem on a golf course.  Schedule next Sunday and you’ve got two weeks covered.

Schedule “Tweaking”

Pleasanton on Fridays – Mariner’s Point Sessions Now “By Appointment”

If you have control of your weekly schedule to make time on Friday, Saturday and Sunday mornings from 10-12 – the best deal for improving your performance on the course is to join up with Eric Jones at the Seaver Golf Academy at the Pleasanton Golf Center Driving Range north of Bernal Road on Valley Ave.

Golf runs in Eric’s blood.  He named his Golf Academy after his grandfather, Charlie Seaver – a former California Amateur Champion described as “Legendary” when he died in 2004.  Here’s the link to that announcement by the USGA.

http://www.usga.org/news/2004/October/Legendary-Amateur-Charlie-Seaver-Dies/

Charlie was Tom Seaver’s father – the Hall of Fame Pitcher for the Mets.

The setting is fabulous.  The Seaver Academy “owns” the back end of the rage at Pleasanton.  It is spacious – plenty of grass and plenty of targets.  Downrange is set up with cones at measured distances for calibrating your bag.  It is a serious environment to work on your game.  It is private.

Eric charges a monthly fee for his “Coaching Program”.  Up to twelve sessions is $265 per month.  Up to six sessions (half month) is $165.  His fee includes coaching, instruction and all the balls you can hit.

As time goes on, we’ll bring our sophisticated Golf Lab fitting services to the outdoor environment.  For example:

“Gapping your Bag” – a vitally important job for any serious player can take weeks by hand and by eye.  It’s a simple one hour job for the Flightscope launch monitor.

“Shaft Fitting” – is another service that can’t be completed well indoors.  The nuance of shaft fitting requires seeing ball flight and swinging from a natural surface.  We have the only shaft fitting system in the world that really works – from Edel Golf.  The key is “quick change” – you need to hit a couple of shots – swap shafts – hit a couple more – swap back.

“Fairway Metals” – how can you choose the best performing fairway metal or utility until you it off of grass?  That goes for hybrids, irons and wedges too.

Mariner’s Point by Appointment

The “Wedge Fitting and Short Game” sessions at Mariner’s Point are another great way to improve your game.  Since Mariner’s Point is a short, 12-minute drive from the Golf Lab – we’re opening Edel Wedge fitting sessions to “any convenient time”.

I will meet you any time at Mariner’s Point with the Edel Wedge fitting bag.

New “Friends and Family” Program Session Pricing

One of our goals at the Golf Lab is to make top teaching talent, facilities, technology and equipment efficiently available for an accessible price.

Our “rack rate” is $150 per hour.

Our “Friends and Family” program is $100 per “session” – with a 10 session commitment.  We’re not clock-watchers.  If a normal session is 1.5 hours – it is recorded as a single session.

We like to think that’s the best value in advanced golf analysis, instruction and training on the planet.

With the range of Specialized Analysis and Instruction available at the Golf Lab and now with the “outdoor option” – it is a simple matter to work out a “Program” of five or ten sessions with specific performance goals.

Eric Jones – the Seaver Golf Academy – and the Pleasanton Golf Center – provides the ultimate serious training environment.

The First Step

Start with a personal fitting session with Leith Anderson – Golf Digest Top 100 Clubfitter.  We’ll analyze your bag, tweak what needs tweaking and get well-acquainted.  We’ll fit iron shafts and driver heads.  That’s a good way to spend the first two hours.  Then we can work out a program of five or ten hours – including Mariner’s Point, Pleasanton and on the course.

If you’re working on a program to get better at golf – the Golf Lab is a great partner.

Call Bob Pegram at 650-654-1770 and he’ll set you up.

Posted in Golf Equipment Chronicles | 2 Comments

Eric Jones Supervised Practice – with “Live Ammo” – to Improve Consistency

Edel Wedge Fittings (and Innovative Full Bag Practice) now Available - Weekends in Pleasanton

I was inspired last Sunday.  I visited Eric Jones at the Pleasanton Golf Center Driving Range on Valley Ave. That’s where he holds his supervised practice sessions on Friday, Saturday and Sunday mornings from 10-12.

John Ruark and I were there to demonstrate the Focus Band to Eric’s “Lab Rats” as he so fondly calls his students.

Eric is an Old Friend, Stanford Golfer, Assistant Coach, Tournament Player, World Long Drive Champion (2003), Husband, Seaver Golf Academy Founder, PGA Member, Father, Masters in Sports Psychology, Author, Internet Entrepreneur, Competitor and Teacher.

Long-time Golf Equipment Chronicles readers know Eric from eight years ago – when he was developing his theories and testing his ideas teaching every Thursday at the Golf Lab.  Eric is on the “cutting edge” of golf instruction – worldwide.

If you’re working on a more consistent golf game, there is no better way to combine intellectual and physical workouts than Eric’s “supervised practice”.  Eric’s ultimate goal to help his students learn how to play the GAME OF GOLF as quickly as possible.

Seaver Golf Academy at Pleasanton Golf Center and The Bridges

Eric’s Coaching Program at the Pleasanton Golf Center Driving Range is the best value in golf if hitting practice balls is part of your practice routine and you’re not in a club where practice balls are “free”.

Supervised practice is held at the back end of the Pleasanton Golf Center range on Valley Ave. at 10:00 AM on Friday, Saturday and Sunday mornings.  Eric is there, on the tee line – watching for the little things that make a difference.  This is not a makeover project.  It’s an insurance policy for players who know they’re pretty good but don’t want to fall into mistakes.  Get your work done by noon.

It is a private environment.  Back end of the range (Gate 12 on Valley Ave.).  Eric is there with a few of his clients.  People come and go.  There might be three, maybe thirteen.  There is no pressure.  You’re there to wrap some myelin on your nerves with repetitive motion.

Finding a place where you can hit a lot of balls to targets you can see from a natural grass surface is not that easy to find in the Bay Area.

I signed up for a one month program.  $256.   (Half month is available if you want a “taste”).  The 45 minute drive from San Carlos is a daunting hurdle but If I only trek to Pleasanton one day a week and hit 500 balls per session – 10 cents per ball =  $200 cost of balls – you get the idea.  I’ll meet you at the Pleasanton Golf Center starting next week.

I’m hoping Eric will be kind with his advice.

For the truly motivated:  12 sessions, 500 balls per session.  $600 in balls alone.  If you’re thinking about “deep practice” you get the idea.

The Setting

You’re facing west.  The sun is behind you in the morning.  You can see ball flight like an eagle sees a mouse.

The key to making time for training and practice is to make your practice as meaningful as possible.  An important aspect of practice is knowing how far you hit each club.  The Pleasanton Golf Center is flat with plenty of targets.

One of the services that we promised – just waiting for the right location – is “bag gapping” with the Flightscope.  Pleasanton is the perfect location to spend three productive hours one morning in the near future.  The first hour should be devoted to letting radar tell you how far you hit every club in your bag.

Spend your second hour in an Edel wedge fitting.  It is possible that your wedge is causing your short game problems.  Find out for sure.

Another hour can be spent Edel wedge against your own wedges down “wedge street”.   Do you know how far you hit every wedge in your bag?

Here’s a very interesting blog post by Eric on the importance of mapping every club in your bag for maximum, minimum and average distances.

http://targetcenteredgolf.com/newsletter-how-to-improve-your-golf-game-part-3-iron-distance-control/

Sunday is for Golf

If this all sounds interesting and you’d like to check it out THIS SUNDAY – I’ll be in Pleasanton from 10 until 12 Sunday morning.  I want to get my 500 wedge shots in but I’ll bring the Edel fitting system if anyone would like to schedule a fitting for Sunday morning.  Call Bob to schedule.  650-654-1770.

Last Sunday we picked up a couple of players – Mike Kelly and Heather Hughes and met up at the Palo Alto Muni.  Sunday afternoon is a great time for golf.  You can use your imagination – “Sunday afternoon at a Major” is always a great fantasy.  That’s the time of day drama happens.

Next Sunday we’ll head from Pleasanton up the road a couple of stops to The Bridges.  That will be an interesting test for anyone working on their game.  I have still never finished a round on that course with the same ball – a pet peeve – and now also a challenge.

If you want to join Heather, Mike and me – give Bob a call.

Posted in Fitting Services | Leave a comment

High Loft Wedges – the Shot You Don’t Have – Yet

Over the last few months we’ve brought a lot of good ideas to the Golf Lab Community about how to get better at golf. So many choices. The most common question is “what should I do first?”

Getting better at golf requires dedicating time to preparation, practice and playing. Keeping preparation and practice to a minimum means that you have more time for play. That’s good.

If you want to do ONE THING that will be the biggest “bang for the buck” this is it:

Fit your Wedges. Two Hours.

We’ve spent a lot of time at the Mariner’s Point short game practice area with some very good teachers and players over the last few months.

Many thanks to Bobby Dean and John Ruark for their contributions.

The acid test is the players.  I have relied on Kaz Hoffman, Lawrence Fu and Emily Childs when I needed a tournament player’s opinion.  Thanks to them for the final check.

How do you fit wedges?

Here’s the scenario:  I’m standing with John Childs – Coach for two State Champions – his daughters Emily and Carly.

We’re watching Emily and Carly working with Bobby Dean – the top wedge fitter from Edel Golf.

John Childs – Mini Tour Player years back said: “I bought a hundred wedges out of every used club barrel for twenty years. I never understood anything about fitting wedges. It was all pure guesswork.  Never really found a good one.”

We watched Bobby Dean hand over a progression of Edel wedges. Each with slightly more bounce and a slightly different sole grind. The progression was designed to go from “less bounce” to “more bounce”.

Fitting a wedge is all about the grass, the roots and the dirt.

Bobby wants to see a player disturb the grass – pull the roots – but leave the dirt alone.

In about half an hour, Bobby found the grind that matched each girl’s natural swing. They are “Diggers” and “Drivers”.

That means that wedges that fit had over 20* of bounce. To put that in perspective – it’s more than twice the bounce of other high loft wedges. Edel wedges are different.

After the fitting John said: “That’s the most amazing thing I ever saw. I never knew that you could fit a wedge.”

Why Fit Wedges?

There is a Goal. The Goal is to get more spin on the ball.

There is one best way to get more spin on the ball. FORGET THE GIMMICKS AND BALONEY THAT HAVE NOTHING TO DO WITH HOW THE PLAYER STRIKES THE BALL.

If you want more spin: YOU HAVE TO PUT MORE SPIN ON THE BALL WITH A STEEPER ANGLE OF ATTACK. You need to hit the ball first.

That is a lot easier to do with a high bounce wedge design.

Wedge Fitting Theory – Start Here:

Think about how you hit your high loft (58*-61*) lob wedge.

If you play your lob wedge like every good player I’ve seen, it’s a tricky move that requires a lot of skill.

Most high loft lob wedges are designed with very low bounce. Low bounce lob wedges require a long, flat bottom on your swing.

A long, flat bottom on your swing means you are sliding the club under the ball. That’s no way to increase spin. Why do you think they call it a LOB Wedge?

I did not find a single player who HIT THE BALL FIRST with the lob wedge. Rather, the club head was “disturbing the grass” from up to 3″ behind the ball.

There’s a better way.

The Shot You Don’t Have

Mariner’s Point has the best public access short game practice areas in the Bay Area. Only the exclusive private clubs are better.

There are some smooth green aprons at Mariner’s Point that extend forty yards down the fairway – closely mowed. A little like a Links course. Not quite Augusta – but with the attitude.

What shot do you play from forty yards, tight surface, when the pin is deep in the green? How about same setup – but with a “bare” lie?

When I handed Kaz, Lawrence and Emily their own 60*lob wedges for that shot from that surface – they handed them back. They begged for a 48* pitching wedge or a 52* gap wedge. Cowards.

That tells the story.

We didn’t even need to move to a position where the same shot needed to cary a bunker.  That would have been an impossible shot with the old wedges.

A Lob Wedge with low bounce is manageable from lies where there is a little daylight between the ball and the dirt. No daylight = no chance.

The Edel 21* Bounce Alternative

We focused on a 21* “Digger Grind” and a 22* Driver Grind. 21* is double the bounce of any other high loft wedge on the planet. Standard bounce on a lob wedge is 6*.

After a few months of experience with the new wedge line, Edel has found that a high percentage of fittings end up in Digger and Driver grinds.

The measured bounce angle is only part of the story. The Digger Grind includes a channel carved behind the leading edge that turns dirt upside down – that feature has been popular with classic “dual bounce” wedges.  Effective bounce of the Digger is 27*.

Your Lob Wedge shot is now different.

With a high bounce wedge, it is no longer necessary to slide the lob wedge flat across the grass for 3″ before you get to the ball. Look at the back of the ball – focus on a single dimple – hit down on the ball. Just like a normal wedge shot. YOU HIT THE BALL FIRST. Hitting the ball first increases spin – crucial for short wedge shots from tight lies.

Lawrence summed it up: “That’s a shot I don’t have with my lob wedge.”

Edel Wedge Fittings at Mariner’s Point

One of the unique features of the Golf Lab is that we make hands-on testing part of the fitting process.

Sometimes you need a little help to know just what to look for. That goes double for wedges.

A modern wedge swing is different from an iron swing or a driver swing.

A player’s weight must favor his left side. The modern wedge swing takeaway features a sharp wrist break. The strike is downward and the finish is low left.

We help you with setup and swing. Then we step through the fitting procedure – progressing from lower to higher bounce angles.

You will see results immediately.

The first thing you notice is that ball flight doesn’t look anything like you’re used to. The shot takes off with spin and holds its line. That’s not possible with a “scoopy” lob wedge swing.

Accuracy is better. We test “before and after” the fitting. No player has ever gotten worse.

The “Complete Edel Wedge Fitting”

We offer Edel wedge fittings every Friday morning at Mariner’s Point. Sessions are “one on one” John Ruark joins me on Friday mornings.

We have six spots for Friday wedge fittings. The very best option is to make the 9 or 10 AM appointments. The basic wedge fitting takes an hour. You are then welcome to stay and practice for another hour or so.

Private wedge fittings are available at any convenient time.  Please call Bob Pegram at the Golf Lab to schedule.  650-654-1770.  Evenings and weekends are open.

Another option is to simply check out a set of Edel wedges for a long weekend.  You can see for yourself in private.  Check with Bob for availabilty.

Collected Articles on Edel Golf

I’ve covered the Edel story for a year and a half. Mike Adams provided the inspiration and the model. Here’s are links to earlier articles about Edel.

Edel Wedge Pamphlet:

http://calgolflab.com/blog/the-new-golf-lab-for-2012-2/pamphlets/

Edel Wedge Bling – Fancy treatments that are available:

http://calgolflab.com/blog/2012/07/26/edel-wedge-bling/

Help Us Find the Guy – or Gal – Edel Wedge and Putter Fitting:

http://calgolflab.com/blog/2012/07/11/help-us-find-the-guy-or-gal-edel-wedge-and-putter-fitting

Golf Lab Open Week – Celebrities, Edel Wedge Fitting, History:

http://calgolflab.com/blog/2012/06/12/golf-lab-open-week-celebrities-edel-wedge-fitting-history

Bobby Dean – Edel Golf Visit – Day One Results:

http://calgolflab.com/blog/2012/06/08/bobby-dean-edel-golf-visit-day-one-results

Introducing Edel Golf – “Edel Week” at the Golf Lab:

http://calgolflab.com/blog/2012/06/04/introducing-edel-golf-edel-week-at-the-golf-lab

Edel Wedge Photo:

  Edel Wedges

Posted in Golf Equipment Chronicles | Leave a comment

Edel Wedge Bling

Edel wedges have 8 different amounts of bounce so you can get a wedge with exactly the right bounce to fit your technique. In addition to making your short game shots easier and more successful, Edel wedges are available with all sorts of fancy treatments limited only by your imagination. Some examples are shown below.

Our wedge fittings are usually on Friday mornings at Mariner’s Point. Call Bob at 650-654-1770 to sign up. Here is a link to to our wedge fitting and other pamphlets: http://calgolflab.com/blog/the-new-golf-lab-for-2012-2/pamphlets/

                        

More photos are here:  http://edelgolf.smugmug.com/Wedges/Edel-Golf/23924834_2PkQsj#!i=2056774758&k=5KvKnVK

Posted in Golf Equipment Chronicles | Leave a comment

The Secret Revealed: Why Taylor Made Drivers Perform Better

Bonus:  Why You Will Want a High Launch Driver

Executive Overview:  Although this article starts with an historical discussion of Taylor Made Drivers – it is actually about fitting drivers by matching loft and face angle of the driver head with a player’s ideal swing path and angle of attack.

The driver head is more important than the shaft.

That should get your attention.  My opinion is contrary to Conventional Wisdom.  But a mistake choosing correct driver head loft and face angle cannot be corrected with an expensive shaft.  This article explains why.  Taylor Made proves my argument with their fitting strategy.

A Tour Van fitting determines a player’s most efficient swing and matches driver specifications to that.  How do you find the correct loft and face angle to match your ideal swing?

Why Taylor Made Drivers Work Better

Taylor Made created a miracle with their Driver marketing over the last six years.

When all other golf equipment manufacturers gave up hope for new driver innovation – blaming USGA restrictions – Taylor Made invented the future with AWT – “adjustable weight technology”.  Taylor made introduced the concept of weight adjustability with the R5 (2005) – offering two removable weight ports.  It was a huge breakthrough to allow players to adjust swingweight – and change club balance – on their own.  The TM R5 was a breakthrough design.

The R5 led to the R7 Quad (2007).  The R7 took cutting edge technology from 2 weight ports to 4 weight ports at 380 cc’s.  The 4 weight ports promised to affect shot shape.  Add toe weight, eliminate “lefts”. Add heel weight, eliminate “rights”.  Another breakthrough.

The R7 was popular on the PGA Tour.  V.J. Sing made headlines when he chose a 10.5* loft R7 “TP”.  TM R7′s were very good.

Then Taylor Made increased the head size to 425 cc’s with four weight ports.  That was the R7 425 – still a Classic.  The R7 425 was a step forward in forgiveness due to size.

Finally – the Coup de Gras - the SuperQuad.  The Holy Grail in 2008 – four weight ports and 460 cc size for ultimate forgiveness.  The Super Quad was “Maxed Out”.  In keeping with Taylor Made practice – the SuperQuad came out in multiple versions – covering the landscape of price points – another example of Taylor Made attention to detail and dedication to smothering the competition.

All that only took three years.  2006-2008 might be one of the most prolific periods in driver design history – given that USGA limits on everything that sent everybody but Taylor Made into depression.  Taylor Made owes its success to its Chinese partners who mastered building titanium balloons that stand up to 100+ MPH swing speeds.

Then came the Taylor Made R9 (2009).  Taylor Made released a flood of designs that year – Standard, Tour Prefered, SuperTri and SuperDeep – enough to intimidate (and bury) their competitors and make sure you’ll never know exactly what is “best”  or even “what is what?”.  By the end of 2009, Taylor Made dominated the driver business.

The R9 Series of Taylor Made drivers sealed fate on another subject – “Interchangeability”. In a strange quirk of fate – when other companies were trying to increase their profits by clawing back the exotic, high performance shaft business – Taylor Made went “open source” on the adapters that connect Taylor Made drivers to interchangeable shafts.

Today, a single adapter fits any Taylor Made Driver from the R9 through the R11 and the soon-to-be-announced – R13.  As a result, Taylor Made drivers are the best way to test shafts.  You can try any shaft in your Taylor Made driver for the price of a $25 adapter.  You can do the “testing” yourself on the range or you can get a good partner – Flightscope radar – to tell you how the shaft performs with your swing – with a well-chosen head.

The entire Golf Lab library of over 200 shafts is available for on-course testing in your Taylor Made driver – or in ours.  The old days of “buy it to try it” are OVER.

(BTW:  We are now extending the Taylor Made shaft fitting system to fairway metals and hybrids.  The Golf Lab does not have a Taylor Made account.  With TM, we sell “recycled”.)

The “Perfect Storm” – 2011 – 2012 – Taylor Made Domination Continues

And then the most unexpected thing happened.  Taylor Made invented “white”.

Nobody knows how or why Taylor Made decided that the color white would be the “Next Big Thing”.  But the R11 (2011) and the R11S (2012) have been the dominant drivers on Tour for the last two years.

Did I forget RocketBalls?  Another breakthrough – this one based on naming conventions.  We love three letter acronyms – RBZ.  RBZ come in white.

The “technical breakthrough” in the latest TM versions has more to do with the adapter than the driver head itself.  Taylor Made (and aftermarket) adapters are now supplied with a more extreme “knee bend” in the adapter.

The most recent adapters now allow a 1.5* adjustment each way.  That’s huge for drivers.

**The Great “Measurement” Experiment – Fitting Discussion Starts Here

Obsessed by wanting to understand “why?” we bought a precision measurement gauge a while back.  We measure every driver before launch monitor testing.

We fit drivers in the simplest way possible at the Golf Lab – we turn driver fitting into a geometry problem.  We measure and add up the angles to match player’s most efficient swing.  Driver loft and face angle matter.  There’s no point wasting time with driver heads that don’t match a player’s ideal swing.

To make solid contact – measured by “Smash Factor” – a player must deliver the club on the most direct path possible.  Thanks to modern technology – radar launch monitors – clubfitters can monitor a player’s swing – swing path and angle of attack precisely.

Combined high speed video and biomechanical analysis – a player’s most efficient positions can be measured and mapped.

If you want a nice soft draw – the “perfect” swing path is 4* inside-out.  Face angle needs to be closed to swing path – but open to the target line – so 2* is “perfect”.  Those are very small angles – difficult to conceive and impossible to see.

Then we turn attention to launch angle.  That’s where things changed the most.  The new golf balls don’t spin.  Normal golfers who want maximum distance – from “high launch, low spin drivers” – must launch the ball at 16* or higher.  That’s a lot higher than anything that looks “normal”.  Most players don’t know what optimal trajectory looks like.

Launch angle comes from a combination of driver loft and angle of attack.  If you need 16* of launch angle, you can get that with 10.5* driver – if your angle of attack is plus 5.5*.  Alas, only the strongest, most athletic Long Drive Competitors can swing “up” at that angle.  Most amateurs hit “down” on their drives – many not aware that a driver swing is different from an iron swing.

Simple Arithmetic

2-3* upward angle of attack is a reasonable swing goal for most amateur golfers.  If your maximum distance requires 17* launch angle or higher – you’re going to need a 15* driver.

Unfortunately, most golfers still choose their drivers to match their personalities.

It wasn’t that long ago that most manufacturers didn’t bother to offer a driver head that was marked higher than 10.5* loft.  No point.  No self-respecting golfer would buy one.

That’s the world that Taylor Made understands.

Measuring Discrepancies

We picked up a trend measuring driver heads.  Taylor Made drivers all measure 2-3* higher loft than the number stamped on the sole plate.  11.5* on the sole plate can easily measure 15* on the gauge.  We have never measured a Taylor Made driver that was under marked loft.

The normal response from a player who gets their driver measured at the Golf Lab – our free service – is to deplore Taylor Made quality control.  “How could my 9.5* driver be 12*?”

Because Taylor Made planned it that way.  Taylor Made sells hundreds of millions of dollars in drivers every year.  In years past, it was no problem to deliver drivers within a degree of stated loft.  If Taylor Made wanted their drivers to be perfect for loft – they would be.

Taylor Made knows better.

The Taylor Made marketing department figured out golfer psychology long ago.  They know that no ordinary golfer will buy the driver that fits – left to his own methods.  Since most drivers are sold by self-service at Big Box stores – TM provides their own version of Steve Jobs’ “reality distortion field”.

If you own a Taylor Made driver with 11.5* on the sole plate – it will measure 13-15*.  That will probably be just about perfect – assuming the face angle matches your swing path.

There you have it.  If Taylor Made left their future for golfers to know what he should have – rather than what he wants – they would be in the doldrums with all the other driver companies.

Taylor Made would never admit that they think that their customers are too dumb to make their own decisions – but how else would you interpret the facts?

Taylor Made drivers work better because they are not what you think.  What better explanation could there be?

Taylor Made’s Reward?  They are the most successful golf equipment company on earth – measured by sales.  The results are in.

Have no fear.  Buy a Taylor Made R9 11.5 Super Tri.  It might be a very good 15* driver with a 2* closed face angle – once you get all of the settings measured.

It might be “perfect”.

Buy Your 15* Driver – no settings required

If you know your driver goes too low and you want to test the extremes – we have a great -high quality – low price alternative. We’ll customize it five ways and deliver it for $200.  What could be better?

It just so happens that we found some 15* driver heads from a manufacturer’s liquidation.  (We found them because we were looking.  High loft drivers are scarce.)  The manufacturer is LaJolla.  Golf Lab customers will remember LaJolla as a high quality supplier from five years ago.  LaJolla went broke when they lost their confidence – like dozens of other small companies that found they couldn’t compete against the Global Conglomerates.

This is what the driver head looks like.  It measures 14-15* and the face angle is square to 1* closed.  We measure them all.  These are from the “old days” when the number on the bottom was close to reality.

  Mr. Ti Crown  Mr. Ti Face

We can hand pick a driver head with the exact specifications that match your “swing geometry”.

Custom Build Your 15* Driver

The open questions are shaft length, shaft weight, shaft flex, grip and balance.

If you hit your 3 wood almost as far as your driver, you’re on the right track.  Most 3 woods are 15* loft.  The “Thriver” is simply an easy-to-hit driver-size head with 3 wood specifications.

Your 15* driver is not a long drive club.  For most players, 43.5″ will be a good length.  That’s just a hair longer than your 3 wood.  The deep face on the LaJolla driver allows you to tee it up and make a mighty wallop without fear of pop-ups and whiffs.  We add a little weight to the head to compensate for the shorter length.

The goal of a high loft driver is to get every drive into the fairway.  No misses. For most high handicap players – “no misses” with a driver means a 6 stroke improvement in score.

Your 15* driver is not a long drive club that you try to swing as fast as possible.  Shaft weight means little.  The best choice is a middle-of-the-road graphite shaft – 65 or 75 grams.

Your 15* driver is a “training club”.  You use it to get the best possible results from your swing.  There are two logical choices for shaft flex.  As stiff as possible or as flexible as possible.  Players who hit from the top and fight an outside-in swing path should go stiff as possible.  Stiff shafts resist “early release”.

Players who are working on tempo and timing should take the most flexible shafts available.  That’s the best way to “feel the club”.

Your final choice is grip size.  For a “training club” it’s a good idea to go larger with grip size.  The reason is that it’s hard to squeeze a large grip.  Bad swings frequently come from squeezing hard at the top and then “holding on”.

Lay the grip in your hands.  Grip strong enough to keep the club from flying loose – no more.  Then, keep your hands “under the shaft” at the top of your swing.  That’s the best natural antidote for “over the top”.

Call Bob at 650-654-1770 to reserve a fitting time with Leith.

High Loft LaJolla Drivers – set up to your custom specs – $200.

Thanks to the Internet – Golf Lab emails go all around the world.  For all Golf Lab customers who are outside of drive-in distance – we’ll make a “guaranteed” offer.  Get in touch by email and we’ll design a very interesting LaJolla custom driver.

We’ll build it and send it out anywhere in the USA for $200.  Outside the US, just add actual shipping charges.

If you end up not liking it – sell it to one of your friends for $250.

Stay Tuned Next Week for ”How Drivers Ruin Your Swing”.  Another Public Service Announcement from the Golf Lab.

Posted in Golf Equipment Chronicles | 1 Comment

Karnak the Clubfitter at the Golf Lab this Saturday 1-5

In the world of clubfitting there are only a few true “Artistes”.  One of those unique, creative personalities is “Karnak the Clubfitter”.  Some older Golf Lab customers will know Karnak is related to Karnak the Fortune Teller who used to be on the Johnny Carson Show.

Luckily, Karnak the Clubfitter is still around.

Karnak has been checking out the scene on the West Coast for the last couple of weeks.  He’ll be at the Golf Lab this Saturday from 1-5.  This is the next event on our “Golf Lab Celebrity Tour”.

There’s a “BIG TIME BUZZ” on THE STREET.  It’s all about maximizing distance with a driver.  There’s a new mantra:  HIGH LAUNCH, LOW SPIN.  Karnak always wanted to know ”How high is high?” and ”How low is low?”

The problem is nobody knows what HIGH LAUNCH AND LOW SPIN looks like.

If you don’t know what you’re looking for, how will you recognize it?

To find out, Karnak visited the KINGDOM at Taylor Made.  Not physically – but you know how spirits make their way into a room and just know what’s going on by creative imagination.  That’s how Karnak eavesdropped on the Taylor Made marketing department to understand their strategy.

Karnak wanted to know why Taylor made was CRUSHING THE COMPETITIONin drivers.

Was it the thousands of dollars in TEE MONEY that Taylor Made makes available to any PGA TOUR starter who will report his choice to the Darrell Survey?  That’s the cynical view.  Karnak is not cynical.  Karnak is looking for a reason.  A real reason.

What if Taylor Made Drivers just work better?  That would be good to know.

So Karnak studied Taylor Made drivers.  He just happens to have one of those PRECISION MEASURING GAUGES THAT CAME FROM THE CALLAWAY TOUR VAN.  Karnak measured a couple of dozen Taylor R9 and R11 drivers at the “Neutral” setting.  Most 9.5* drivers measured 11 to 12*.  Other lofts measured proportionally higher.  Karnak couldn’t find a single Taylor Made driver that measured “true to loft”.  (Karnak expected plus or minus 1* from the number stamped on the sole plate).  That never happened.   That low-grade research project lead to a reasonable conclusion.

Conclusion:  TAYLOR MADE DRIVERS WORK BETTER

Now, all you need to know is “why?”

Karnak will tell you why – and he will adjust your own Taylor Made (or any other adjustable driver) to fit your swing.  Just stop by the Golf Lab this Saturday afternoon – Karnak is keeping office hours between 1 and 5.

Private consultation with Karnak is available any time by appointment.  Bob Pegram can make the connection by mental telepathy or more conventional methods.  650-654-1770 – Karnak says put that number in your phone.

More Reasons to Come by the Golf Lab this Saturday

Saturday afternoons are “Walk-in Hours” and “community access”.  It’s nice to know that you can just stop by to chat.  We’ll take whatever question or small job in order of arrival.

Our meeting room and precision putting surface is available to golf community organizations and high school golf teams.  Check with Bob Pegram to schedule.

Here are some of the “quickies” that Karnak invites you to check this Saturday afternoon.

Check Grip Size.  Huge breakthrough combining Karnak’s intuition and the Flightscope radar launch monitor.  The radar touches your body more than 130,000 times a second.  It is programmed to discover POWER LEAKS.

Karnak sees you squeezing too tight.

He holds your hand, changes your grip and cuts the power leak.  Most grips are too small – “light like holding a bird” not “tight like holding a snake”.

Check Putter Aim.  Karnak knows one thing for sure about putting.  Good putters aim inside the hole.  Aiming inside the hole is not a sure thing.  Sadly, most golfers aim OUTSIDE THE HOLE and COMPENSATE with sub-conscious stroke adjustments.

Check Hybrid Shaft Weight and Flex.  Karnak is afraid that there is an epidemic in process.  Too many players are hooking their Hybrids into the trees.  That is because the shafts in most off the rack hybrids are noodles.  Karnak knows how to match hybrid shafts with iron shafts.

Come on out to the Golf Lab this Saturday afternoon.  Take care of your bag.

Posted in Fitting Services | Leave a comment

Take the Guesswork out of Driver Fitting – Maximize Distance with a “Neutral” Driver

This Article Will Change Your Ideas about Driver Fitting

“The Next Big Thing” – fitting drivers for Swing Path and Angle of Attack (AOA) – is not good for driver sales.  I only sold one driver last week.  But a bunch of Golf Lab customers straightened out their tee ball without buying a new driver.  They found that their drivers were just fine (after adjustment).  A simple swing change made the difference.

Why not do that?

Yesterday’s Happy Surprise

I’ve been a Todd Koss fan for years.  Todd is a golf guy who has spent thousands of hours studying ball spin while developing his OptimalFlight and OptimalClub programs – designed to model ball flight.  Until now, I found OptimalFlight a little too complicated.  For some mystical reason I updated my OF and OC versions yesterday and caught Todd’s attention.  We compared notes.  Egad!!  We’re working on the same idea.  Here’s how he describes his vision:

Current development is on a revolutionary product that completely breaks down the launch data into a swing recipe (clubface and path angles), enabling golfer to define and shape any shot.

Wow!!  Now I know this is a BIG IDEA.

Bottom Line:  If Todd and I are right, you’ll buy your next driver based on accurate measurements of loft and face angle that match your most efficient swing.  You’re going to “fit by the numbers”.

Demo days where you hit random drivers with unknown specifications – experimenting with any swing that works – are a waste of time.  If you order a driver from a Demo Day you have zero chance of matching the driver – and the settings – that you tested.

However, Demo Days are good physical exercise and a worthwhile social experiment.  You also get to know what color the Big Guys are selling this year.  I’m keeping everything positive.

The Concept of the “Neutral Driver”

The Neutral Driver matches a player’s most efficient swing – path, face angle and angle of attack – with square contact at the player’s most efficient impact position.

For most of us, that simplifies to “fewest moving parts”.

The Neutral Driver concept takes the guesswork out of driver fitting.  From swing analysis we know the exact loft and face angle of the driver that produces optimal launch angle and desired shot shape with your swing.

Why not do that?

Fitting Example:  Soft Draw

A player who wants to play a perfect soft draw needs a swing path 4* inside-out.  The perfect face angle is 2* open at impact.  By the laws of nature, those angles produce the perfect draw.

4 degrees inside out

Swing Path is 4 Degrees Inside to Outside

2 degrees open at impact

 Face Angle is 2 Degrees Open at Impact

Angle of Attack (AOA) is just as important as swing path and face angle at impact.  AOA is how much a player swings up – or down – on the ball.

For maximum distance with a driver, most players need to start the ball at 17* or higher.  That’s a lot higher than you’re used to seeing.

Launch angle is a combination of driver loft and Angle of Attack.  Assuming a True Driver Loft of 10* – a player needs a positive Angle of Attack of 7* to get to 17*.  That’s a problem.

No amateur can swing efficiently with that angle of attack.  Worse.  Most amateurs swing down on the ball.  That’s where high spin starts.

Typical Downward Angle of Attack

Typical Incorrect Downward Angle of Attack with Driver

If you want maximum distance your Angle of Attack must be UP.  Your launch angle must be HIGH.  There’s no way around that.

When you schedule your driver fitting at the Golf Lab, we analyze your swing and tell you if you can produce the results you want with the swing you have.

If not, we’ll suggest a simple swing change.  If that is not enough we’ll find a high loft driver that will work.

Proof? No problem.  Before and after launch monitor data supplemented with on-course testing.

My Personal Choice

Here’s where I ended up.  I chose a 10.5 Taylor Made R9 TP with a “true loft” of 13*.  The face angle is 2* closed.  (Notice the 2.5* discrepancy).

I’m practicing a 4* inside-out swing path.  I can manage a 3* positive angle of attack.

Leith's Launch Angle

Leith’s Launch Angle

My swing matches the specifications on the driver.  4* inside out with a 2* closed face angle puts the driver in perfect position at impact.  My upward AOA of 3* matched with driver loft of 13* gives an optimal launch angle of 16*.

The shaft matters.  Shaft fitting is another artistic science.  I’m assuming we’ve chosen a shaft that delivers the club square at impact.  See other articles about shaft fitting.

If you’ve got a bunch of drivers in your garage, treat yourself to a “measuring party”.  Figure out why some worked and some didn’t.  It will be an eye opener and uncover a lot of past mysteries.  We can do that in a Driver fitting.

NOTICE:  the measured loft on my driver is 2.5* different from what it says on the bottom.  In a world where 1* matters the first thing you should do is get your driver head measured for loft and face angle.  Your last chance to do that for free is this weekend at the Golf Lab.  After that, driver measurement service on our Tour Gauge is $10 per club.  Drop-ins are welcome Friday afternoon and Saturday.

Once you know your swing you can choose a driver that matches your swing – assuming that you can measure the driver you choose.

 

This Weekend at the Golf Lab

“Total Driver Optimization” includes all of the fitting tricks described above.

Your driver gets fitted in every dimension.  We make it work if possible.

Ultimate Driver Fitting and Optimization – $150.  1.5 hours.

Next Week:

The best way to start a fitting is with a “Morning at the Muni” – I have an opening next Wednesday.

Posted in Golf Equipment Chronicles | Leave a comment

Help Us Find the Guy – or Gal – Edel Wedge and Putter Fitting

If you’re following the Golf Lab Saga – one theme stands out.  Our professional staff is all “senior”.

We’re looking for “young blood” – and from our perspective that leaves quite a bit of room.

Here’s the reason:

We have established an important relationship with Edel Golf.  Edel Golf is unique in the world.

“Over the top attention to detail” – is the Edel mantra.  Edel is the world leader in custom putters – no other company even tries to compete.  The new wedge line has turned out to be revolutionary.

“Revolutionary” deserves explanation.  Edel provides eight sole grinds in a single loft.  That’s five more than the next best.  Edel sole grinds are progressive – STARTING AT 12* for their Sweeper and progressing to 27* EFFECTIVE BOUNCE in their Digger.

To put that into perspective, Edel wedges start where all other lines end – bounce wise.

If Edel theory about bounce is correct, most wedges are obsolete.  That would be “revolutionary”.

The Edel fitting system requires a player to employ a “modern wedge swing” that “activates the bounce”.  That’s not controversial.  On the range, a properly fitted wedge identifies itself with “no torn roots”.

The unique opportunity that Edel offers is THE ONLY FITTING SYSTEM FOR PUTTERS AND WEDGES.

As club fitters, we look at a bag of clubs in five categories:  Drivers, long range fairway clubs, irons, wedges and putters.  Edel clubs – putters and wedges – cover 60% of your shots.

No other company covers such a broad spectrum so well.

If Edel is a new name for you, spend some time perusing their website: www.edelgolf.com.

If the Edel Story strikes your fancy, we have openings at Mariner’s Point Friday morning for Edel wedges and Friday and Saturday afternoons with John Ruark for putter fittings. Call Bob for an appointment.  650-654-1770.

The New Edel Business Model

Edel is expanding.  The company is releasing a line of off the shelf putters later this year that will compete with Scotty Cameron. They have irons in development – based on their design theory for wedges – that irons should be fitted for bounce.

Edel is partnering with the Golf Lab to bring specialized professional fitting services to Bay Area clubs.  Edel hired an internal sales rep to work the phone and build relationships with Northern California clubs.  His compensation is based on scheduling fitting days.

The new strategy is recognition that the most expensive part of a custom fitting is the time it takes. Offering Edel custom fittings conveniently will be a welcome relief for players who don’t have time for travel.

The Golf Lab will perform Edel fittings in our Northern California Bay Area territory. We’re going to need some help.

The Ideal Candidates

There’s no getting around playing ability. Low single digit handicap is a requirement. Also, competitive playing experience. The main qualification is a deep interest getting better at golf. The ideal candidate will be thinking about making golf their life’s work. There are no age limitations.

This is not a full-time job – yet. Key times will be evenings and weekends. It is a perfect supplement interest and income for a serious golfer who wants to take their own game to the “next level” – by learning Golf Lab fitting methods.

Extensive experience is required.  The candidate will work alongside Leith Anderson and John Ruark – experiencing the depth of a Golf Lab fitting and receiving custom clubs, putter and wedges in the process.

If you know the person, or if you are the person, please get in touch with Bob Pegram to set up a personal interview. 650-654-1770.

Tim Cleary Case Study

Tim would be the first to tell you that he’s not a great golfer. He is dedicated to getting better.

Tim took an Edel putter fitting and a session – a putter fitting is free with a sale. Tim bought a new Edel putter that matched his correct putting stroke. John Ruark helped Tim understand his stroke. Teamwork. $375.

First Rule for Putting Improvement: Make sure you aim inside the hole and your form is correct. Never practice mistakes. That means your putter has to fit your stance and stroke for length, loft, lie, offset, head shape, top markings, shaft flex and grip type. Then, balance for tempo and feel.

How long would it take to figure all that out yourself?

If you’re driving in a race, would you choose a Model T or a Corvette?

Tim then came out for our Edel Wedge Fitting at Mariner’s Point. The fitting comes with a “model wedge swing”. Tim took that to heart as well. He bought one Edel 60* wedge for $200 that matched his new correct wedge swing. The wedge fitting was $75.

The net result? Ten strokes improvement in his game – from better wedge play and better putting. That was an immediate result – with just a few weeks of work.

Total cost? Add time and travel, quite a few buckets of practice balls and a few hours at the Mariner’s Point short game area. Figure an investment of $1000. Two custom clubs and a few hours of personal attention come with the deal.

If I could buy improvement for $100 per stroke, my only question would be “What’s the limit?”

The most efficient path to lower scores is to keep your driver out of the trees, short of the water and inside the white stakes. After that, get on the green from 50 yards in one try. Third most important: tap in second putt. That’s ten strokes for a 20 index.

Average Players Benefit More from Custom Fitting

If you keep track of improvement by counting strokes, you’re in luck if you’re a fifteen index or higher. That means that there is plenty of low hanging fruit – easy ways to cut strokes.

Scratch players work a whole season to shave one stroke.

Average players can improve by five strokes or more by simply eliminating clubs that don’t fit – together with developing an understanding of correct swing form. Miracles happen.

One of the unique features of the Golf Lab is that we break down a player’s talent, swing, practice time available and commitment to improve. We predict the number of strokes a player might improve, how long it will take, the probability of success and the cost. We help you develop a program and prioritize activities.

Who else does that?

Enjoying golf requires matching expectations with reality. No one ever gets better on two rounds of golf and two large buckets a month. When you plan to step up to the next level, the Golf Lab is your best partner in Northern California.

Special Offers this Week:

Totally open Wednesday morning for “Morning at the Muni. The very best way to start a fitting. No charge. Wheels up at 7:45. List closes at 5 PM tonight.

Friday “Edel Wedge Fitting at Mariner’s Point”. One hour sessions. Players can follow the fitting with an hour of practice – utilizing the Golf Lab fitting bag. $125. Two hours total time (with practice).

Friday and Saturday. “Combo Deal” with Leith Anderson and John Ruark. Driver Optimization and Fitting from Leith and “Introduction to the Science of Putting” by John Ruark. Two 1.5 hour sessions. $250 this weekend covers 3 hours for both sessions.

Saturday Sale: We’re starting up our Vintage Blades Internet Store. There are a few sets that won’t go along with us to the future. Rather than get nothing on eBay, we’re going for slightly more than nothing this weekend. So far, we’ve picked out six sets that will go on the block for $99 – the whole set. These are good sets – very good for a standby set for visitors.

We have a nice handful of Mizuno wedges – still in the shrinkwrap – that we’ll put out there like chum in the water for $75. They all have the new “Spinner” wedge shaft from True Temper. By Saturday, there will be more tempting bargains. Watch your email for details.

Re-Grip While You Wait. Also Saturday. Book an appointment. Bring your clubs. When you’re done, they will be too. Golf Pride Tour Wrap and Tour Velvet and Lamkin Crossline. Undersize, Regular, Midsize or Oversize. $9-$12.

Best Regards,

Leith Anderson and the Golf Lab Gang – JR, JT, DT, BP, JW and CS.

PS:  If you can add names to initials and recite them in person – you get a 10% discount on your next purchase or service.

Posted in Golf Equipment Chronicles | Leave a comment

Fitting Your Adjustable Driver – Get it right the first time

Adjustable drivers dominate the golf world.

Random testing of adjustable drivers is a waste of time.

This article describes a new, more precise method for fitting adjustable drivers.

Fitting for Angle of Attack and Swing Path

Last week Bill* came in to the Golf Lab for a Driver Fitting.  He brought a driver that he borrowed from a friend.  He hit the driver well and could buy it for a song but wondered if there was anything better.

Bill is 61 years old with a good swing – grooved as a kid playing all summer for several summers.  Then he took forty years off to build a career and raise a family.

He is “coming back to golf”.

Fitting for Loft:  Determine Your Angle of Attack

There is no mystery in driver fitting.  A player makes his swing and propels the ball at a certain speed, launch angle and spin rate.

There is no chance in the laws of nature.  At 61 and swinging driver at 95 MPH Bill can reach maximum ball speed of 142 MPH if he makes solid contact.  That gets him 235 yards at optimal 17* launch angle.  Very respectable.

Bill’s borrowed driver said 9.5* on the sole plate.  If the optimal launch angle is 17* and the driver loft is 9.5* there’s a gap of 7.5*.   A 9.5* driver does not get to 17* without help.

For Bill to help his 9.5* driver get to 17* he needs to hit up on the ball at a 7.5* angle.  In golf lingo, that’s a “positive angle of attack”.

The only players who come close to a 7* upward angle of attack are Professional Long Drive competitors.

Alas, most amateurs hit down on the ball with their driver.  Bill started the day with a level angle of attack.  He “just never thought about how to put the driver on the ball.

First step in a driver fitting is to measure the player’s own driver head for true loft and face angle.  I want a precise measurement.  One degree matters.

Bill’s 9.5* driver is actually 12*.  The face angle is 1* closed.  That’s probably your first surprise.  How could measured loft be so different from the number stamped on the sole plate?

Second step in the driver fitting:  Bill hits his driver with the Flightscope radar launch monitor looking on.  We need to know launch angle and angle of attack.  Not too bad.  He clobbered his drives 225 but with little control.

The 12* driver delivered a 14* launch angle.  Bill practiced a 2* positive angle of attack – a good players frequently make quick swing changes to achieve desired results.  But Bill was still 3* low on launch angle.  Could we get another 10 yards with a little more driver loft or continued adjustment of attack angle?

Alas, Bill was finished at 2* upward angle of attack.  It is unrealistic for an amateur to expect a positive angle of attack of more than 4*.  Bill helped all he could.

Why not a 15* driver?

Until now, most driver fitting has focused on shafts.  Finding the right shaft is important but adjustable drivers makes matching the driver head to a player’s swing just as important.

A week never goes by a player doesn’t say “I hit my 3 wood as far as my driver.  What’s with that?”

Now you know why.  The player who is above average with a 95 MPH swing speed needs a 17* launch angle for maximum distance.  He makes a free swing with his 3 wood from a tee with 15* of loft.  He catches the ball slightly ahead of center so his launch angle is 2* upward.  Perfect 17* launch angle.  The 3 wood matches driver distance.  And it looks better in the process.

Very few manufacturers make 15* drivers.  High loft drivers are very effective for seniors, women and juniors.  You can test one at the Golf Lab.

Fitting for Face Angle:  Determine Your Swing Path

The starting point is desired ball flight.

Several years ago the Stanford Women’s golf team had excellent players who were “strong for their size”.

They needed all the distance they could get.  They wanted soft draws with maximum run out.

They all developed nearly perfect 4* inside-out swing paths.

That’s a good starting point for a player who wants similar results.

Matching Driver Face Angle with Swing Path

The perfect driver face angle for the Stanford women was 2* closed.  Their goal was distance and they didn’t need fades.

By the “Nine Laws of Ball Flight” a draw occurs when the swing path is inside out and the face angle is closed to swing path but open to the target line.  A 4* inside-out swing path and 2* closed face angle produces a perfect draw.

The 2* closed face angle put the face angle in the correct position at impact without manipulating the club.  That’s the ultimate goal behind matching face angle to swing path.

If the Stanford women were stronger and needed fades to curl around doglegs, a square face angle would be more versatile.

Players who prefer a baby fade need an outside-in (“cut”) swing.  A 1* or 2* outside-in swing path is a good model.  That same 2* closed face angle risks a pull with an outside-in swing path.  It’s hard to hit a soft fade with a closed face driver.

Players who want to play a fade might find an open face angle driver to be just the ticket that allows them to straighten out their swing path – promoting less sidespin for straighter shots – and still get the fade from the open face angle.

And you always thought that open face drivers were for hookers.

Now you know why true loft and face angle are important fitting details.

How Do We Know True Loft and Face Angle?

We measure.

Here’s a picture of our precision loft and face angle measurement gauge.  It was once trusted on the Callaway Tour Van to give their staff players accurate readings.

Driver Gauge with Club

There is a video on www.Devotedgolfer.TV that shows the current loft and lie gauge in the Callaway Tour Van.  It is a precision digital instrument that cost a small fortune.  It shows how much Callaway cares about precision measurement.

In the Callaway Tour Van – and every other Tour Van – they measure the loft and face angle of every driver head.  No Tour Pro would waste his time hitting a driver that did not match his specifications.

The first step in driver fitting is to measure the loft and face angle of the driver you’re testing.  There are very few precision measurement gauges in Northern California.  If you stop by the Golf Lab we’ll measure your current driver no charge.  Be prepared for a surprise.

The Problem with Adjustable Drivers

I favor Taylor Made for custom fitting.  The universal adapter for all TM models is the reason.  Any shaft with a Taylor Made adapter fits any Taylor Made driver.  My personal favorite is the R9 – (2009).  I like the black color and the full adjustability.  Drivers that are three years old are just as “hot” as recent models.

TaylorMade R9

Players who own Taylor Made drivers have access to over 200 shafts for testing from the Golf Lab.

Don’t trust the loft number on the bottom of your R9.  The average Taylor Made R9 driver that we tested over the last several months is at least 2* off in measured loft.

9.5* drivers average 11*.  10.5* drivers average 13* and 11.5* drivers average 15*.

We found no drivers that measured less than stated loft.  Random testing of other brands suggests that all drivers measure higher than stated loft.

Depending on the model of driver you’re playing – there is a near certainty that the loft is at least 1* more than you think and could be 3* or 4* more degrees than marked.

That’s a risky reality if you’re trying to understand your swing.

Where Have We Seen This Before?

When Eli Callaway made his first deal to buy graphite shafts from Aldila – he demanded a change.

Aldila changed all “regular” shafts to “stiff”.  Eli was an astute marketer.  He knew players wouldn’t buy the best flex for psychological reasons so he changed the specifications.

Callaway’s signature method was copied by every other manufacturer.

The logical conclusion is that the Big Manufacturers know that players can’t be trusted to buy a driver that really fits.

Is that what Taylor Made is doing?  Were the final instructions on the mega-million piece driver order to “be sure to miss it high?”

Are All Drivers Mis-Labeled?

Most driver manufacturers are not bothered by 1* differences between stated loft and measured loft.  To be fair – 1* variance represents precision manufacturing.  Even 2* or 3* is not that far off considering that human hands touch each head as they are forged and welded.  A modern titanium driver head is a manufacturing miracle that took fifteen years to master.  But 2* or 3* variance can have a huge impact on how effectively you transfer energy to the ball.

The simple fix is to determine the optimal loft and face angle to match your swing and find a driver head that matches those specifications.  That’s our main goal in a driver fitting.

The only way to do that is to first measure your driver with a precision gauge.

The Biggest Danger:  Wide Open Face Angles

One finding in our limited sampling of Taylor Made drivers is that several measured extremely open.  4* and 5* open were surprisingly common face angles at some positions.  A driver with a 5* open face angle is going to be unhittable for all but the most highly skilled players.

If you would like to prove that to yourself, we can set up a wide open test driver during your fitting so you can know how hard it is to keep it on the planet.

Don’t waste time trying to figure out the specifications on your driver.  It’s simple to do.  Get it measured.

Next Steps:

I repeat our offer.  Come get your driver measured.  Then let the Flightscope radar have a look at your swing.  Combining form and equipment is the best way to reach your own level of Peak Performance.  Complete driver fitting (includes shaft fitting):  $150.

Best Regards,

Leith Anderson and the Golf Lab Gang

PS:  What happened with Bill*.  Bill is a composite of players and personalities that frequent the Golf Lab.  The real Bill who the story was based on ended up testing the 15* driver option.  The original Cobra 12* driver (with 9.5* stamped on the bottom) kept its place in the bag.

Posted in Unclassified | Leave a comment

Donate Your Brain to Science – Focus Band Clinics for Golf Lab Members Next Week Only

I was tempted to take a week off.  But I can’t get along without my “golf fix.”  Exciting news this week.

Henry Boulton and Focus Band Marathon

The Focus Band has “come of age”.  We bought into Henry Boulton’s vision over two years ago.  John Ruark pioneered Focus Band for the Golf Lab in Northern California – introducing dozens of players to performance training – acquiring a handful of “True Believers” in the process.

I joined Henry and John in Monterrey last Sunday.  We planned a few quiet hours to get acquainted with the next version of Focus Band software.

I arrived at 3 PM.  I was amazed at the progress Henry made with the software.  At 6 PM I booked a room at the Pine Needles Inn.  I talked with Henry and John until the wee hours and returned the next morning.  It’s been years since I stayed up half the night talking about anything.  It was that exciting.  The new version of Focus Band software is “understandable” for ordinary golfers.

I’ve known very good technologists.  Henry demonstrated surprising breadth of knowledge from swing theory to software development.  He is both the technique theorist and the programmer – a unique combination of skills and knowledge.  He has all the necessary experience and qualifications to invent a breakthrough product.  I predict he will be recognized as a star.  The Focus Band could be the most important new idea in golf.

The biggest breakthrough is that the Focus Band is now accessible to ordinary golfers.  Cutting edge thinking about “performance training” – developed by Eric Jones and Glen Albaugh – is that beginning players will progress much faster if they learn the concepts of Performance Training.

The Golf Lab “Donate your Brain to Science” Program introduces the concepts behind Performance Training.  All participants test the Focus Band with their own pre-performance routine.

New Version Overview

Forget the interlaced graphs from prior versions.  If you’ve worked with Focus Band, you know what I mean.  If not, you haven’t missed anything.

The new version of Focus Band software integrates video with your own friendly face.

You stand in front of the camera, you blink, your friendly face blinks.  (The technical term for your friendly face is your “Avatar”).

You clench your teeth, your friendly face shades pink indicating tension.

You talk and your Avatar’s left brain lobe turns red.  That shows you’re thinking – not what you want when you play a shot.

A brief training routine builds a player’s ability to focus on the target and prepare to “get in the zone”.  Focus on a single dimple on the ball  and your right brain lobe turns deep blue.  You’re in the “zone” and ready to trust your stroke.

Your Avatar looks alive.  With software, it’s comforting when the feedback is believable.  The new Focus Band software has no obvious flaws.

The breakthrough is the complete integration of video with the visual feedback.  A player can record and replay his entire pre-performance routine with real time feedback from the Avatar presented side by side on the screen.  The precise moment of an interruption in the players routine can be identified.

Your goal is to eliminate conscious thought from your pre-performance routine.  The Focus Band helps you to do that.

Introduction to Focus Band – Clinic and Workshop – Next Week Only

John Ruark is one of the most accomplished Focus Band practitioners – second only to Henry Boulton himself – on the face of the earth.

Our next major goal is to continue to work with Henry and his father – Graham – to expand the vision of their “Athlete Performance System” to the US.

The program starts with a 2.5 hour clinic that introduces the concepts behind performance training to a maximum of 3 players.  (It is very effective for three playing partners to book the same session.)

Proven concepts in visualization and focus are presented.

Every player tests his pre-performance routine with the Focus Band.

In Australia, the cost of the Clinic is $295 per player.  For the next two weeks, Golf Lab clients can book the “Focus Band Clinic” for just $100 per player.

Focus Band Clinics:

Friday, July 6 – 3-6 PM.

Saturday, July 7 – 9:30 – 12:30 PM.

Saturday, July 7 – 1-2:30 PM.

Saturday, July 7 – 3-6 PM.

Private Focus Band Workshops

My personal experience was enlightening.  I did a good job of getting into the zone in my pre-performance routine for putting.  Nice blue brain lobe right up until my eyes came back to the ball and I prepared to make my stroke.  Bright red!!

Egad!!

After a brief coaching period to introduce a specific procedure for focusing on the target but maintaining awareness of surroundings I was able to master the technique in less than an hour of practice.

My point is that this might not be difficult for you.  John Ruark has agreed to stay over tonight just in case some Golf Lab clients might want to book a last minute session on Saturday.  Just $100 for a private hour.  Two players can split the time.

How’s that for a little excitement for your weekend?

Regards,

Leith Anderson and the Golf Lab Gang – JR, Bob P, Clint, JT, Dian, Joel

Posted in Tour News | Leave a comment

The Focus Band Story

Athletes in all sports describe a phenomenon that accompanies exceptional performance. “I was in the Zone.”

How do you “get in the Zone?” How do you know if you are in The Zone?

The Mind Training story comes together with the Focus Band this week at the Golf Lab.

The New Science of Mind Training

The most important question to ask with any creation is “Who are the inventors?” and “What gives them the courage, experience and money to be successful?”

I first asked that question about Focus Band over two years ago and was rewarded with a dinner invitation at the Orlando PGA Show from Graham Boulton and his son, Henry.

Graham is an entrepreneur who automated most of the checkout stands in Australian supermarkets. He went public, got rich and retired to help young golf professionals reach their dreams.  That makes sense.

The Focus Band was invented to help a certain player. He was the fast horse who couldn’t win a race.  Most of the interest in Focus Band today is coming from professional golfers who know that winning tournaments today requires shooting very low scores.

Take a moment to read Henry’s resume:

http://calgolflab.com/blog/2012/06/21/henry-boulton-resume/

As you see from his resume, Henry is an experienced practitioner. He understands motion analysis. He is the distributor for the K-Vest in Australia.

Henry was at the Golf Lab last week working with Rod Pampling. Rod is one of the earliest Focus Band adopters and is happy to credit the Focus Band with a measure of his improvement this season. Rod made the cut in the US Open.

For a flavor of last weekend, here is a gallery of pictures of Henry Boulton, Rod Pampling and John Ruark.

  

Mapping Your Brain

The new science of “mind training for golf” is based on locating and measuring brain activity.  Locating and measuring brain activity reveals when a player is in the Zone.  That’s what the Focus Band does.

“Left brain activity” reveals conscious thoughts.  Conscious thoughts are dangerous for your golf swing.  Brains are slow.  The Focus Band allows a player to train himself to suppress conscious thought – Zen and Yoga experience can help.

“Right brain in-activity” is characterized by few brainwaves. The result is the player reaches a calm state – the state of mind known as “Mushin”.

This is not a new concept.  Greg Norman discussed Mushin forty years ago at the Masters? Here is a link to the story:

http://www.goldengolf.com/public/right/article_2.asp

In Norman’s day, the athlete was on his own to find Mushin.  Today, the Focus Band is a training device that allows a player to train himself to reach Mushin quickly and learn to “trust his swing”.

How Does the Focus Band Work?

The Focus Band is a lightweight electronic gizmo that a player wears while practicing. Any interruptions in the player’s pre-shot routine that cause a spike in left brain activity are identified and eliminated.

The Focus Band is adept in picking up small inconsistencies in a player’s pre-shot routine that cause loss of focus.

Here are a couple of shots of Rod Pampling practicing with his Focus Band at the Golf Lab.

      

Any Serious Golfer must pay attention to Mind Training.

This week at the Golf Lab, Henry Boulton collaborates with John Ruark to offer cutting edge mind training for putting and short game. Any Golf Lab customer who books a fitting can also test Henry’s new invention – Golf 3D.

“Golf 3 D” is a new invention that creates an image of a player’s swing from a couple of sensors.  Henry invented the concept as an alternative to today’s motion sensor device – the K Vest.  It is in the late development stage.

Golf Lab clients can book a two hour session with Henry and John.  The fee is – $250. Rod Pampling pays more.

I am hoping that Golf Lab clients will recognize the value in that offer.

Next Steps:  Free Introductory Session

If you’re interested but need more information – you can join us at the Golf Lab this afternoon or Saturday morning for an introductory session on Focus Band.

We’re conducting Staff Training on Focus Band this afternoon.  Any Golf Lab client who is interested but needs more information is welcome to join us in the Golf Lab meeting room for a session that will last two hours – from 4 until 6.

We’ll present another “Introduction to Focus Band” session on Saturday morning at 9.

All you have to do is call the Golf Lab. (650) 654-1770. Ask Bob Pegram to set you up. You’re done.

Best regards,

Leith Anderson and the Golf Lab Gang: JR, John Taylor, Bob Pegram, Dian and Joel.

Posted in Unclassified | Leave a comment

Henry Boulton Resume

FocusBand, Kinetic Swing & Titleist Performance Institute Golf Fitness Instructor

Profile

Henry has been working with 3D Technology for the last 6 years specializing with K-VEST 3D Wireless Systems. He combined his electronics engineering background with his passion for the game of golf to help people accelerate and improve their golf performance.

Mind Training Experience

2009 – Current Co-Developed FocusBand Mind Training System

2010 – Current Co-Developed FocusBand Mind Training instructor Level 1 Course

2010 – Worked with Australian under 19 Baseball team (r/up Word champs)

2010 – Current Working with 2 US PGA Tour Players & MLB Pitcher

3D Technology Experience

1994 – 2002 Electronics Engineer (Data Communications)

2002 – Current Manufactured Swing Governor Training Aid

2008 – Current Co-Developed 3D Trainer Technique, Physical, Mind & Clubfit System

2007 – Current Director of Kinetic Swing Certification (Asia-Pacific)

2007 – Kinetic Swing Certified (USA)

2006 – Current K-VEST Distributor (Asia Pacific – AUS, NZ, Japan, Korea, India China)

2006 – Director – Swinglab Golf Performance Centre

2007 – Current Certified over 30 PGA Teaching Professionals (Aus,NZ, Japan, Korea)

2007 – Current Worked with over 25 Tour Players (USPGA, USLPGA Australia, Japan, Korea)

2007 – Current Worked with over 950 Students using 3D Technology

2008 – Current Established Swinglab Emerald Lakes (July)

Golf Fitness Experience

2007 – Titleist Performance Golf Fitness Instructor Level 1 Certified

2008 – Australian-Korean Junior Golf Development Program

2008 – Developed 3D Physical Screening Technique

Sporting Achievements

1989 – Currently still holds a 3 Handicap

1994 – 1999 Queensland European Handball Team

2001 – 2003 Brisbane Golf Club Division 1 Pennant Player

SwingLab

M: 0401 146 135

E: henry@swinglab.com.au

w: www.swinglab.com.au

Posted in New Golf Lab 2012 | Leave a comment

Adams Golf Demo Week at the Golf Lab

 Adams Rep Jason Kanis Brings His Full Demo Bag to the Golf Lab

Every Adams Club Available for Performance Testing

New “PURCHASE INCENTIVES”

(You know what that means.)

The one Big Golf Company (BGC) that we built a relationship with was Adams Golf.  There are a lot of reasons to like Adams.

Adams combines originality with state of the art design and manufacturing.  The result is that Adams dominated fairway metals and hybrids on Tour and at the cash register for the last several years.  Adams makes good golf clubs.

One unexpected discovery from Adams R&D was the “crush zone” behind the face of fairway metals and hybrids.  Crush Zone Technology is a fancy term for building a clubhead that folds like an accordion.

Here is what it looks like:

The reason the crush zone delivers the Holy Grail of extra distance has little to do with the club itself – there is no “trampoline effect” that launches the ball.  Rather, the collapsing face allows the ball to compress an instant longer.  The ball bouncing back is what gives the distance.  Silly putty.

In the mad dash to patent everything under the sun, Adams managed to win patents for CRUSH ZONE TECHNOLOGY on both the top and bottom of the club.  (Nike and Taylor Made have “bottom only” crush zones.)

That single patent is credited with motivating Taylor Made to buy Adams Golf a few months ago for $70 million – a price deemed a bargain by most industry insiders – but welcome relief for Adams investors.  There is one inescapable conclusion:  Somebody thinks that if one is good, two must be better.

Adams “Crush Zone” fairways and hybrids

I’ve written about Adams fairways and utilities over the last two years – calling attention to exceptional performance.  I mentioned Emily Childs at Stanford’s seventh – hitting the green from the corner two tournament days in a row – over 250 yards out.  And John Dolan putting his 270 yard lay-up into the creek at Eagle Ridge.  For good players looking for extra distance, last year’s model Adams F11 with the titanium face, was The Cat’s Meow.

We’ve been waiting for this year’s models.  Waiting.  And waiting.

Adams new line has been sold out worldwide since the beginning of the season.  We received our first allocation two weeks ago – and not trusting the Internet buzz – called a couple of our best customers and likely prospects for a little “early opinion”.  Every tester kept the club we gave him.  That’s the ultimate sign of surprising performance.

We conducted launch monitor testing with every player.  Our most efficient method to rank head-to-head performance is to compare “smash factors”.  Smash factor measures and energy transferred from the club to the ball. Divide ball speed by clubhead speed.  The classic example of perfection is a 150 MPH ball speed from 100 MPH clubhead speed yields a smash factor of 1.5.

1.5 is the “theoretical maximum” smash factor – obtained only with drivers.  Utilities and hybrids normally deliver smash factors in the 1.35 to 1.39 range.  The Adams new A12 Super Hybrid – showed numbers ranging up to 1.45.  That was a surprising measurable performance difference.

There is no doubt.  If you are going to buy a new fairway metal or hybrid this year based on “performance” – as compared by smash factor – you will buy an Adams.

There’s still the question of best fit.  What is the correct shaft length, shaft weight, flex and balance to best match your swing?

We’ll find that out this Friday and Saturday at the Golf Lab.

Adams Golf Fitting Day at the Golf Lab

Jason Kanis – direct from Adams Golf – and his Adams fitting bag are at the Golf Lab on Friday and Saturday.  We’re booking fitting appointments.  We’ll be working with Jason in half hour time slots.

Adams Fairway and Hybrid Hours:  Friday – noon to five.  Saturday 10-3

At noon on Friday, Jason will make a formal presentation to the Golf Lab staff about the current Adams product line and future vision.  He’s just as interested in what the Taylor Made acquisition means as anyone else.  Any Golf Lab customers who would like to sit in on that presentation are welcome.  Please call Bob Pegram just in case this offer is more popular than we anticipate (650-654-1770).  (We expect 3-4 clients.)

Our goal is to stay focused on fairways and hybrids.  This program is tailored for players who want a quick answer.

You will hit your 3 metal and your hybrid to set a benchmark.  We will provide Adams test clubs to compare performance.  You’ll have standard launch monitor data plus our unique “radar view” of the club just prior to impact.  It’s a foolproof fitting method.

To accommodate as many players as possible, and make the testing as quick as possible, we’re planning to get the “fast track” test done in half an hour.  If you would rather take it a little slower and have a look at Adams irons and drivers – just tell Bob that you want a full hour (650-654-1770).  First call, first booked.

There is no charge for the fairway and hybrid fitting.  We’re assuming that incentives will motivate a purchase.  For players who would rather take the fitting procedure without the obligation of a purchase – no problem.  Standard fitting fees can be applied.

Adams “Special Deals” and Incentives this Week

Any Golf Lab client who comes in Friday or Saturday will receive a complimentary Tom Watson “Lessons of a Lifetime” CD.

There will be Adams hats for players who are proud to wear Adams.

Any fitting client will be entered into a raffle for a new Adams Super SS hybrid with the Mitsubishi Fubuki shaft.

Current promotions with Adams are all in effect:

If you happen to test well with the Adams Super SS hybrid and decide to buy one ($299) the second one is half price.

   

Another way to get your Super SS hybrid for free is to buy a set of CB 3 irons.

   

If you want a fairway metal for free, all you have to do is buy a new Adams driver.

      

Are you keeping track of this? Watch which walnut shell the pea goes under.

You won’t even miss a “deal”.

Heads up on the “rest of the week”.

If you’re thinking about a visit to the Golf Lab this weekend – and Adams is almost incentive enough – book your time right now and then watch your email tomorrow.

Henry Boulton – co-inventor of the Focus Band came to the US from Australia to work with Rod Pampling.  Henry returns to the Golf Lab on Thursday and will stay through Saturday.  If you want to work with cutting edge Tour technology with the inventor, read tomorrow’s email and book your times.

Best regards,

Leith Anderson and the Golf Lab Gang.  JR, Bob, JT, Dian, Clint, Joel.

Posted in Fitting Services | Leave a comment

Golf Lab Open Week – Celebrities, Edel Wedge Fitting, History

San Francisco is the Center of the Golf World this Week

We’re all likely to see a lot of television this week. You don’t have to be a couch potato. Watch the Open at the Golf Lab while you practice green reading, targeting and distance control on our precision putting surface. John Ruark and John Taylor can be engaged at short notice. Both are available on Friday and Saturday. Scheduling multiple sessions in a single day is efficient use of time. Bob Pegram is available for questions and scheduling at 650-654-1770.

We fulfilled our mission to provide extraordinary experiences for Golf Lab customers very well in the last few weeks. Our goal is to make getting better at golf fun and efficient as possible with the most expert, experienced staff supported with the latest electronics. Our thanks to Bobby Dean from Edel for the time he spent with Golf Lab customers and staff last week. People make the experience.

The Open is a magnet for everyone in the golf industry. There are quite a few key people coming to town this week. Here is a preview of what might happen.

Henry Boulton from Focus Band (Australia) drove up from L.A. with Jason Goldsmith from TruAim yesterday. They bunked last night with John Ruark in Marin.

There are two Focus Band users on Tour – Rod Pampling and Greg Chalmers. Australians. No coincidence. The Focus Band was invented in Australia and Rod Pampling has credited some of his recent improvement to an improved mental game – achieved with Focus Band training.

We will offer Focus Band training with Founder Henry Boulton and John Ruark next week. Once again, the top talent in the world will be present to deliver his message directly to Golf Lab clients. If you’ve been thinking about working on your mental game and would like to know more, let Bob schedule a conversation with John Ruark to answer any questions.

Link to the Focus Band website: http://www.focusband.com/

Link to a previous New Golf Lab blog on the Focus Band:http://calgolflab.com/blog/putting-club/focus-band-and-john-ruark/

True-Aim followers marvel at how a decal on the crown of their driver gives them more fairways hit. Jason Goldsmith is working closely with Sean Foley so he’s hoping for a chance to introduce Tru-Aim to a few more likely suspects at the Open. You can imagine how cool it would be if a certain player won the Open with a decal on his driver.

What the decals look like:

Link to TrueAim website: http://www.mytrueaim.com/

On the shaft side, we’ve been promised a visit from Ron Chalmers – currently the ACCRA Senior Consultant to the World. Ron has seen it all. He was President of Royal Precision when Rifle was on top and later so he knows all about ups and downs. I’m thinking a lunch or dinner for a group of customers who have a deeper than natural interest in shaft technology and the shaft business might be interesting. Get in touch with Bob Pegram if that sounds interesting.

Link to the ACCRA website: http://www.accragolf.com/

If you would like to schedule a private fitting for Tru-Aim by Jason Goldsmith, I’m sure that can be arranged. Please call Bob Pegram for any scheduling questions and to book time. He’s in town through Friday.

There’s a “Morning at the Muni” Wednesday this week – Scott Mosher is back from too much business in the spring. 7:30 meet, 7:45 wheels up. One spot open. Call Bob.

Friday morning is Edel Wedge fitting at Mariner’s Point. One on one. By appointment. $125. The fee includes staying for a second hour to practice with the fitting clubs. Very productive use of time.

Some sample Edel wedges:

We’ll keep the schedule updated on this blog post.

That’s the outline schedule for the week. Go here for updates:http://calgolflab.com/blog/dashboard/

Wedge Fitting and Edel Wedges . . .

Last week was inspirational. Bobby Dean came to town for four days. The visit started at 8 AM Wednesday with a six hour briefing on Edel history and future – very corporate.

We ended on Saturday night at 10 sharing Chinese dinner with clients. Very non-corporate.

In between, Bobby delivered non-stop fittings and answered questions from every direction. He promised a return visit for August so keep your appointment book open.

Our goal is fitting expertise for all Golf Lab staff members. Any fitting is an art form. Edel wedge fitting is a completely new method – a higher art form. We got 48 hours of hands-on attention from the best guy available. We’re ready to go.

There are two key principles behind the Edel Wedge system:

First, Edel believes that all golfers are imprinted with a unique swing DNA that results in their “natural” swing with a wedge. The correct fit for a wedge can be seen, heard and felt. Low bounce wedges dig for most players – the visual is “torn roots”. The goal to reduce resistance encountered from the ground. The clue is a “squeaky” divot – shaved grass – a little shiny – no plowed up turf. Large, deep divots are a sure sign that the bounce on your wedge doesn’t compliment your swing.

Second, Edel believes that players can be accurately fitted for wedges to match their natural swing DNA. The fitting tool is a set of eight fitting clubs precisely measured for progressive bounce angles. The fitting procedure is to test from low to high bounce. With each strike, the divot tells the story. A high percentage of Edel custom wedge fittings end up with one of the three most extreme bounce angles: Trapper, Driver and Digger. Effective bounce angles range up to 27*. If the Edel findings are true, most wedges are obsolete.

Until now, there is no system for fitting wedges that I know of.

The “Over the Top” Edel Fitting System

Edel offers up to eight different bounce angles and sole grinds for each loft. Eight completely different head designs. The differences are not just a touch of the wheel. The measured bounce progression is from 12 to 22*. That “doubles the bounce” from any commercial wedge available today.

The “Digger” model – with the extreme “ice cream scoop” double bounce groove delivers “effective bounce” of 27*. That should make you wonder “What’s with that?”

Add 17 shaft options from the factory – another dozen of our favorite lightweight shafts combined with fittings that don’t require tool on the range. For the first time, you can swap shafts back and forth – just twist off – and watch the difference in ball flight.

Shaft fitting is the most amazing part of the Edel system. Some shafts hold their line, some knuckle, some spin too much, some not enough. Some mornings, with more wind, shaft action is more pronounced. There is no other system that allows you to compare shaft performance for your swing once you’ve determined the best bounce angle and sole grind.

Photo of a portion of the Edel wedge fitting system:

As an added benefit – the shaft fitting can easily be extended to your other scoring clubs. The Edel fitting system includes a 52* gap wedge head that can be tested with full swing – insight that could influence short iron shaft choice.

After a week of hands-on experience, I’m a True Believer. There is simply no doubt that Edel wedges have a logical and effective fitting sequence. I think that the design is more versatile – and utilitarian. Changing the groove pattern enhances perception and alignment. It will be interesting to see what happens to wedge design from the big companies next year, based on Edel’s findings and results.

The Edel fitting system makes a lot more sense if you know where those grinds came from so let’s tell that story.

The Edel Wedge Story

It started with Mike Adams. Mike is a “Top 100 Teacher” with more of his apprentices recognized as “Top 100 Teachers” than any other guru. He works out of Boca Raton, Florida where he set records selling wedges and teaching his “wedge swing”.

For years, Mike was closely connected with Titleist where he had access to their “Tour Only” wedge heads. That was a little known secret. The Tour Players had a private line of forged heads. Within that line were several unique grinds. That source of wedge heads lead to the development of a fitting system based on matching a player’s angle of attack and shaft lean at impact to bounce. Mike’s fitting method broke new ground. Business was good.

Everything changed with the new USGA groove rules. Rather than develop a new set of conforming custom wedge heads for their Tour Players – Titleist made the choice to sell the remaining inventory to Mike. Now Titleist Tour players play the same wedges as consumers. That was good for golfers but bad for Mike. The inventory didn’t last long.

Mike needed a steady supply of wedges that matched the fitting method he developed. That’s called motivation and that’s why the Edel wedge line makes sense. It was “designed” by an experienced professional teacher and clubfitter with a deep specialization in wedges who knew exactly what he wanted. Combine Mike’s vision with David Edel’s practical knowledge of the ins and outs of golf club design and manufacture. It was a perfect marriage.

The fitting sequence starts with positioning the golfer so his “center” points ahead of his ball position. Weight left, abrupt wrist break and low left finish. The “wedge fitting swing” is a short, 50 to 60 yard shot.

The player starts with the “Sweeper” with 12* of bounce. The Sweeper “digs” for almost everyone. Testing proceeds club by club until just the right combination of bounce and sole grind produces the “magic” divot. You know it by feel, sound and sight. For most players, it is an “Aha moment”.

The Edel line has only been out for a few months and the sell through numbers are starting to be significant. A high percentage of players end up with one of the three maximum bounce grinds: The Trapper, the Driver and the Digger. The fact that most of the players fitted for Edel wedges end up choosing a bounce angle that is not available for sale anywhere in the world – except for Edel – should give you pause to ponder.

There are two options for fitting Edel wedges. The best by far is to join me for a private Edel wedge fitting at Mariner’s Point on Friday mornings. $125 covers an hour of private fitting. You are also free to stay for an extra hour of practice and testing at the beautiful Mariner’s Point short game area. Your wedge game will be better.

You can skip the outdoor fitting. We can find your correct bounce angle indoors. We then supply a set of test wedges matched to your swing for three days of testing on the course. $125. Full credit with purchase.

Refer a Friend – Custom Putting Analysis – Free – Saturday Only

John Ruark has a couple of hours open this Saturday. Here’s a great offer: “Refer a Friend” for a Complete Putting Analysis – putter adjustment – and pre-shot routine development.

This is our ultimate “puppy dog sell”. If your friend spends one hour with John Ruark – we’re betting that he or she will sign up for a series of five or ten sessions.

If not, he’ll at least go home saying nice things.

No obligation. You’re doing John a favor. He’s bored when he’s not working.

Best Regards,

Leith Anderson and the Golf Lab Gang, JR, JT, BP, DT, CS, JW.

Posted in Fitting Services, Golf Equipment Chronicles, Unclassified | Leave a comment

Bobby Dean – Edel Golf Visit – Day One Results

There are very few times that I will say:  “If you don’t do this, you are missing a great opportunity”.

If you don’t schedule an “Edel Putter Fitting” from Bobby Dean – you are missing a great opportunity.  And you get an Edel wedge fitting to go with it.  The best hour you will spend to improve your short game.  We have two sessions open on Friday afternoon and three on Saturday afternoon.  Let’s make Bobby’s trip a sell-out success.

Bobby spent fourteen hours at the Golf Lab on Thursday.  He was here at 7:30 when we opened the doors.  Tom and Heather finished the day with us at Izzy’s.  What a day.

From 8 until 12 Bobby talked about Edel Golf – history and future.  He explained putters, putter fitting, golf psychology and a little metaphysical truth. The Golf Lab Gang was in attendance as were two customers who took advantage of our “open door” policy.  Barbeque Joe Marasco and Dave Blanchard were anointed “Edel Golf True Believers”. No fooling.  If you want to hear the vendor briefing – same as Golf Lab staff – just show up when advised.

From there we went to our afternoon schedule.  Six customers had a chance to spend an hour with Bobby and John Ruark.  That’s enough time for Bobby to take a tour through your putting stroke.

Players who own Edel putters were “re-fitted”.  Bobby is an expert at balancing putters with weight down the shaft. He’s watching the effect that changing balance has on your stroke.  This is the highest art of putter fitting.

An hour with Bobby is way more than fitting.  The day was full of gems such as “If you’re going downhill do you stroke the ball on the heel or toe of the putter.  The whole world says the “toe”.  Book a time and you’ll understand why that – and many other ideas about putting – is wrong.  Bobby is one of the most experienced putter fitter in the world – and possibly the very best.

Key Points:

“You can’t bend loft on a putter”.

When you change the loft or lie angle of a putter by bending on a loft and lie “machine” – you change the balance and the way the sole of the putter touches the ground.

Taking a putter of the rack that doesn’t fit and thinking that you can “fix it” by jerking the loft and lie is wrong.  Altering the loft and lie after a putter is made changes the putter.  That’s why Edel changes loft by changing face plates.

They do not allow their putters to feel the pain of a bending bar.

You can’t change loft without changing lie and vice versa.

The fundamental differentiator with Edel is “variable lofts”.  An Edel “vari-loft” putter permits changing loft without changing any other specification.

Bottom Line:

If you care about your putting stroke and your putter – book an Edel fitting session on Friday or Saturday afternoon.

If you don’t think that you made the best investment in your golf game ever – we’ll waive the fee.

We know that you’re going to want to come back.

Regards,

Leith Anderson and the Golf Lab Gang – JR, JT, CS, DT, JW

Posted in Fitting Services | Leave a comment

Edel Week at the Golf Lab – Schedule and Availability

Improve your game and get inspired

Wednesday

8 AM – NoonStaff training with Bobby Dean at Golf Lab meeting room and putting surface.  Bobby Dean, Leith Anderson, Bob Pegram, John Ruark, John Taylor.  (The Bobby Dean presentation about Edel from 8-10 is open to any Golf Lab customers who would like to hear the “Edel Story”.  Door closes at 8.  No late arrivals.

Noon – 6 PM – Edel Putter Fittings and Golf Lab stroke analysis.  One hour sessions with Bobby Dean and Golf Lab – “Edel Apprentice Fitters”.  The first four hours are booked.  Two sessions still open at 5 and 6.  The fee is $150 and will be waived with a putter purchase.

What you Learn from an Edel Putter Fitting

Most putter fittings try to make sure the putter is the right length, the putter sits flat on the ground and the grip is OK.  Edel Putter fittings go way beyond that.

The fitting system accommodates weights, shaft flex and counterbalancing.  Your fitting specifies loft and provides the option to adjust both loft and weight to accommodate daily changes in green conditions.  Edel putters are the most adjustable in the world.

Bobby Dean has fitted thousands of putters over ten years.  I surely want him to look at my stroke and have another look at my Edel putter to make sure he thinks it’s still right.

Edel continues to innovate.  They have new weight options and a different sole shape.  Edel has followed the trend to belly and full length putters.  Putting strokes change over time.  A checkup is a reasonable precaution.

Thursday – 8 AM – Noon – Staff Training for Edel Wedge Fitting System

The new Edel wedge line is the first to come with a “fitting system”.  Edel provides eight bounce angles within a single loft.  Fitting a wedge to a player’s “angle of attack” started ten years ago when Scratch Golf introduced the concept of sole grinds and bounce angles to match a player’s swing to the entire golf industry.  Scratch was tiny at the time but started a trend that the entire industry adopted.

As usual, Edel takes the concept to the extreme.  Eight bounce angles per loft.  Cute names: Sweeper, Nipper, Pincher, Trapper, Driver, Digger.

The Edel Fitting Wedge Fitting System “Secret Sauce”.  There has to be something unique to make a statement.  Edel is the first company to provide a seamless and imperceptible system that allows a player to swap wedge shafts just like driver shafts for testing.  It works for drivers and it works better for wedges.  Our Edel wedge fitting system includes 20 swappable shafts.

If you’re thinking about “feel” in golf – wedge shafts are a great place to start.  Where is feel more important than your short game?

And you can see that our goal at the Golf Lab is to make sure that our staff has the training and experience to help players make serious choices – based on hands-on experience.

1 PM – 5 PM – Edel Putter Fitting at the Golf Lab

Edel Putter Fitting continues with Bobby Dean and Bob Pegram.

5 PM – ??  “Open Mike”

Bobby Dean and the Golf Lab Gang will sit down for an end of day “wrap-up”.   Just a group conversation – a brew, glass of wine, bite of cheese, conversation about golf.  Golf Lab customers are invited to join us in the Golf Lab meeting room.

Friday 8 AM – 12 PM – Customer Wedge Fitting at Mariner’s Point

This is a rare opportunity.  Spend an hour with Bobby Dean and the Golf Lab fitting team at the Mariner’s Point Short Game practice area.

We have two openings per hour.  If you want to stay for another hour or two to continue testing Edel wedges, you can.  Appointment required.  Call Bob Pegram.  (650) 654-1770.

Friday 1 PM – 4 PM – Edel Putter Fitting at the Golf Lab

Three appointments open.

Friday 4 PM – ??? – Champions Putter Fitting Session

One of our greatest accomplishments is to help junior players reach their dreams.  On Friday, some of the best players will come together at the golf lab for a special session with Bobby Dean and the entire Golf Lab support staff.

We have one spot open.  If you know a junior player who has big dreams get in touch with Bob to see if an invitation to this very special session would help the player.

Saturday 9 AM – 12 PM – Champions Edel Wedge Fitting – Mariner’s Point

We’ll be at Mariner’s Point with our best young players to fit Edel wedges.  We have an opening for one more junior player with big dreams.

Saturday 1 PM – 5 PM – Edel Putter Fitting at Golf Lab

One of the best things you can do is combine an Edel putter fitting with a second Golf Lab service.

If you come in on Saturday, you can get a great combination deal.  Take the Edel Putter fitting and a “Driver Optimization and Accurizer Fitting” – Two hours of experience.  $200 for both.

Saturday 5 PM – ???

We’ll have our feet up, winding down, looking for a nice spot for dinner.  Want to join us?

That’s what you call a “Visit”.

Best Regards,

Leith Anderson and the Golf Lab Gang.

Posted in Fitting Services | Leave a comment

Introducing Edel Golf – “Edel Week” at the Golf Lab

There are some American companies that deserve recognition for what they’ve accomplished. There are very few outstanding American Stories in the golf industry.

David Edel is a man who took his vision to the extreme. He aimed to create the most efficient “PUTTING INSTRUMENT” in the world. The result is the most “over the top” putter that’s ever been imagined – let alone created.

 Edel Putters

Edel putters are totally custom made. The Edel fitting method is based on aiming your putter. David refined his knowledge of putter fitting for fifteen years. He discovered how shape, offset and topline markings influence aim.

The fundamental Edel principal is that if you don’t aim your putter inside the hole, every putt you make is a mistake.

The Edel fitting method is to build your ideal putter during the fitting.

There are BILLIONS of possible options when all the variables are multiplied.

The Best Putter Fitting System in the World

We use the Edel putter fitting system for all of our putter fittings. It’s the best we know.

Working with your stance, aim, stroke and BILLIONS of options, we will figure out the shape, offset and top markings, shaft and grip that fit your stroke and your eye.

The fitting is based on CONSTRUCTING THE ACTUAL PUTTER from the interchangeable parts in the fitting system. We put all the parts together, testing every option for aim. The fitting putter is then matched precisely at the Edel machine shop.

Edel Putter Fitting System 3

The Edel Putter Fitting System

The end result of an Edel putter fitting is you know the head shape, hosel shape, hosel offset, shaft length, shaft flex, grip size and grip shape that suits your eye and produces the straightest aim.

Fittings provide information. You can take your fitting data and match the specifications in your own “machine shop”. You own the blueprint.

An Edel Putter Fitting is a great value at $125. You know what works for you and you can use that knowledge to buy any putter you like. (You will make better choices for your “collection” of putters.)

Who is an Edel Putter Customer?

Custom made Edel putters start at $350. If you buy a putter, the fitting is free. That reduces some of the pain. You can get a custom fitted, made to order Edel putter for just $50 more than a Scotty.

But Edel is not about “plain vanilla”.

Edel putters are for the players who want the ultimate in adjustability – after the fitting.

The conventional wisdom of putting theory says that faster greens require lighter putters and slower greens require heavier putters. You can worry about that if you play morning and afternoon rounds on the same course or if you play courses with different green speeds.

Variable weight putters let you make “the same stroke” on faster or slower greens. The concept is to keep your putting stroke as close to the same speed and tempo as possible.

If you’re thinking about a variable weight putter, an Edel is $500 – less the fitting fee. Still not too bad.

The brilliance of the Edel putter line is for players who need “variable loft”. This is a serious challenge for the machine shop. Imagine precision machined parts that allow you to remove the face of the putter and swap it for more or less loft. The Ultimate Edel Putter comes with a hand-stitched leather case, two face plates, adjustable weights and the installation tool. Very cool.

Rumor has it that Phil Michelson arrives at a tour stop with six copies of his favorite putter – each with a different loft – preparing for the grass and his best forward press position. The ultimate question: Are you the player who wants the option to change the loft of your putter? If so, your only choice is Edel.

The “Ultimate Edel Putter” costs $900 but we can get that higher with exotic shafts and grips. (How does Ostrich leather influence feel?)

We’re proud to say that the Golf Lab was chosen as the San Francisco Bay Area exclusive Edel Authorized Representative.

We think of David Edel as the “American Miura”.

Introducing Bobby Dean

Every superstar needs plenty of help. At Edel, David’s “Right Hand Man” is Bobby Dean. Bobby has been the “inside fitter” for Edel since “THE BEGINNING”.

In an average year, he does 350 putter fittings. That includes Tour Players and ordinary golfers. There is absolutely, positively the most experienced Edel putter fitter in the world.

He’s coming to San Carlos this week.

The “Bobby Dean Putter Fitting”

If you’re still reading, thanks – now comes the good part.

You can have your putter fitted – or re-fitted – by the all-time leader in putter fitting.

If you’ve ever wondered about the putter that is correct for your aim and your stroke, you don’t need to wonder any more. You will get an answer.

One full hour putter fitting with Bobby Dean and the Golf Lab Team: $150.

“The Circus is in Town”

If a Bobby Dean putter fitting sounds good to you – keep in mind that you can combine activities during your visit. We value your time and want to make your visit as efficient as possible.

Almost two years ago Mark Sweeney came to town and we hosted full day AimPoint sessions at Half Moon Bay. Sweeney’s visit included a lengthy, intimate dinner.

It would be really cool if this email motivated you to call Bob Pegram (650) 654-1770 and book a time. While you’re on the phone, you can discuss additional options. We have indoor and outdoor sessions available – all day from Wednesday through Saturday. Edel Week at the Golf Lab.

And don’t forget Edel wedges. Expect an email tomorrow morning describing “Bobby Dean – Fitting Wedges for Bounce”. You can combine wedge and putter fitting.

If this sounds interesting and gets you a little excited – and you’d like to discuss all options for multiple sessions – I invite direct calls to my cell phone (650) 743-2816.

The circus is in town.

Best Regards,

Leith Anderson and the Golf Lab Gang – JR, CS, BP, DT, JW.

Posted in Fitting Services | Leave a comment

Donate Your Swing to Science – Test the “Nuclear Option” in Hybrids

Free this Friday and Saturday Only

Adams “Super Hybrid” available for Testing at the Golf Lab

You might have noticed that we’ve had nothing to say about the new Adams hybrids.  There was good reason:  we didn’t have any.

That’s a pretty good indication of popularity.  “Worldwide Sellout”.

Here’s what they look like:

      

Adams makes a wild claim:  “30 percent hotter than any other hybrid.”

One Player’s Experience

Greg Montefort walked in just after we opened the box from Adams.  Greg is a good, low-index player.  He has a hybrid in his bag that has survived three generations of “new technology”.

We hit Greg’s Taylor Made with the Flightscope looking on.  The result showed why it’s been in his bag so long.  Near perfect.

Greg overpowered the shaft so the ten yards he gained fell short of the claim.

However, the “Smash Factor” jumped from 1.36 to 1.46.  That is a lot.

Refresher on “Smash Factor”

If you’ve got room in your brain for one number to compare golf clubs, choose the “Smash Factor”.  It is the best indicator of which club transfers the most energy to the ball.  “Theoretically perfect” is a ratio of 1.5 – 100 MPH swing speed = 150 MPH ball speed.  That’s the best you can do.  Only drivers yield Smash Factors of 1.5 or higher.  It is unusual for a hybrid to score 1.46.

This Friday and Saturday Only – Donate Your Swing to Science

As we frequently do to get the pump primed, we’re offering a free “Challenge Test” this Friday and Saturday.  Drop by, bring your favorite hybrid.  Hit it against the new Adams Super Hybrid.  Compare results.

Fair warning:  we have no inventory.  If you get great results we will place an order for the earliest possible delivery.  Keep in mind, this is a worldwide sellout.

See you this weekend. Call 650-654-1770 or drop by. We may be too busy testing to answer the phone right away.

Regards,

Leith Anderson and the Golf Lab Gang.

Posted in Golf Equipment Chronicles | Leave a comment

Jason Goldsmith Visit – Results – Weekend Plans – “Short Notice Sell Out”

Thanks to Golf Lab customers who came out for the Jason Goldsmith visit.  We filled the schedule in a few hours.

Jason has been working with the best players on the planet for six months.  He fitted dozens of Tour Pros and hundreds of amateurs with his True Aim visual alignment system.  A thousand hours.  That’s enough to develop serious expertise.

Jason Goldsmith of TrueAim

Jason Goldsmith of TrueAim

Link to the TrueAim website: http://www.mytrueaim.com/

TrueAim Optical Decals

Golf Lab customers who had a chance to work with Jason were just as lucky as the customers who worked with Jamie Pipes from UST two weeks ago and will have the chance to work with Bobby Dean from Edel two weeks from now.

Link to the UST-Mamiya shafts website: http://www.ustmamiya.com/

Link to the Edel website: http://www.edelgolf.com/

Several times I heard “I learned more in the last hour about my golf swing than I have in the last five years.”  (Most experienced fitters sneak a little lesson into their presentation.)

We will continue to bring the best experts in the golf world to the Golf Lab.

Our “Cause” – Raising money to stomp salamanders!

We raised $150 in donations for Sharp Park.  Even though that sounds pitiful, $150 can take a chunk out of the monthly operating budget for the Save Sharp Park Committee.  If you’re out and about this weekend – stop by for a little “golf talk”.  If you want to leave a few bucks in the can for Sharp Park, Rich Harris will be very appreciative.  We all owe Rich a big “thank you” for the work he has done at Sharp Park and Stanford.

The real “endangered species” is the golf course. It has been there for many years and the salamanders have done fine.

Link to “Save Sharp Park”:  http://sfpublicgolf.com/

NCGA more info.: http://www.ncga.org/2011/12/13/save-sharp-park/

The “Expert’s Eye”

The entire Golf Lab staff watched Jason closely.   The main purpose of the visit was to learn his method.

Jason’s first instruction:  “Aim the line.”

The key question:  When you aim your driver, what do you aim?

Score lines?  Top line?  Sole?

How do you aim something that’s round?

You can’t.

You need a line to aim.  Human beings do well with alignments like “perpendicular”, “parallel”, and “square”.

That’s fundamental principal number one.

“Aim the Line”.

It sounds so simple and so logical.

Results were Immediate and significant.

We do not jump on every bandwagon that comes by.

We have been very slow to warm up to True Aim.

Our first experiments were self-guided and inconclusive.

Watching Jason, I was surprised that the shape AND POSITION of the decal matters.

Jason positioned a “square C” shape on the top of a player’s driver.  The next four drives landed in a bucket.  Launch angle was still too low.

Then, Jason turned the “C” around and moved it back on the head.

Launch angle went up.  Changing the shape and position of the decal made a measurable and immediate difference.  To say that I was surprised is an understatement.

That was one of those dramatic events that are only explainable as low grade miracles.

After witnessing Jason fine tune shot shape with True Aim, I’m eager to work his new, ultra-sensitive fitting technique into my own bag of tricks.

A New Dimension in Driver Fitting

A True Aim decal on the top of your driver might make a very significant difference in the accuracy of your drives.

A packet of True Aim decals is $30.  You can buy them online.  The packet comes with a “fitting chart” that aids self-fitting.  That’s the second best alternative.  A launch monitor is a big help choosing the shape and recording the results.

We’re adding True-Aim as the final step in our “Complete Driver Optimization” fitting.  Once you have the driver that gives optimal ballistics – ball speed, launch angle and spin rate – it makes sense to do all you can to keep it in the fairway.

If you already have a driver that works well – it takes an hour to test the range of True Aim shapes.  Each shape is recorded for three swings.  “Dispersion” is the key factor.  Most of the time, one shape is a clear winner – showing the tightest pattern.  Choose that pattern.  Install the temporary decal.  See if it works on the course.

Spend a couple of hours with Leith Anderson in therapy with your driver – $150.  You’ll fall back in love.  Call the Golf Lab for an appointment.  650-654-1770.

Your reward will be straighter drives.

Are You “Good Enough” to be a Golf Lab Customer?

The Jamie Pipes visit uncovered a problem.  Several customers got in touch to say that they thought that Golf Lab “advanced services” were just for low handicap tournament players.

Not so.  Players working on their game at any level will get better faster with a little professional help.  We are especially effective working with beginners and players returning to the game who want to bring their knowledge up to current standards.

If you need a little encouragement, stop by the Golf Lab.  We’re there all the time.  You can always see what’s going on and take a walking tour.   If you want to be sure, call ahead and we’ll set aside half an hour to discuss your plans – no charge.

John Ruark’s Complete Putting Program

One of the dedicated teachers who are making an impact in the Bay Area is John Ruark.  John has made a study of all forms of putting with particular emphasis on the current rage – belly and long putters.

John takes his putting style and fitting expertise to another level – “Face-on”.  If you’re interested in exploring all alternatives with a complete fitting system fully adjustable for length – John can save months of self-experimentation.

The first step in a serious putting improvement program is benchmarking current performance and introducing the methods and tools.  That’s John’s “Introduction to the Science of Putting – for Beginners”.  Two hours, $150.

John works with clients to personalize a program that covers aiming, stroke improvement, distance control, green reading and mental game.  Depending on the depth of interest – five and ten session programs are offered.

Serious students can complete extensive programs for $500 to $1000.

Call the Golf Lab to schedule your first appointment.  Note that the first two hours of analysis and instruction is only $150.

Best regards,

Leith Anderson and the Golf Lab Gang, JR, JT, DT, JW and Clint.

Posted in Golf Equipment Chronicles | Leave a comment

Jason Goldsmith visit Wednesday – TrueAim “Tour Fittings” help support Sharp Park

This is an inside tour tip on True Aim Company. True Aim is a packet of decals.  You pick a shape that suits your eye.  You stick that shape on the top of your driver.

The decal gives you a consistent, square, visual aiming reference.

Drivers are all about round shapes.  With drivers, it is a well-accepted belief that players see “square” as “closed”.  How do you aim if you can’t see “square?”

What is your reference when you aim your driver?  Is it the leading edge?  Score lines?  Top line?   None of those visual references is square.

You buy a driver for $399 and you need a $5.00 decal to make it work better?

Sean Foley Joins True-Aim – What Does He Know?

Sean Foley has been a True-Aim supporter for many months.  He was happy to put a testimonial video on the True-Aim website.

Why would Sean Foley do that?  It’s a reasonable deduction that Sean Foley believes that True-Aim works.

It also shows that Sean Foley has a lot of confidence in Jason Goldsmith and his partner Tim Tucker.

Jason Goldsmith at the Golf Lab this Wednesday to fit True Aim

Jason Goldsmith and Tim Tucker took their True Aim aiming system to the PGA Tour this year.  They followed the West Coast Swing.

Along the way, they picked up several True Believers in addition to Sean Foley.  One was Ben Crane.  Ben put True Aim on his driver and cashed his biggest check of the year the first week.

One of the most interesting things that we do is to bring experts and personalities to Golf Lab customers.  Jason is an expert and a personality.  He gives real “Tour Fittings”.  You can meet Jason and experience the same Tour Fittings that he performs with the best players on the planet.

Call ahead for an appointment.  You need about half an hour.  We’re starting at noon.  If you can get away during lunch, we’ll start with a round table discussion.  Jason will stay as long as necessary so evening hours are not out of the question.

If you’re out and about and just want to stop by to check out the event – you’re welcome all day.

Call Bob Pegram (650) 654-1770 for an appointment.

Working Together for a Cause

We would love to charge Jason’s time at what it’s worth.  (Private clients are $200 per hour.)

We have a cause to support.  Our dear friend Rich Harris is nearing the end of a long ordeal to save the Sharp Park Golf Course.

Jason’s True Aim fittings are free.

We will accept donations on behalf of Sharp Park.  No minimum donation required.

Best Regards,

Leith Anderson and the Golf Lab Gang:  JT, JR, DT, CS, JW

PS:  There are no handicap restrictions on Golf Lab programs.  The Jamie Pipes visit rang a bell.  Some Golf Lab customers wrote back and said that they didn’t think they were “good enough” for Golf Lab programs.

Let’s put a stop to that feeling.  Players who are just getting started with golf need equipment that will take them to the “next level”.  It doesn’t have to be expensive equipment.  It does have to be the right length, weight and flex.  The grips need to fit.

We created the Golf Lab for players of all skill levels who share a common goal – to get better at golf.

Posted in Golf Equipment Chronicles | Leave a comment

Aerotech, Accurizer Followup

We’re in the thick of the season.  Some custom club tweaks are working so well you ought to consider improving your bag before the serious tournaments start.

There are significant developments in the “Aerotech graphite shafts in irons” story.

The first email is from a dear friend – PGA Show Interviewer (see video on our website) Biv Wadden.  Biv is as traditional as they get.  His resume speaks for itself.  One of these days, we’re looking to bring Biv to San Francisco for a little taste of “Chicago Style”.

It took 6 months get Biv to try Aerotech Steel Fiber shafts.  That’s dedication for a friend.

Hi Leith-

Another nicely done email. I’ve been playing the i95 stiff in my irons now for the past three weeks and they are nothing short of fantastic. I’m done with steel never to return.

Aerotech could capture 30% of the tour market share during the next two years. KBS did it with a worse shaft…why not Aerotech? By worse, the tip characteristics are so different in the Aerotech vs KBS Tour. The i95 stiff has a really stiff tip while the KBS Tour is very soft. The KBS Tour was really never appropriate for tour players, hence the development of the C-taper, which is just a disguised Project X.

I got over the flatter CPM profile displayed in both the parallel and taper tip version. I have the taper tips in my set. The 3-iron measures a bit stiff and the wedge a bit soft, and I think I like it that way. Piercing ball flight on the long irons and a little extra kick on the shorter irons. It’s also my first MOI matched set. I’m not big into that but the constant weight tapers produced it on their own. I think I like the MOI match as well.

You are right…this shaft is poised to take off like a rocket. Good for Chris Hilleary. He is a smart, honest, nice guy.

Hope all is well with you.

Best Regards,

William M. (Biv) Wadden IV

The Wadden Golf Academy

Level I PGA Apprentice Professional

That was the first good thing that happened.

Then, on Saturday Lawrence Fu decided that he would keep the 80 gram X Flex Aerotech Steel Fiber shafts in his 3-5 irons – “Accurized”.  Lawrence is a very good Bay Area amateur – senior in high school – headed for Santa Barbara on scholarship next fall.  He’s been a great club tester for years – and if he sticks with something – it’s usually REALLY good.

On Monday Tyler Garrett – a mini-Tour player and constant thinker about his game and equipment decided he would go with a “graduated, Aerotech set”.  He was one of the first to go with lightweight steel shafts in his last set that mixed Mizuno hybrids in the long irons with forged irons in scoring irons.  That was five years ago.  They served him well.

Aerotech1Link to Aerotechwebsite:  http://www.aerotechgolfshafts.com/irons.php

Tyler finished a week-long test with the Aerotech 70 gram Steel Fiber shafts with Accurizers in the handle.  The heads he tested were the Vega VC-03′s.  In subsequent testing, the Vegas showed no improvement over the Mizunos.  We’re rebuilding his Mizuno set with Steel Fiber and Accurizers.

Rick Kehr joined the Demo Program and won two tournaments on the Players’ Tour with clubs that he took out for the first time.   He’s agonizing – trying to understand the difference in feel.  David Olmeda is an example of a player who is just too strong for lightweight graphite.  If you saw him, you’d understand.

And then Walt Joyce came in and asked “how about . . .”

And Greg Monteforte called and asked “how about . . .’

And Jeff Segol volunteered to “Donate his swing to science. . .”

THESE ARE ALL STRONG PLAYERS.  Please pay attention.  If you’re looking for something different, you’ve got to try something different.  STRONG PLAYERS INVITED.

The New Golf Lab “Space Age Iron Build”

All of our early successes with lightweight graphite shafts and balanced irons focused on seniors and women.  That was a slam dunk.  Would the same setup work for STRONG PLAYERS?  That’s what this is all about.  Reinforced, re-balanced lightweight graphite shafts are good for all players.  If you don’t sign up for one of our free “Space Age Iron Shaft Fittings” you deserve to shoot 90 in your Club Championship.  (That’s the curse of the Graphite God).

Short description is to reduce shaft weight by two ounces (58 grams).  Add back 8 grams head weight.  You now have a “lighter hammer, heavier head”.  It is intuitively obvious that swing speed should increase and energy transfer should increase.  The Accurizer provides counterweight performance and shaft reinforcement.

Accurizers Forever

What would happen if every golfer in the world became convinced that his driver shaft needed reinforcement?  That shouldn’t be a surprise.  All big GRAPHITE SHAFT COMPANIES refer to “reduced ovaling” in their marketing materials.

Think about what “ovaling” means for just a moment.  It means “distortion”.  The big idea behind shaft performance is “keeping the tube round”.

That’s what the Balance-Certified Accurizer is all about.  It is a machined part that creates a rigid structure under a player’s lower hand with a driver.  That’s the point of maximum distortion.  Why not firm it up?

The Accurizer is more important for players who get good results from lightweight shafts.  The lighter the shaft, the less resistance to power.  The Accurizer is “resistance to power”.

We don’t require a fitting for Accurizers.  No need.  One size fits all.  Your driver will be straighter and a little longer.  $60 installed.  Money back if it doesn’t work for you.

Link to Accurizer website: http://www.balance-certified.com/

Why your next driver should be a Taylor Made

Something strange happened in the Taylor Made legal department five years ago.  They failed to file a patent to protect the design of their “shaft adapter” – the part that attaches the shaft to the head.

It may not be that they “failed”.  It’s quite possible that there’s been so much prior art in previous years – 400 previous years – that they knew that they couldn’t defend a patent.

Then another accident happened.  Taylor Made adapters (with a single exception) fit any Taylor Made driver.  Since there has been little technical improvement in the last few years, any Taylor Made driver can now be tested head to head against any other Taylor Made driver.

Suppose that you want to test your current Taylor Made R9 or R11 driver against the new “RocketBallz” – head on head – same shaft – with a launch monitor as the referee.  Assume that you want to test it under “real world” conditions.  That means the same shaft at the same length, same lie, face angle and true loft settings.  You can only do that under controlled conditions.

How are you going to measure the specifications?  The only precision loft, lie and face angle gauge for drivers in the Bay Area is at the Golf Lab.  Measure and you know.  Anything else is guesswork.

A customer came into the Golf Lab last week and reported that his ball speed increased 8 MPH with the RocketBallz.  I was motivated.   I bought a brand new RocketBallz and we tested it immediately. No increase in ball speed.  If you want to test the new RocketBallz – or any other TM head with the shaft of your choice, you can do that at the Golf Lab.

If you own a Taylor Made driver you now have access to another important Golf Lab service.

We have championed the idea of “interchangeable shafts” for years.  The best way to test a driver is to take it to the course.  The best way to find the driver that you want to take to the course is to spend some time with a radar-based launch monitor to tell you which shafts “work the best”.

Our “library” of test shafts is now available for short term rental.  If you’re thinking about buying an exotic, high performance graphite shaft for $400 or more – you don’t have to gamble your money.

You can know for sure if the shaft works for you.

Best value?  I like Taylor Made “TP” Tour Proven R9 heads.  Available on eBay for $150 – $200 at the Golf Lab.  We always have a nice selection of lightly used heads – measured for true loft, face angle and lie.

TaylorMade R9

Walk-ins OK this Friday and Saturday

If you’re out and about this Friday or Saturday, we’re one minute off 101 at Brittan.  If you’re coming from the north, exit at Holly and pass the Holly exits to Brittan. Take a left at the light and quick right into the parking lot.

From the south, it’s a little more roundabout.  Get off at Whipple.  Go west to Industrial, north to Brittan, left on Brittan and then duck left into the parking lot.  Proceed around the building to unit 10.  Easy.

The best way to find out about Golf Lab services is to stop in.  Let us show you around.

Best Regards,

Leith Anderson and the Golf Lab Gang:  Dian, Clint, JT, JR, Joel and Bob P.

Posted in Golf Equipment Chronicles | Leave a comment

Free This Week – Ultimate Driver Optimization, Edel Custom Putter Fitting

Ultimate Driver Optimization – by Leith Anderson

Edel Custom Putter Fitting  - by John Ruark

Every once in a while there comes a time to do something really different.

“Reconnect” with old customers and bring new customers to the Golf Lab.

The New Golf Lab is a “build it and they will come” dream.  We combined the latest technology with deep experience to completely change the way golf clubs are fitted – tested – built – and optimized.

Our on-site workshop enables multiple “tweaks” to golf clubs during a fitting session.  We compress several fitting and testing sessions into one.

Every week 2000 people read the Golf Equipment Chronicles and various Golf Lab emails.  We want to expand that audience though member referrals.

The New Golf Lab – Open and Running Smoothly

We created a unique environment and recruited a team of teachers to help players get better at golf – faster.  Shake-down is over.

Our method is unmatched for personal, professional attention.  Our goal is to get immediate results.

We kept the full team together while we built the New Golf Lab.  Bob Pegram on the sales desk, Clint Smith in the workshop, Joel Whittom for eBay sales, Leith Anderson on the tee line, John Ruark on the green, John Taylor for motion analysis.  We’re ready to handle any challenge.

Free Driver Fitting or Putter Optimization for you and two friends

This is an offer you should not refuse:

1. Free Driver Optimization Fitting (1 hour), or a

2. Free Edel Putter Fitting and Overall Putting Checkup (1 hour),

for any Golf Lab customer who will work with us to make two referrals.

Two referrals for your playing partners – they’re for free fittings too.

John Ruark and I are going to make sure that you are amazed by your Golf Lab fitting experience.  Then, we’re going to do the same thing for two of your playing buddies – friends – or even a serious junior who needs a leg up.

Creating the Golf Lab “Family”

This method might sound a little crazy but we’re taking the next step in building the dream.  We’re looking for players who want to join up.  It’s easy.  Just book a free fitting with Leith or John.

We are intent on bringing meaningful experiences to Golf Lab customers.  We hosted Mr. Miura when he visited San Francisco and 40 Golf Lab customers – mostly Miura fans – met him.  On the technical side we’ve had John Johnson from Tour Lock and John Cranston from Balance-Certified.  Glen Coombs – the Putting Doctor – presented his methods.

Just a week ago, Jamie Pipes from UST spent two days fitting Golf Lab customers from his Tour Bag.  Then three players had a chance to play a round with him and share dinner.  Pretty cool.

In the next couple of weeks we’ve got Jason Goldsmith from True-Aim and Bobby Dean from Edel coming to town.  Bobby Dean is the key fitter at Edel Golf – individually responsible for fitting 350 putters a year – every year – since 2005.

Bobby is going to be here for three days.

We’re planning to make that a unique visit.

The Next Big Dream – “Membership”

Now that we’ve found equilibrium with our new business model – based on nothing more than weekly emails to our current customer list – we’re ready to expand for the future.

The first step is to see how many “True Believers” are hidden in our customer list.

You can assume that “first choice” would be a benefit of membership.

You are invited to step up.

Book a fitting.  Prepare your referrals.

And Don’t Forget – “Morning at the Muni”

I’ve got one spot this Wednesday for “Morning at the Muni”.  Wheels up at 8 AM.  Finished by 10.  Then breakfast.  Back to work by 11.

Sunday at 1 PM.  Afternoon winds at Palo Alto are a challenge.  We’ll follow the round with dinner at Hans’ Korean in Palo Alto.  Nice way to spend a Sunday afternoon and evening.  You can even go to church.

Dutch treat all the way around.

Call Bob for reservations or information: 650-654-1770.

Best regards,

Leith Anderson and John Ruark

Posted in Fitting Services | Leave a comment

Matt Kuchar’s Irons – Graphite Shafts Win Player’s Championship

I love when this happens.

Just when I needed a good case study – Matt Kuchar wins the Player’s Championship playing 95 gram graphite shafts in his irons.

Winning PGA Tournaments with graphite shafts is a rare occurrence.  Very few Tour players have tried lightweight graphite shafts.  Why should they?  They’re playing well with True Temper heavy steel shafts that they grew up with.

There have been a couple of notable exceptions.  Johnny Miller won the Open at Oakmont in 1973 with Aldila prototype graphite shafts in his irons.  That round is recognized as one of the best ball-striking rounds of all time.  John Daly played UST graphite shafts in his irons when he won the British Open in 1995.  Big John is not the kind of player you’d expect to get serious about graphite.

Matt never would have tried Lightweight graphite on his own.  His father bought a new set of custom irons that came with Aerotech Steel Fiber shafts.  He thought they felt unusually good and handed them to Matt.  Matt tried them and was surprised.  He ordered a set.  He played Aerotech Steel Fibers the next weekend, finished second and went on to win the Money Title.  That’s the short version.

Aerotech i95 shaft

What caused Matt to try his father’s irons?  Who would think they would have anything in common?

Unlike most golfers who “know what they like” and don’t see much reason to change equipment, Matt was looking for that special edge.  Did that one day he tried his father’s irons make the difference?  Was that a coincidence?

Matt’s quick results demonstrate what my old friend Mitch Voges used to say about golf clubs.  “New golf clubs should be like new glasses.  When I buy new glasses, I see better right now.”

Brandt Snedeker was a winner with Steel Fibers earlier this year.  Dozens of Tour players at all levels are evaluating Aerotech Steel Fibers.  All of the major OEM Custom departments have either approved or are testing Aerotech Steel Fiber shafts.

Link to the Aerotech website: http://www.aerotechgolfshafts.com/

Link to Aerotech iron shafts: http://www.aerotechgolfshafts.com/irons.php

It won’t be long before Aerotech is represented in all the fitting carts.  After fifteen years, Aerotech is poised to become an “overnight success”.

Aerotech “under the covers” – what the Pros are Really Playing

Aerotech has been the dominant graphite shaft line for custom clubmakers for over ten years.  The reason is the extensive choice of weights and flexes that Aerotech offers.

With Aerotech, the unique designs that are the most interesting.  Aerotech is the only graphite shaft company that offers a broad range of “weight designed” shafts.

Tournament players favor traditional steel shaft designs that call for each shaft to be slightly heavier as they get shorter.  Each shaft then weighs the same when trimmed to playing length.  That’s “constant weight” for shafts.  The belief is that constant weight shafts make better sets.

The problem with constant weight shafts is complexity and cost.  Each set requires eight different shafts.  Sets have to be kept straight.  That’s a severe test for most golf club factories which is why “parallel tip” shafts were invented.

Manufacturing efficiency demanded parallel tip “blanks”.  All blanks are the same.  You cut half an inch off the tip for the three iron and keep going up the set.  Most graphite iron shafts are supplied as blanks – one size – and weight – fits all.

So it came to pass over the years that high quality sets for good players would continue to be made by the old method – strictly taper tip shafts for classic forged irons.

Parallel tip shafts came to be the “mass market option”.  Tapered was expensive and parallel was cheap.

That led to confusion about premium graphite iron shafts.  Since practically all graphite is manufactured on the parallel tip model there’s a tendency to distrust graphite quality.  Until now, mounting parallel tip shafts in forged heads required drilling the head to accommodate the shaft – an option that requires above average experience.

The golf world thought it needed a quality taper tip graphite shaft.

95 gram Constant Weight, Taper Tip Graphite

The Big Boys are playing taper tips.  Aerotech I95 Steel Fiber taper tip iron shafts were engineered and manufactured individually to a constant playing weight of 95 grams.

Link to more details on iron shafts:

http://www.aerotechgolfshafts.com/steelfiber_iron.php

That solves the problem of the short irons feeling too light.  That is the most common complaint from most players testing lightweight graphite shafts.  It’s not that the shafts feel loose.  It’s that they feel too light.  They should, because a 95 gram parallel tip graphite shaft in an 8 iron might end up only be 85 grams trimmed to playing weight.  That’s good reason to wonder . . .

If you think you need heavy steel shafts – for whatever reason – ask yourself “why?”  If 95 grams is just right for Matt Kuchar and Brandt Snedeker, why would that be too light for you?

And, if Tour Pros are playing 95 gram graphite shafts – doesn’t it also stand to reason that a normal amateur might do well with something lighter than that?  Maybe 80 or 70 grams?

So that’s the Big Bet.  Will changing your shafts help you win the Money Title?  No guarantee on that.  Will you play better with irons that are built differently from anything you’ve ever tried?  There’s only one way to find out.

Golf Lab High Performance Demo Program

We created a new way to test our theories.

It seemed doubtful that customers would be convinced by argument – or even a launch monitor – to buy a new set of irons that were totally different.

We built twenty sets of irons.  Each set is a “fantasy set”.  We combined the best of the Japanese boutique foundry forged iron heads with the latest graphite shafts – in weights from 70 grams to 125 grams.

Players wondering about shaft weights can check out demo sets of custom irons built with Aerotech Steel Fiber shafts in 70, 80, 95, 110 and 125 weights.  You can make a sure choice on shaft weight only one way:  hands-on testing on your own course hitting your own ball to familiar targets.

Aerotech1

Aerotech i95 shaft

Of course we have the newly famous Aerotech 95 gram, constant weight, taper tip Steel Fiber shafts if you want to know exactly what Kuchar’s irons are like.

Heads include the best of the Japanese boutique foundries – Miura 501′s and the newest Passing Point.  From Vega we have the competition blades and the fabulous VC-03′s – chosen by most players as the best feeling, most forgiving forged head on the planet.

For players who like familiar names we have Mizuno and Adams.

It is no longer necessary to wonder about how your own fantasy set might play.  We probably have a set that’s close to your own Dream Set in our showroom.

Special Offer for Golf Lab “Members Only”

Assembling our extensive demo sets was a significant investment – but a necessary investment.  For the first time, players can test a full set of high performance irons under home course conditions.

I’m going with Mitch Voges – “play better right now”.

Many of our demo sets are valued up to $2000.  Our rental program is $300 for a month.  You can swap your set four times.  The rental fee does not apply to purchases – except for Golf Lab members who take schedule an “Iron shaft fitting” in the next week.

Golf Lab customers who book any fitting or fitting update this week receive one week of on-course experience free. That’s a $125 value.

Do your iron game a favor this week.  Book an update fitting and see what Matt Kuchar found out about Aerotech Steel Fiber shafts.

Best regards,

Leith Anderson and the Golf Lab Gang:  JR, JT, BP, CS, DT and Joel.

Posted in Golf Equipment Chronicles | Leave a comment

Old-Fashioned Golf Shop – Open for Walk-ins – Putter Swap Meet 3-5 This Saturday

Our San Carlos workshop is open.  We now accommodate most minor repairs and re-gripping while you wait.  If you need a quick re-shaft, re-gripping, loft and lie adjustment or any other club repair – call ahead and we’ll get your work done while you’re working on your game.

We’re easy to find.  If you’re coming down 101 from the north get off at Holly.  Pass the Holly exits to exit at Brittan.  Turn left at the light.  Turn right into the parking lot.  We’re first on the right.  One minute off 101.  Right across from Office Depot and the big Golfsmith Store.

First Step:  Find out what you’ve already got.

This was the week of the “coming back to golf” player.

The first thing you need to know before you buy new golf clubs is “How do our current clubs fit you – right now”.

Players coming back to golf should never buy new clubs before they start the journey.  The first step is to check what you’ve already got and see if your current club will take you to “your next level”.

Most of the time, a simple adjustment to length, lie angle, grip size or player’s attitude will make the clubs that you already have playable.

Players who are coming back to golf should never buy golf clubs for the player they are today.  Assume rapid progress.  The clubs you buy should be for the player that you will be.

It takes an hour to check your bag.  We hit your driver and six iron to benchmark performance.  We measure every club in your bag to make sure that they won’t hold you back.

We make any required adjustments – length, lie, new grips – while you wait.  Very efficient.

The very best advice for players coming back to golf is usually “Save your money for lessons.”

Clubfitting – the Most Important Factor is Length

“Standard” golf clubs are built for a “standard human being”.  What’s that?

For golf clubs, that means you’re 5’10″ tall.  If you put a yardstick on the ground and measure the distance to your wrist – 35″ is standard.

What if you’re 5’7″ tall and the distance from your wrist to floor is 33″?

What if you’re 5’1″ and your wrist to floor is 31″?

Does it make any sense that all players should be playing the same length clubs?

Clubs that are too long will force you to make unnatural compensations – and you end up with a poor swing.

If you’re wondering about your bag, drop in on Saturday.  We can measure your driver and irons in 15 minutes.  Drop in for your free check.

Distance comes from Head Speed, not Club Length

I had two appointments this week with players with brand new Taylor Made “RocketBalz” drivers.  They are coming in at over 46″.  Way too long for all but the strongest players.

The length makes it more difficult to store power for a late release.  Long clubs promote “hitting from the top” and slicing.  They don’t go farther either.

If you’re wondering about the correct length for your driver, the easiest way to find the right length is to test drivers with different length shafts.  Choose the one that yields the highest ball speed.  Way more important than shaft flex.

And if you want to know if the RocketBallz driver is for you – you don’t have to buy one to find out.  We added a RocketBallz driver head to our fitting system.  You can know for sure – before you buy.

Test the RocketBallz against your current driver.  Make sure it’s better before you buy one.

Fitting System Upgrade

For several years, we’ve focused on Nickent drivers for our driver fitting system.  Nickent was the first company to release the fittings that connect the shaft to the head.  That allowed us to create a driver shaft fitting system with over 100 shafts.

We’re moving our fitting system to Taylor Made.  There are several advantages:

First, any Golf Lab customer with a Taylor Made driver can use our complete library of shafts – most late Taylor Made models accept the same fitting.

Any Golf Lab customer playing a TM head can check out the best performing test shafts for real-life play – on your own course, with your own driver.  The ultimate test is to see your distances and control on your own course.

The new shaft fittings allow maximum changes to loft, lie and face angle.  It is now possible to fit a driver to a player’s swing in an entirely new dimension.

Measured face angle and true loft are now important fitting parameters.  Our Callaway Tour Gauge lets us make precise adjustments to loft and face angle.  Here’s the most important tool in our shop:

Driver Gauge with Club

It does you no good to make random changes to your driver lie, face angle and loft.

Tolerances on driver heads are 2* each way.  A 9* driver can be 7* or 11*.

If you want to fit your driver to your swing, lie, face angle and true loft are just as important as shaft length, weigh and flex.

Bring your driver in this Saturday.  We’ll measure it so you at least know your starting point.

Putter Swap Meet this Saturday 3-5

We tried this a year ago and it was fun.

Even though we believe that Edel putters are the most advanced “putting instruments” – totally custom – adjustable for weight and loft – we still love every other kind of putter.

This Saturday from 3 to 5 we’ll open the floor for a Putter Swap Meet.  Leith will bring out his entire collection of over 50 putters – lots of classics.

Bring your own putters – to swap or sell to other Golf Lab customers.

If you have don’t want to take your collection home, we can liquidate it on eBay.

As a special offer for all players coming to the swap meet – we’ll run a free test on our Science and Motion (SAM) Putt Lab.

See you this Saturday.

Best regards,

Leith Anderson and the Golf Lab Gang.  JT, JR, BP, DT, JW, and Clint.

Posted in Fitting Methods and How to Buy | Leave a comment

Golf Lab Tuesday Update – Jamie Pipes – UST Tour Fitter Results

What a weekend!!  We started out at Mariner’s Point at 8 AM on Friday and we didn’t finish until we cleaned up the last of the Korean banquet at Han’s in Palo Alto on Saturday night.  Forty-eight hours of all golf – all the time.  Jamie Pipes is the Iron Man of shaft fitting.

Over thirty Golf Lab customers took advantage of multiple opportunities to meet up with Jamie.  We worked with wedge shafts, performed driver shaft fittings, played golf and performed more driver shaft fittings.

Four players broke the code.  Jeff Segol, Dirk Godsey and Rick Kehr completed the foursome and returned to the Golf Lab for the launch monitor fitting after golf.  I have said this before – absolutely, positively the most accurate and efficient way to start a clubfitting is on the golf course.

The best information I can give any player is which clubs are performing so well that it doesn’t make any sense to challenge them.  If your current driver is performing within 2% of your potential, why waste time and money testing and buying drivers?  Focus on what’s most important – and exactly the clubs that have the most upside for your game.

Free On-Course Clubfitting – Mornings at the Muni

I made it a tradition to meet up with new customers at the Palo Alto Muni to play nine holes.  No charge.  “You just buy your own “Breakfast Special” for $32.  The Bay Café is the only place I know that serves a passable corned beef hash with poached eggs and San Francisco sourdough toast.  The perfect breakfast after breathing fresh air for two hours.

We then return to the Golf Lab to complete the fitting – knowing exactly what a player’s ball flight and consistency are on the golf course.  That allows me to zero in on exactly the clubs that will make the biggest difference.

Starting out with a morning at the Muni is the best way to complete a comprehensive clubfitting in a single day.

Some Golf Lab customers work for a living and can’t get away for the 8 AM Wednesday morning round.  I’m scheduling a Sunday round – in the afternoon for the first couple of weeks.  This is a good way for old customers to update their fitting.  Go to the course.  Come back to the Golf Lab.  If you have not been fitted with radar – you’re not playing with a full deck.

It doesn’t matter that it’s a Muni and it might be a slow round.  Who cares?  We’re out there to dawdle around, enjoy some conversation, hit a few extra practice shots.  Sunday afternoon at the Muni is a perfect pace of play for what we want to do.  Call Bob to reserve a spot this week or next.  (650) 654-1770.

Fitting for Torque – Jamie Pipes’ Tour Bag

Watching and listening to a Tour Fitter for two days was a great learning experience for the entire Golf Lab staff.  Here’s how fitting for torque works:

A player starts with his own driver to establish a benchmark.  We are interested in “ballistics” – ball speed, launch angle and spin rate – usually shortened to “speed, spin and launch”.

When we go “under the covers” with radar we find more useful information.  The radar records and remembers where each shot went.  That becomes the “shot grouping” display where each driver is compared for accuracy.  Radar also reveals the movement of the clubhead milliseconds before impact.  That reveals shaft performance by direct measurement.

We are early in the testing cycle.  Kaz Hoffman is still playing the UST VTS shaft in the “Black” (low torque) version.  If you plan to follow up launch monitor testing with range or on-course experience, we can supply the correct shafts and an interchangeable head.  Alternatively, we have the entire UST shaft line mounted on Taylor Made fittings so you can check out any UST shaft to hit with your own driver if you have a Taylor Made adjustable driver – all the way back to R9.

In the “Big Picture of Clubfitting”, my view is that fitting for torque is an interesting starting point.

Even for accomplished players who play other brands – it is good to know the torque value that produces the best results.  That would be valuable information to have before making a shaft choice.

I wanted more – and so did Jamie.  That’s where things got interesting.

The Concept of “Shaft Bend Profile”

For the last twenty years – graphite shafts have been pretty much the same.  They were designed to be “stiff in the butt” and then get gradually softer toward the tip – kind of like a fishing rod.

The Mitsubishi “Blue Board” driver shaft was a watershed product when it came out.  At one point, seven out of ten of the top players in the world were playing the same Blue Board.  That’s the closest thing to a Perfect Storm that’s ever happened in the golf business.  The Blue Board called attention to the “stiff tip” concept – key for Tour Players looking for control.

Mitsubishi took the concept of “bend profile” to the Bank.  The introduced the “Redboard” – designed with a stiff butt section and soft tip – ideal for players who need more spin and help getting the ball in the air.  They followed with the “Whiteboard” – a soft butt section and super stiff tip designed for the “dragger, dropper” (Sergio Garcia) style of swing that loads the shaft early.

The concept of “shaft fitting” started with Mitsubishi and their “Red, White and Blue” series.  For the first time accomplished amateurs could influence their ballistics with a driver shaft.  Since then, most of the refinements have been very subtle – too subtle to see or feel and measure in many cases.

“Too subtle to see or feel” presents a problem.  You have to trust the launch monitor to convince you that it’s worth it to go through a lengthy testing process.  What’s more boring than testing driver shafts?

How do you measure success?  Would it be that Kaz Hoffman has improved his “fairways hit” from 9 to 11 per round?  Do we believe that the reason is a low torque driver shaft?  How could anyone know?  We only know that looking at performance statistics – at whatever level of detail you can stand – is the only way to tell the difference between driver shafts – and any other golf club for that matter.

UST on the Rise

We should have expected that the best outcome would be unexpected.  I explained bend profiles to help explain the exciting part of UST’s shaft line.

UST is almost two companies.  There’s the Japanese headquarters and management.  That is the Mamiya side – one of the best of the Japanese shaft companies.  UST is also one of the major suppliers to the Mass Market – so they’re still going for those million piece orders.  The American interface is pure Texas.

The key ingredient in any company is innovation.  That’s where UST shines.

The first UST product that produced a spotlight success in the last couple of years is the Nunchuk – a Jerry Hogan invention marketed by Inventix.  We learned from Jamie that this version of the Nunchuk is actually the third time UST manufactured a shaft built to Hogan’s specifications.  We love the Nunchuk.  That’s another story.

The Nunchuk lead UST to hire Ralph Mann – the top independent engineer focused on the golf industry – to understand the science of energy flow down the shaft.  That led to some important breakthroughs in shaft design.

The one that stood out in testing with nearly every player last week was the Element.  It comes in three models.  Since you’re now up to date on what EI Curves look like, here is the “picture” of the three models of the new Element shaft.  Notice how the smooth slide now looks like a snake that swallowed a rabbit.

Attas Elements Chart

Every player who tested shafts for torque this weekend also tested the Element.  The Element was a shaft that every player could “feel”.  The Element came out the winner.

It is now in our driver shaft fitting system.

Upgraded Challenge for Driver Optimization and Shaft Fitting

Last week I made an unprecedented challenge in the clubfitting world. Guaranteed results or you don’t pay.  That challenge pertained to irons.  I’m expanding the challenge to the much more difficult world of improving driver performance.

Here’s the offer:  I will test your driver to establish a benchmark and make sure that the “ballistics” are within acceptable ranges.  Assuming that your driver is producing “correct” numbers – I might modify the length – longer or shorter – the balance – heavier or lighter and add the magic “Accurizer” in the handle.  We’ll hit another series of shots.

Your driver will go farther, straighter or both.  Your “smash factor” will go up.  Your spin rate will come down.  You will see and feel improved performance.  You will smile.

From there, we “test the extremes”.  From experience, I know that no current driver beats the trusty old Taylor Made R9 for technology.  We test lighter and heavier shafts with different flex profiles.  We watch the radar graphs.  We find the shaft that works the best from direct measurement of the shaft – not by looking at the ball and guessing “why?”

The performance of your current driver will be optimized and we will test it against the best competition.  If you are leaving yards on the tee, you will know how many.

You will also know the best that current technology can deliver.

1.5 hours.  $150.  Better measured performance improvement – guaranteed.

“Rhythm of the Week”

The “New Golf Lab” is really a startup.  Much more complicated than the old place.  Organizing collaboration.  Creating a weekly schedule.  Getting the word out.

Our communication is beginning to make sense.  This is the “Tuesday Update” (an experiment) to bring local customers up to date on what’s happening in the next few days.  All emails are archived on the Golf Lab Blog.  Go here to follow the history of our emails most recent first.  Please send this link to your friends.  http://calgolflab.com/blog/dashboard/ .

Call in.  Refer your friends.  We need the business.

Best regards,

Leith Anderson and the Golf Lab Gang.

Posted in Golf Equipment Chronicles | Leave a comment

For Women Only – More Distance, Straighter Shots and Better Putting

May 1st - Special Combo Deal this Week Only

The Golf Lab is known for “testing the extremes”. Over the years, our major success in building high performance golf clubs has been for women. Golf Lab clubs have helped win State, Junior and City Championships for some very good players.

It’s a simple fact. Weight matters more for women than for men.

Big improvements are not reserved for tournament players. Normal golfers make golf more difficult than necessary by playing with clubs that are too long and too heavy.

That goes double for wedges and putters.

We have some special offers for women this week only. (Please bring your playing partner and It’s OK if he’s your husband.)

Iron Shaft Weight Breakthrough – Matrix 49 gram shafts

We finished testing the brand new Matrix Radix 40 gram shafts. That might not mean much to players who are not well-versed on the relative weight of the parts of her golf clubs – grip, shaft and head. But 40 gram iron shafts have never been available before. They are the first ultra-light iron shafts that are strong enough to be serious. Until now, all ultra-lightweight shafts have been soft as spaghetti.

Our first fitting was Melanie last Friday. She is a long-time Golf Lab customer who bought her irons five years ago. They are still in her bag. Her irons are state of the art from back then. Shafts are the venerable Nippon 850 – still the best 90 gram steel shaft. Her iron heads are Mizuno 23′s – still a good game improvement model.

We tested the extreme. We shaved another half inch off of the length and mounted a 40 gram Matrix Radix shaft.

BANG!! Ten yards of carry distance. New shafts for the Mizunos.

What happened? We changed the relationship between Melanie and her irons. The lighter weight and shorter length allowed her to change her swing to a more powerful, precise, descending blow – something she couldn’t make happen with her old clubs. The new shafts gave here the strength to make the swing she always wanted to make – but couldn’t because the clubs were too long and too heavy.

Second Most Important Breakthrough – Wedge Shafts

There’s another club in most womens’ bags that will benefit from a quick out-patient procedure. Your wedges. If they have steel shafts – they are surely too heavy. If you bought them “off the rack” – it is a sure thing that they are too long.

Combine all that with a grip that fits your and lets you choke up comfortably and you’ll see your wedge game improve immediately.

We always look at your wedges when we do a shaft fitting.

Don’t Forget Your Putter

John Ruark has distinguished himself over the last many years as a serious student of putting and the short game. He became a fabulous putting teacher. You will probably find that the most significant thing you can do to lower your scores is to improve your putting.

In an hour and a half, John will give you a thorough introduction to “The Science of Putting” – in very simple terms. You’ll work on your setup to make sure you’re in the best position to make a repeatable stroke. He’ll work on tempo – making sure to take the “hit” out of your putt.

He’ll check your aim with our Edel Fitting system. He’ll check your stroke with the Science and Motion Putt Lab. Finally, he’ll introduce the concept of thought control to enhance your pre-shot routine.

A good way to book a John Ruark session is to come with one of your favorite playing partners. A coach with a good eye is important. Working together with a strong technical foundation is the best way to improve your putting. Better putting is a long-term project.

Book a Shaft Fitting and “Introduction to Putting” this week. “Two for One” pricing. Two sessions, for two people – just $150.

If you have any questions and would like to talk by telephone first, please schedule a time with Bob Pegram (650) 654-1770.

Best Regards, Leith Anderson and the Golf Lab Gang: JT, JR, Clint, Dian and Joel.

Posted in Golf Equipment Chronicles | Leave a comment

Nationwide Week at the Golf Lab

Golf Lab – Video Blog Proof of Concept

This is an exciting moment for me.

I’m a storyteller. I love golf equipment and playing the game. The “Golf Equipment Chronicles” covered the evolution of custom clubs and clubfitting from 2002-2009. That contemporary history is preserved on the original Golf Lab website: www.calgolftech.com.

Video is the communication medium of the future – so we are told.

Tim Tucker has an interesting story. He applied experience from years of competitive golf and clubfitting to bring a new idea to market. As an Edel putter fitter, he knew that alignment marks on top of a putter can help a player aim. Why not drivers?

He created a series of decals that go on top of a player’s driver. In testing, one or more of the shapes appears to go straighter than the others. You put that shape on your driver. You hit straighter drives. The company is called True Aim Alignment Decals.

Tim was on the tee line at the Nationwide event last week in Hayward. He came to the Golf Lab one rainy afternoon to tell the True Aim story on video. If you want to know “why” – you can hear from the inventor himself. Please have a look and send me your evaluation. That will contribute to the evolution of our video skills. leithander@gmail.com.

Tim Tucker TrueAim Video

Chapter Two – On Tour with True Aim – Sean Foley Endorsement

I wanted to know more about what it was like to be out on Tour. Tim and his partner Jason Goldsmith were on the tee line at every PGA Tour event on the West Coast Swing. What was that like?

Here’s another five minutes that covers early adopters, reception on Tour and Sean Foley. Is that a good hook?

Tim Tucker TrueAim on Tour Video

Golf Lab Communication Strategy

I need some advice.

If I had to write the True Aim story it would never happen. Writing the story in depth would take twenty-four hours. It wouldn’t be as good as the video. You can see Tim’s passion. It’s impossible to write passion. Video brings a story to life that would never be told.

The same goes for golf equipment reviews. What can you say in three paragraphs with two pictures? Boring.

I think I’m going to have a lot of fun doing video reviews of golf equipment. Not boring.

Please spend a few minutes reviewing and critiquing the videos.

Why am I begging? I’m worried.

Over the last few months we have sent quite a few emails with video links. Our email management program, Constant Contact, informs us if a reader “opens” the message. It also keeps track of “click throughs”. The percentage of readers who click through to linked videos is very small – well under 10%. That is a disconcerting reality for a guy who has spent a year “perfecting” video – thinking that it was surely the medium of the future.

Did we all get that wrong?

Is the YouTube video mania destined to subside like every other fad?

Inquiring minds . . .

Best regards,

Leith Anderson and the Golf Lab Gang, JT, JR, Bob P, Dian T, Joel W, Clint S.

Posted in Golf Equipment Chronicles | 1 Comment

The Ultimate Driver Fitting – True Aim Debut

Clubfitter’s Notebook – April 12, 2012

What a Masters!! It’s going to be hard to watch other golf tournaments for a few weeks. We love Bubba because he’s not so Corporate. What’s your favorite color?

Say what you want about Bubba’s 153 yard hooking gap wedge to win the playoff. I thought the shot of the day was Kuchar’s 256 yard hybrid to three feet for eagle on fifteen. Better than the Albatross? Oosthuizen’s 246 yard 4 iron was the purest of pure luck. Very cool on TV from every angle.

Pink Driver Special

If you want to make a STATEMENT we can help. If you love your current driver and would like to change the color to add a little distance – send it out for a “Bubba” of pure pink powder coating. Match that with the same pink shaft.

If you don’t want to go all the way to pink – we can turn your old black driver into a stylish white driver. Powder coating is a great way to rejuvenate a driver that you used to love but looks tired. Give an old friend another chance to get back in your bag. The most reliable technology in golf is a new coat of paint.

Ultimate Driver Optimization – Make Your Driver Better

We keep improving our technical services. We added a guarantee that deserves your consideration. You will hit longer and straighter drives with your own driver after one hour or the service is free.

Measure and Test – Stage One and Two

We take driver optimization to the “next level” in four steps. First we measure the true face angle and loft of your driver and length and flex of your shaft. How sharp is the tool?

Then we test your driver with our Flightscope launch monitor to verify you’re your “launch ballistics” are within the range of acceptable performance. Once your driver checks out, we proceed to the next level.

Reaching the “next level” requires a driver that works for you.

Aiming Your Driver – Stage Three

Tim Tucker applied an old idea a new way to invent True Aim Optical Decals. He took the idea of alignment marks from putters and applied it to drivers and long distance fairway clubs.

The concept is simple. When you aim your driver there is no good visual reference to align the face. Your driver face is designed with bulge and roll and the back is round. How do you know where you’re aiming? You don’t.

True Aim provides perpendicular and parallel lines that are easy to line up with your target line. It makes sense because the lines are square. The whole point is to provide an easy aiming reference that fits your eye.

Tim spent a day at the Golf Lab while the Nationwide Tour was in in Hayward. He has been following the PGA Tour since the beginning of the year. One eye witness on the driving range reported players walking by saying “that was unbelievable”.

Look for our video blog interview with Tim Tucker on Monday.  We’re telling our stories at the “next level”.  We’ve been working on creating the video blog for over a year so this is an exciting time.  When the email arrives on Monday, please have a look.

Accurizing Your Driver – Stage Four

I don’t need to repeat what I said about the Accurizer over the last month. It works.

After we get the best True Aim decal pattern, we add the Accurizer. There’s only one more thing to do – hit the driver – compare performance. We let Flightscope be the judge.

If you missed the detailed Accurizer story, here are two links to the background story.

http://calgolflab.com/blog/2012/03/26/golf-lab-saturday-special-measure-and-adjust-your-driver-accurizer-update/

http://calgolflab.com/blog/2012/03/26/balance-certified-accurizer-or-tour-lock-optivibe/

The Guarantee

Book Your Driver Optimization Fitting. We modify your driver and measure the improvement. Play your driver for a month. If you want it put back the way it was, we’ll do that and give your money back. I’ll even buy you lunch and let you tell me how awful it was for an hour. Ultimate Driver Fitting $150. Accurizers $60.

Accurizer Update

Lawrence Fu is a high school senior headed for Santa Barbara on golf scholarship. We’ve known Lawrence for eight years – working with him on several sets of clubs and lots of experiments. Lawrence is a very good player and a very good judge of equipment.

Lawrence plays a Nakashima driver. He was the first player who returned an Accurizer because “the ball won’t stay in the air”. Since then, two more players with Nakashima drivers have found that the Accurizer reduced backspin too much. That’s pretty good verification that Nakishima drivers are “low spin”.  Most drivers don’t have that problem.

Launch monitor testing shows that the Accurizer reduces backspin by 500 RPM for most players. Launch angle usually comes down by half a degree.

We installed Accurizers for irons in Lawrence’s short irons three weeks ago. He came back last week. “Let’s test the four iron”. We ran the “before and after” test with the Accurizer. Just like the six iron three weeks ago, the dispersion improved by 30%. Accurizers went into the rest of his irons.

When Lawrence likes it, it’s OK. Accurizers work in drivers. They also work in irons.

Graphite Shaft Revolution Update

Lawrence has been thinking about lightweight graphite shafts for his irons. He’s currently playing Shimada 115 gram steel shafts that he chose after extensive testing. They’ve been good.

He said “It seems like the Accurizer is made to order for a lightweight graphite shaft. If I can feel an improvement with steel, why would that improvement not be more with graphite?”

That’s exactly the question I want to answer for very good, very strong players so we signed up a new tester – welcome Lawrence.

For the last year I have been testing lightweight graphite shafts, matched with weighted up heads and counterweighting with our “core customers” – serious golfers from 45 to 65 years old. That setup is chosen every time based on head-to-head performance testing.

Until now, we have not uncovered any serious interest in lightweight graphite shafts among very good young amateur players. I thank Lawrence for volunteering to test as many options as we can imagine. Just because it’s a preposterous idea doesn’t mean it won’t work.

My goal is to verify claims about golf club performance. It is a rare to find a very good player for extensive club testing. We know that the “Golf Lab Build” is great for players who are older and weaker. What about younger and stronger?

BTW: If you see yourself as a good product tester, get in touch with Bob Pegram (650-654-1770).

The “Testing Menu”

Lawrence is playing Adams CB-1′s with Shimada Tour shafts. The Shimada shaft is 115 grams. Flex is extra stiff.

Golf Lab test iron heads are Miura, Vega, Bridgestone and Mizuno.

Golf Lab lightweight graphite shaft choices include AeroTech and Matrix. Aerotech models are the Steel Fiber in 70, 80, 95 and 110 gram weights. Matrix iron shafts include the Studio, Radix and Kujoh.

 

My preferred method is to “test the extremes”. The extreme for Lawrence is a set of Vega VM-02′s shafted with Aerotech Steel Fiber 70 gram shafts. We will set the flex a little stiffer than standard, given Lawrence’s 90 MPH 6 iron swing speed and 180 yard six iron carry distance. We will “Accurize” the set. When Lawrence picks them up, we will set correct lie angles.  It’s a sure thing that no clubfitter in the world would ever recommend 70 gram graphite shafts for Lawrence.

That set is on Clint’s bench this week.

Next week: We’ll choose from Matrix Kujoh or Radix. (Studio is discontinued.) There will be good reason to taste the 80 gram “X” flex Steel Fiber from Aerotech which will be a good test against the Matrix Program at 80 grams. Then, there’s the 95 gram UST Prototype that matches up with the Matrix Program – also at 95 grams.

 

Playing Opportunities: My favorite way to start a fitting is with nine holes. That’s the best way to get acquainted.

The weather is finally looking good. Every Wednesday morning I’m playing with Scott Mosher in Palo Alto for a “Morning at the Muni”. Scott is working on his game with my long-term help. Two Golf Lab customers are invited to play along each week. There is no charge. You’re only on the hook for the “Breakfast Special” – nine holes with cart and any breakfast on the menu for $32. Starting time is a little after eight. Breakfast will be over about ten thirty. Call Bob for a reservation (650-654-1770).

Edel Wedge Fitting at Mariner’s Point. Outdoor wedge fitting on natural turf is a unique experience. Our Edel Wedge Fitting system is expanding. A second set of demo heads arrived this week. The Edel fitting system is based on “Tour Weights”. Lighter weights feel and perform better for most amateurs.

An hour and a half is just about right to complete ”fitting for bounce”. We start with short shots around the green and then progress to distances up to 50 yards. A final stop is the bunker.

You will probably want to adjust your wedge swing a little to get best results. Nothing scary.

Edel is the only wedge line that allows a choice of seventeen different shafts. Even so, that just scratches the surface. We take shaft selection “over the top”. We added a dozen models of wedge shafts including all of the high performance graphite models.

You have probably not thought about ”fitting for shaft feel” before because it’s never been done before. The extended Edel shaft fitting system works with wedges all the way down to 52*. There is room at Mariner’s Point to hit wedge shots up to ninety yards. That’s enough room to hit the kind of wedge shot where feel and ball flight are revealed.

Our sessions at Mariner’s Point are Fridays at 8:30 and 10:00. Each session is $75. We have a limit of two players per session.

Edel Wedge Fitting and Demo Special

We’ve been bragging that we broke the code on wedge fitting. It’s just like every other fitting for every other golf club. You never know for sure until you take the clubs to your own course and compare performance under normal conditions.

Wedges can be fitted indoors. We use a combination of lie boards and impact tape. Your natural swing can be discovered indoors just as well as outdoors.

You still have to test. We want to get off to a fast start with Edel. For the month of April, any Edel wedge fitting customer – indoors or outdoors – can “borrow” a set of Edel wedges for a week. That’s a pretty good bargain for $75.

Thanks for reading all the way down to here.

There is always a reward. If you book your Edel wedge fitting – indoors or outdoors – in the next 48 hours – we offer a $25 per club credit on any purchase. If you buy a set of Edel wedges – you could say the fitting is free. Edel wedges come both cast and forged. Cast are $199. Forged are $350.

Best Regards,

Leith Anderson and the Golf Lab Gang JR, JT, Bob Pegram, Joel Whittom, Dian Terova.

Posted in Unclassified | 1 Comment

Golf Lab Masters Week: Activities, Events and Featured Products

$50 and $100 Incentive Coupons

The Best Week of the Golf Year for most of us is Masters Week.  This is the week that starts golf season in the East and Midwest.  Will Masters Excitement help you improve your game this spring?

If you missed our special offers from weeks past – do not despair.  “Measure, Test and Adjust your Adjustable Driver” is a continuing offer.  We added the Accurizer Test, the Driver Optimizer Test and an hour of entertainment for $75.  Why not know the loft and face angle you’re playing?  If you’re leaving distance on the table, why not know how much?

We’ve now delivered over 30 Accurizer test fittings.  Results are becoming predictable.  For most players, backspin comes down about 500 RPM.  Smash factor goes up.  Most of the time we combine a little length trim – usually a half inch to help improve control.  All that is accomplished real time with our on-site workshop.

Each step gets measured.  Players who are sensitive about the length of their driver can test with a surrogate.  Contrary to the conventional wisdom, many players increase distance with a shorter driver.

Most of the Accurizer fittings result from “word of mouth”.  Players install the Accurizer.  Their playing partners notice that they are hitting straighter drives.  The playing partners come get their Accurizer the next week.  If you’re wondering why you’ve never heard about the Accurizer, it is because it is a new product, not in distribution.  It will not be for sale until next month through Golfsmith.

Here’s a link to the original description The Accurizer

Accurizer for Woods

Link to the Accurizer Website

If you don’t want to go through all the rigmarole, just come by and we’ll install an Accurizer while you wait – $60.  No appointment required for simple Accurizer installation.

One other interesting result is that three Accurizers that came back were all from Nakashima drivers.  If you had any doubt that the Nakashima was low spin – for three out of three players who installed the Accurizer to bring them back because the ball wouldn’t stay in the air is a precise indication of low spin.

Get your Next Accurizer Free

We’re working with Balance-Certified to find out just how good the Accurizer might be.  That includes a video to help get the word out.

If you buy an Accurizer and love it – if you’ll tell your story on camera we’ll install your second Accurizer free.  (You’re going to need two more for your fairway metals.)

John Ruark and the “Next Level of Putting”

Our special offer for Putting Club last week was “bring a friend for free”.  The emphasis was on the basics:  aim, stance, stroke, putter adjustment and an introduction to thought management.

We’re offering another option.  The Next Level of Putting introduces a completely original method to create your own pre-performance routine based on research from Dr. Lanny Johnson author of “There’s More to Putting than Meets the Eye” and Dr. Joan Vickers “Quiet Eye” findings.

Dr. Johnson contributes an innovative alignment technique incorporating positioning the right index finger down the shaft with the face aligned with the target.  The scientific term is “proprioception”.

Dr. Vickers contributes studies of “how athletes see”.  Much of her work has now been translated to golf.  There is a specific way to trace the line to the target with your eyes to produce best results.

If you’re looking to take your putting to the “next level” – call for an appointment.  John is at the Golf Lab Fridays and Saturdays.  He will accommodate our “bring a friend for free” offer – $75.

Friday Mornings at Mariner’s Point

We finally broke the code on the wedge fitting process.  Our testing was not severe enough.  The breakthrough was to develop a testing scenario that allows the high bounce Edel wedge designs to work their magic.

If you’re going to practice wedges, don’t find the lushest, thickest, greenest grass you can.  Any wedge is fine from a perfect lie.

We started working shorter pitches out of divots.  That’s a good test.  You can’t pick a 60* wedge out of a divot.  Then we found a little bare dirt.  Finally, we went to the bunker.  That’s a good rotation.

The key to understanding the Edel wedge line is that the ENTIRE LINE is high bounce.  Even the lowest bounce Edel wedges are higher than most of the highest bounce wedges from other makers.

For the last several years, all of the artistry in wedge design has gone into sole grind and groove technology.  A few years ago, all sand and lob wedges looked the same.  The sole was the venerable “Sarazen Grind” – extremely good in loose sand but not much good out of divots and bare dirt.  There is a good description of the limitations of the Sarazen Sole on the website of a wedge designer that shares some design philosophy with Edel.   Here is link to Reneker Wedges where they discuss that: Problems with the Sarazen Grind

Scratch was the first boutique wedge company to begin to match a players “angle of attack” with sole grind.  The adopted nuances that included shaving the heel, toe, leading and trailing edges.  By narrowing and re-shaping soles, wedges became playable at high “initial” bounce angles.

Edel’s innovation was teaming up with Mike Adams to create a “wedge fitting process”.  As administered successfully by Adams, the method is to first make sure that a player’s swing “activates the bounce”.  Adams is adamant to “never fit a flaw”.  That will require a change of technique by players who are used to positioning the ball back in their stance and picking pitches and chips.

Once swinging correctly, the player hits through a fitting sequence of eight progressive bounce angles to determine which produces the best “interaction” with the turf.  The perfect wedge swing makes a sharp, descending blow without “digging”.  A little “squeak” from the fringe or “thunk” from a bunker indicates a good match.

The beauty of the line is that it “makes sense”.  Edel coding matches a sole grind and bounce with a catchy name:  Sweeper, Picker, Nipper N, Nipper W, Pincher, Trapper, Driver, Digger.

We have two Friday morning wedge fitting sessions a week.  Mariner’s Point at 8:30 and 10:30.  If you come to the 8:30 session you can stay until noon for extra practice.  That’s a good way to get your short game off to a good start.

Edel Wedge Fitting:  $75 for 1.5 hours combined fitting and practice.  Reservation required.  Call Bob Pegram (650)654-1770.  This is the best deal in golf and there are only four slots per week.  Private wedge fitting sessions can be scheduled for any time at Mariner’s Point.  $150 – one or two players.

“Over the Top” Attitude

Very few readers know much about David Edel.  I’d like to change that.  In my opinion, David is the most important independent American golf club designer.  My opinion is based on what he has accomplished over a fifteen year period.

In the late 90′s David convinced Henry Griffits – at the time the dominant custom club line that supplied PGA Professional fitters – to offer a custom putter line.  The concept was to fit by aim.  Testing shapes from blade to mallet and details like hosel shape, offset and alignment markings resulted in a fitting system designed to help a player aim “inside the hole”.  The Edel fitting system permits over a billion individual variations to assemble a fitting model that is then reproduced faithfully in a state-of-the-art machine shop.

A personally fitted and built one-of-a-kind putter was novel at the time and gained a little momentum until the project ran into cost and selling price problems.  The high end got a little too high.

Griffits eventually backed out of the custom putter market.  David persevered.  His goal?  The most precise, most adjustable putter he could imagine.  Simply put:  the best it could possibly be.  Those guys always go over the top.

Edel putters are totally customized from head shape and hosel design to custom, interchangeable face plates to adjust loft and multiple weight options.  Custom made Edel putters with two extra face plates and a weight kit sell up to $1000.  Edel is the only custom putter maker that offers interchangeable face plates to adjust loft.  I don’t blush to describe an Edel putter as a “precision machined instrument”.

The Golf Lab is the exclusive Edel Putter and Wedge Fitting Center in San Francisco.  Edel Putter fittings are $75.  Any Edel putter owner from any vintage     who would like to check original specifications can make a no-charge appointment to measure and re-test for aim and stroke.  Just one of those “over the top” services that we are proud to offer with Edel.

 

Link to Edel website

“Morning at the Muni” – Mosher Makeover

We’re good to go Wednesday morning’s right after 8:00 AM – Leith Anderson and Scott Mosher – victim of the “Mosher Makeover”.  We’ve been in hiatus for bad weather and still won’t play in the rain but this Wednesday we’ll be at the Muni ready to go.  One spot still open.  Call Bob.

Link to “Mornings at the Muni” video

Two Free Junior Fitting Slots this Week

As part of our continuing support for juniors – we have two openings for “Junior Competition Fittings” this week.  If you know a competitive junior who hasn’t had any help, give Bob a call for details.

Thanks for Reading

We’re selling golf clubs.  We have the best performers of the season picked out.  If you book a fitting and decide that a new club is in order, here’s a little incentive for you to make your appointment before the end of the month.

$50 Coupon for any club purchase, reshaft or service over $100.

$100 Coupon for any club purchase, reshaft or service over $500.

Best regards,

Leith Anderson and the Golf Lab Gang

Posted in Unclassified | 1 Comment

Graphite Shaft Revolution

New State of the Art in Iron Set Make-up

Is there anything different, yet?

It happened twice last week.  Old customers who bought “state of the art” Miura iron sets years ago brought them “back home” for a visit.  Both were Miura Player’s blades on Aerotech 95′s and 110′s that wouldn’t be different if we built them this week.

Well, a couple things would be different.  Miura made a slight change to the Player’s Blade a few years back.  They stamped the Miura logo on the muscle.  Other than that, it takes a close look.

The shafts would be lighter weight Aerotech Steel Fibers – 70 or 80 grams.  Heads would be a little heavier.  When you reduce shaft weight by 65 grams – there are more options to change the feel and performance of the club.

With all the money that goes into developing and marketing new shafts every year – Aerotech hasn’t changed anything in ten years.  Not even the paint job.  As Chris Hilleary likes to say:  “If it isn’t broke, don’t fix it.”

Aerotech1

This year’s “New Big Thing” in iron shafts – in use on Tour by Kuchar and Snedeker with a dozen others in testing – is a ten year old model.  And Chris Hilleary didn’t need to change the paint job.  I think that’s very cool.

It should also make you wonder how important year to year changes in shaft design might be.

How old is Dynamic Gold? I just answered my own question.

Maybe the real value in iron shafts is “no change”.

“New State of the Art” wins again.

What are the odds that two players with Miura-Aerotech setups would come home in the same week?  One was playing six year old Miuras – the other ten year old Miuras.  Shafted with Aerotech Steel Fiber 95′s and 110′s.  That was “lightweight” back then.  Do you need any more information to understand why making very good golf clubs is a really bad business?

They asked the key question:  “Do you have anything better, yet?”

Good news.  I do.  I have the “Puppy Dog”.

I gave each of them a complete set of Vega VC-03′s shafted with stiff Aerotech Steel Fiber 70 gram shafts.  They took them out for a round of golf.  They came back.  One adopted his puppy dog on the spot.

The other player decided to test his options.  He’s taking advantage of the Golf Lab high performance demo program.  In the next month he’ll test four sets.  He wants to compare Aerotech 70 gram Steel Fiber in both 70 and 80 gram weights with the Matrix Kujoh and Program models.  He’s still not sold on the radical design of the Vega VC-03 iron head so he wants to test the Miura 501.  No problem.

Vega VC-03 address  Vega VC-03 back

Miura 501 back   Miura 501 face

That’s our high performance demo program.  A month of playing and testing $2000 irons for just $300.

Of the last 30 sets we’ve sold – all sales closed after a lengthy period of hands-on-testing.  All “new design” sets have been some combination of lightweight graphite shafts from Aerotech or Matrix, a Miura 501 or Vega VC-03 iron head – balanced with slightly heavier head weight and some kind of counterweight in the handle.  That’s an entirely new way to build a set of irons.

Why not?  If you’re looking for something better, why keep playing the same old thing?

The Ultimate Challenge – Better or Free

Does it always have to come down to this?

Do I have to say that I guarantee measurably better performance from the “new design” irons – or the fitting is free?  OK.

Here’s my offer.  I will put a new iron in your hands that you will hit straighter – measured by the “grouping radius” on the Flightscope.  Your shots will be more solid – measured by “smash factor”.  I don’t go by carry distance or club head speed.  Most of the time, highest club head speed indicates the “worst fit”.

After we get indoor numbers – you will take the test clubs to the range – to be sure.  If that looks good but you need more experience – or want to explore the options for feel and performance – you can join the demo program.

My goal is to eliminate any doubt about the clubs in your hands.

Iron fitting $150 – results guaranteed or you don’t pay.

Make your reservation now.

You can see that we’re trying to make this game a little more fun – on your side and on our side.  So, just to see who’s reading the fine print and is willing to make a quick decision – for the first six callers – I’ll offer the same Iron Fitting for $75 – half price.  Call Bob Pegram (650) 654-1770.

Best Regards,

Leith Anderson and the Golf Lab Gang

PS:  This deal isn’t only for the “Big Money Guys”.  Even though we feature Miura and Vega – the two best of the Japanese boutique foundries – we have extremely economic alternatives.

One thing that doesn’t change is the shaft.  We will always focus on the best shafts for irons.  Iron heads offer a lot of choice.  The best Japanese forged iron heads cost over $100 each at wholesale delivered in the US.  Even at $250 per club – adding the shaft – the labor – it isn’t a high margin product.

We can fit any iron head with exactly the same shaft and build that we do with our top-of-the-line Miuras and Vegas.  We rebuild and reshaft your own irons for $85 per club.  If you have a nice set of forged iron heads, that could be a good option.

They will be set up exactly like our brand new, top of the line Miuras and Vegas.

The only difference is the head.  We have excellent cast heads that make great sets – built to our standard – for just $99 per club.  High performance doesn’thave to cost a lot of money.  If you’re spending money on your irons, put it into the shafts.

Accurizer is getting Hot

If you’ve been reading Golf Lab emails for the past month you might be a little bored hearing about the Accurizer every week.

Hey, this is America.  Four weeks later the Accurizer should be out of the news.  Move on to the next gimmick.

If that’s what you think, you’re missing the point.  Let’s take this story from the top one more time.

First of all, Accurizer works.  This Saturday we installed ten Accurizers for no charge at $60 each.

P.P.S.:  Please forward this link to your golfing buddies. Thanks.

Posted in Unclassified | Leave a comment

Check your Aim, your Stroke and your Putter – $75 – “Bring a Friend” for Free

If you’ve been “lurking” all winter – reading our inspiring emails about getting better at golf – but you haven’t done anything about it – yet – here’s your chance.

We’re offering our “Welcome to Scientific Putting” session for half price – and you can bring a friend for free.

You will be a hero this year making scramble putts.

For the next two weeks we are offering evening and weekend hours on Friday and Saturday.  Get your best partner and book a time with Bob Pegram.  650-654-1770.

If you’re looking forward to all the promises and guarantees, keep reading.

John Ruark leads the “Welcome” session.  It is 1.5 hours long.

John starts with a check of YOUR aim with YOUR putter.  If you aim outside the hole – like most golfers who have not trained themselves to aim – your stroke will “compensate”.  That means you don’t know what you’re doing.  That’s not what you want.

Most putters are too long.  Incorrect putter length can force you into an awkward stance.  That makes putting even harder.  You don’t want that either.

Stance and putter length are examined.  The goal is a balanced, athletic stance, eyes over the ball with arms hanging loosely from your shoulders.  Stand that way and have your partner lay a putter in your hands if you want a self-check for putter length.  It will be at least an inch too long – or too short.  You probably never measured your putter before.

Putters can be lengthened and shortened in our workshop and returned to action.

The essence of a natural, repeatable stroke is to let “gravity be your friend”.  Tempo and timing of a player’s stroke are tested.  Drills are demonstrated to players who “swat” the ball in order to smooth out their strokes.

With the basics covered, we step up to science.  Player’s strokes are tested with the Science and Motion Putt Lab.  The SAM is the state of the art gizmo for analysis and training.  Every aspect of your stroke is recorded.  We will describe how tournament players use the SAM for training.  “Knowing your stroke” is required for successful putting.

Here is a link to the Science And Motion (SAM Putt Lab) website.

These examples show some of the SAM feedback about your swing:

SAM Putt1

Sam Putt3

There is more on their website (see link above).

Another part of the presentation is an introduction to “thought management” using the Focus Band.  The Focus Band is a gizmo that detects the source and intensity of brain waves.  It is in latent discovery by a few PGA Tour players who have shown improvement and credit the Focus Band.  The Focus Band detects when a player is “in the zone”.  It also detects “interruptions”.  The Focus Band is useful in developing a “seamless” pre-shot routine.

That’s our approach to scientific putting – a lot of experience in an hour and a half.   It is a great way to spend some time with a friend.  We’ll never tell that you got a free ticket.

LOCAL RULES:  This is a very aggressive promotion.  We are doing it to bring new customers to the Golf Lab.  It’s a bargain for us if a happy customer brings a friend who has never been to the Golf Lab before.  If two Golf Lab Customers want to come together – great.  Please be generous and pay $75 each.

About John Ruark

John has been coming to the Golf Lab from Marin County for over ten years.  He’s one of those guys who have a deep interest in golf clubs and performance under pressure.  Over the years he chased every theory of clubmaking – experimenting with over length, single length and short clubs.

He proved his mettle a few years ago winning the Senior Championship at San Geronimo.  That’s a great accomplishment for a 77 year old pilot who weighs 150 pounds.

Then a physical challenge set in that prevents John from making a full swing.   But he can still putt so he resolved to learn everything that he could about putting.

John became our SAM Putt Lab (SAM) Specialist.  To learn the SAM, John read and indexed every page of the masterwork on the science of putting by Lanny Johnson and Howard Twitty – There is More to Putting than Meets the Eye.  The Johnson and Twitty book combines an MD author and trained scientist with a Tour Player known as one of the best putters of his day.  Five years’ work, 500 pages by the authors.  Hundreds of hours of study by John.

If you have a serious interest in putting you should get a copy.  This could be one of the most important books ever written on putting and no one even knows about it.  Now you do.

John is the Golf Lab contact with Focus Band.  He is in frequent contact with Henri and Graham Boulton – the Australian inventors – via SKYPE.  This is another technology that is very early in its life cycle.  Rod Pampling is the poster boy.

In the Bay Area, Alex Murray is the instructor who has done the most personal work with the Focus Band.  He brought one of his students – Gavin Coles – to the Golf Lab for an introduction a few months ago.  John and Alex have developed a relationship based on exploring the Focus Band technology.  They’re coming up on 100 hours of “practice” over several months.  This is cutting edge technology that is getting attention from Tour Pros.  As you can see, it is still in early experimental stages.

John is offering these “Welcome to Scientific Putting” sessions to give Golf Lab customers a good chance to get acquainted with the breadth of services to help players get to their “Next Level”.

From the “Welcome” session, several options are available for players who want to develop a training program for putting.

Best Regards,

Leith Anderson and the Golf Lab Gang

P.S.:  Please forward a link to this article to your golfing buddies. Thanks.

Posted in Unclassified | Leave a comment

Golf Lab Saturday Special – “Measure and Adjust Your Driver” – Accurizer Update

Not that many years ago the golf industry was debating whether swappable shafts and adjustable heads would become popular for drivers.

That debate is over.  Who could have imagined drivers as advanced as they are today?  Modern drivers are a wonder of adjustability.

But there’s a problem.  You can’t know the true loft or face angle of your driver by reading the number stamped on the bottom.

Driver heads are manufactured by the millions.  The published tolerance is plus or minus one degree – both ways.  The actual variance is more than that.  We have measured 9* drivers at 11* – and at 7*.

When you change the loft, you change the face angle.

If you don’t know where you started, how will you know where you end up?

You need to match the loft and face angle with your swing to reach maximum distance.  Optimized ballistics and desired shot shape are not a matter of trial and error.  Random experimentation on the range hoping to hit the magic combination is a waste of time.  Clubfitting determines the correct specification.  Then, professional gauges measure your driver.

If you’re a right-handed player who wants to hit a draw your swing path must be inside-out between two and six degrees.  Four degrees is a good target.

Face angle at impact “open to target and closed to path” produces a draw.  Here’s a simple example.  Swing 4* inside-out, put the face angle at 2* open and you get a nice draw.

That means that the most amateurs – including very good amateurs – would do very well with a driver with correct loft and 2* CLOSED face angle.

The “conventional wisdom” in driver fitting today says that “open face angles are good”.  Nonsense.

Open face angles can be good for PGA Tour Players.  Their swings are different.  The more flamboyant players like Bubba Watson will vary their swing paths wildly from inside-out to outside-in.  They adjust face angles “on the go”.  That is not advisable for most amateur players who don’t play and practice for six hours every day.

PGA Tour players have more extreme inside-out swing paths.  The reason they like open face angles is that they add a little clubhead speed at impact by “rotating” the clubhead just prior to contact.  That requires complex timing.  The more extreme the swing path, the faster the rotation of the clubface, the more difficult the timing.

Step One:  Measure Your Driver

Find your current driver specifications.  We measure your driver on the only “PGA Tour Gauge” quality instrument in the Bay Area.  This is what the gauge looks like.  Ours came from the Callaway Tour Van.

  Driver Gauge with Club

 You will know the true loft and face angle of your driver.  You will also know the length, swingweight and flex.

Step Two:  Adjust Your Driver to Your Swing

You hit your driver with Flightscope radar launch monitor analysis.  The Flightscope records swing speed, ball speed, launch angle and spin rate.  It crunches the numbers and tells you how close you are to mathematically perfect.

We adjust the loft and face angle of your driver to improve “launch ballistics” – if we can.  This should not be a worry.  Half of the drivers that come into the Golf Lab for performance testing are just fine the way they are.  That’s nice to know.

Step Three:  Accurizer Test

If you haven’t been getting Golf Lab email recently – we think we’ve discovered a gizmo that is really, really good.  It is the Balance-Certified Accurizer for Drivers.  It reinforces the shaft just below a player’s lower hands – the point of maximum deflection.

Fred Sherburne is a very strong young player who came in for a “shaft fitting”.  He was hitting an extremely stout shaft – a 73 gram Mitsubishi Whiteboard in “X” flex.  Fred was a great Accurizer tester for us.  We got indoor results on the Flightscope that showed a “minor improvement” – keeping in mind that all launch monitor testing should be viewed with suspicion.  To begin, you’re only recording a few shots from each club with each player.

We were interested to know what “minor improvement” (six yards increased carry distance) would look like outdoors.

Here’s what Fred had to say:

“It was almost night and day between swinging my driver with and without the Accurizer.  I hit a few solid drives with the Accurizer installed and the trajectory seemed quite a bit straighter than before.  Not convinced that the Accurizer was the reason for this I took it out and tried a series of shots without it.  The high draw I saw with the Accurizer quickly went right back to hooking more than 35 yards to the left just like normal. 

So now being about 50-50 convinced I put the Accurizer back into my driver.  Sure enough my hook turned back into a high draw.  With this new piece of equipment I pictured my drives holding fairways and not trickling ten yards into the left rough.  I’m looking forward to playing with the Accurizer.”

—Fred Sherburne, March 21, 2012

Measure and Test Your Driver – Optimize Your Driver – Special Offer – $75 for an hour of analysis, testing and recommendations.

For this Saturday, and next week only – our complete “test and measure” package.  Everything I just described plus a loft and lie test.  Everything you need to make sure your golf clubs aren’t holding you back from making the “next level”.

If you’ve been lurking email – thinking about making your move to come into the Golf Lab and start getting better at golf faster – this is your invitation.

If you just want an Accurizer with no testing, stop by any time and we’ll install one in your driver.  Straighter drives.  $60.  Guaranteed performance or your money back.

Best Regards,

Leith Anderson and the Golf Lab Gang

The Accurizer Phenomenon Continues

P.S.:  Please forward this email to your golfing buddies. Thanks.

Posted in Golf Equipment Chronicles | Leave a comment

Balance Certified ACCURIZER or Tour Lock OptiVibe?

This article is for golfers who know that balancing golf clubs to improve consistency is an effective upgrade.  Why not tweak your current irons with a handful of counterweights and make them work better- right now?

Even better – drop a chunk of kryptonite into your driver shaft and hit straighter drives immediately.  That’s a low-grade miracle.

Balance-Certified and Tour Lock are the two companies that supply golf club balancing systems – “gizmos” that go down the shafts.  Each is effective in different ways.  If you are planning to counterbalance your clubs, this article will be helpful in choosing your supplier and your method.

Balance-Certified “Accurizer” – the latest invention from Jeff Lindner. 

I heard a rumor that Sergio Garcia was considering an endorsement contract with Balance-Certified.  If you search the Internet you will see plenty of pictures of Sergio with inserts sticking out of his club handles.  Those are Balance-Certified Accurizers.  Sergio is giving Accurizers credit for improving his world ranking from over number 80 to under number 17.

SergioGarcia3  Sergio with Accurizer 2 Sergio with Accurizer

 The Balance-Certified Accurizer adds a new dimension to balancing golf clubs – structural reinforcement of the golf shaft.  The Accurizer is designed with bushings that expand when tightened to create a rigid section precisely where the shaft deforms during the swing.

Limit shaft distortion?

Does that matter?

Needless to say, “limiting shaft distortion” is not a popular topic with shaft manufacturers.  What if Jeff Lindner “proves” that all shafts need reinforcement?  That possibility makes the Accurizer very interesting.  Imagine shaft companies admitting:  “We can’t make a shaft that stands up to high swing speeds.   We need help.”

Robot testing is conclusive.

Robot Testing

 Link to Balance Certified here.

The Accurizer is coming out at a time when it seems intuitively obvious that the market will pay attention.  In early testing at the Golf Lab we have found measurable performance improvement with our ultra-lightweight iron shafts – Accurized.

The Golf Lab is equipped for “human testing”.  We installed Accurizers in our high performance demo sets.  If you want to end the wonder – once and for all – just take an Accurized set to play on your course hitting to familiar targets with your own balls.  That’s Testing – with a Capital “T”.

If you’re keeping tabs on the viral marketing buzz – we ordered an extra twenty Accurizers for drivers this week.  Five sold on Friday, six on Saturday.   We do not require fittings for Accurizers for drivers.  No one has brought one back yet.  By Golf Lab standards the Accurizer is becoming a hot product.

If you are at a distance – you can order an Accurizer Kit.  Installation is simple if you have the right tools.  Accurizers are $60 for drivers and $30 for irons.  They are easy to remove and re-use.

It’s been years since the golf industry had a truly “hot product”.  The last one the old timers remember is the Orlimar Tri-Metal from fifteen years ago.  Before that Adams had a nice run with the “upside down” fairways.  Callaway set the standard with the Big Bertha run in the early 90′s.

Nothing is perfect.  We began to find the limits of the Accurizer this week.

Is the Accurizer Too Heavy?

The Accurizer weighs twenty grams for irons.  That was a red flag for me from Day One.

Over the last ten years, I’ve conducted more launch monitor counterweight fittings and installed more counterweights than any clubfitter in golf.  Practically all Golf Lab customers over the last ten years who indulged in “tweaking” their clubs came away with some form of club balancing.

The problem with fitting counterweights in irons is that the process is tedious and doesn’t always yield definitive results.

Our procedure is to test a player’s own clubs – normally the six iron – with a series of counterweights – 8 gram, 12 gram and 16 grams.  It is highly unusual for a player to test the best with a 20 gram counterweight.

I almost never go heavier than 20 grams for irons.

We measure improvement.  The launch monitor keeps track of swing path and face angle at impact.  The deviation in swing path from shot to shot tightens up.  Face angle at impact also becomes more consistent.  There is usually a distance improvement.  But increased distance does not come from faster swing speeds.  It comes from solid contact.  The very best result with counterweights is that a player’s swing speed goes down but ball speed goes up.  That’s the “smash factor” at work.

Those are all good things.  The downside is it takes an hour of launch monitor testing to find the best weight.  After that, installing a set of counterweights costs $200 – in round numbers.  So, counterweighting is a $300 investment in “tweaking” your clubs.  (Weights are re-usable.)

Put $300 into set of clubs I already own?

That might be a very good investment if you’re thinking about “new irons” that will just be another set of what you already have.

It is very rare when balancing golf clubs does not yield a measurable improvement in consistency.  Over the years, the main reason that we have been so successful with junior girls is that counterweighted clubs are a clear advantage for juniors.  All of the very good junior players we have worked with – minus one – are using counterweights in their irons or driver.

Definitely Too Heavy for Some Players

The key for all of the gizmos is to “test the extremes”.  You can be sure of one thing when it comes to golf – nothing works for everyone.  The trick is finding where the gizmo works, and where it doesn’t.

We know from testing that the Accurizer is NOT too heavy for most players.  That includes Kaz Hoffman who put Accurizers in all of his irons and described irons without Accurizers as feeling “broken”.   He added 20 grams to 130 gram shafts without problems.

We have installed Accurizers in some of our high performance test sets – lightweight graphite shafts – and that’s where they shine.  If you were going to imagine a perfect scenario it is to bring back a little “heft” and provide reinforcement for lightweight iron shafts.

The Downside

A couple of weeks ago one of the top women on the San Jose State team came in looking for a hybrid she could hit 200 yards.  That was easy.

I took a close look at her irons.  Stock Callaways – soft, lightweight shafts – just exactly the perfect setup for Accurizers.  We installed them in every other club and she took the set to play for a week.

Perceived loss of distance.  Always bad.

We went back to the launch monitor and re-tested.  Sure enough, her irons with Accurizers were “shorter”.  That’s when we ran the counterweight fitting sequence.  The result?  8 gram counterweights added 10 yards of carry distance over the Accurizer – and over her irons without balancing.  Conclusion?  Total weight matters.

That was an important finding.  We always want to think that the “Next Big Thing” will obsolete everything that came before.  Never so.

It is important to note that for at least one very good player – the “plain old counterweight” produced the best performance.

What does that mean for slower swing speed players?  Be sure to test counterweights in 8 and 12 grams against the Accurizer.

Reward for Reading this Far Offer – Free Balance Your Clubs Fitting

It’s time for incentives.  You’ve probably been thinking about coming in for an updated fitting with the latest Flightscope radar.  I’ve talked about how effective the new tools are so I won’t go back over that ground here.

Book any custom fitting service – from “Driver Optimization” to “Shaft Fitting” – for $150 – and we’ll spend another hour working on tweaking your clubs for balance – no charge.  If you’re a bit skeptical, that should calm the fear.

Call Bob for an appointment.  650-654-1770.

Best Regards,

Leith Anderson and the Golf Lab Gang

PS:  This was the first “warning” I wanted to get out.  There are times when Balance-Certified works better and times when Tour Lock works better.  I’ll do an in-depth article on the two companies in the very near future.  It is an interesting competition – Jeff Lindner “against” John Johnson.  Both are captivating personalities with great stories – and quite a bit of competitive spirit.  All markets are better when there are two great competitors.

P.P.S. - Please forward this link to your golfing buddies. Thanks.

Posted in Golf Equipment Chronicles | Leave a comment

ACCURIZER Going Viral? – Golf Lab Weekend Schedule

Update on the Accurizer for Drivers.  It is showing signs of “going viral”.

We quarantined the Accurizer for the first few weeks.  We invited Golf Lab clients for hands-on testing.  We wanted to understand what the Accurizer actually does.

Here are links to earlier articles (newest to oldest):

http://calgolflab.com/blog/2012/03/07/follow-up-on-accurizer-shotmaker-edel-wedges-and-ust-torque-rated-shafts/

http://calgolflab.com/blog/2012/03/07/accurizer-update/

http://calgolflab.com/blog/2012/02/20/pga-show-report-new-ideas-in-shaft-fitting/

About a dozen Golf Lab clients went through the program and had Accurizers installed in their drivers.  The Flightscope picked up small increases in ball speed and smash factor.  The question remained – would small launch monitor measurements show up on the course?

Those “early adopters” are starting to return for Accurizers in their fairway metals, hybrids and irons.  There is no doubt, the Accurizer gets credit for straighter drives by every customer who has reported back.

In the last week, three “‘strangers” called – asking if they could just bring their drivers in to get the Accurizer installed – no testing required – no questions asked.  They hit their playing partner’s driver over the weekend and the feel and ball flight was so much better there was no doubt.

 

Accurizer for Driver – Fitting no longer required.

This weekend, if you’re “out and about” stop by the Golf Lab and get a new Accurizer for your driver.  $60 – installed.  No fitting required.

Here is what it looks like:

If you would like to do a “before and after fitting” set aside half an hour.  We’ll test your driver with the Flightscope for ball speed, launch angle and spin rate.  We’ll note carry distance and spin rate.  Then we’ll install the Accurizer and compare results immediately.  $75.  “By chance or appointment”.

 

The Workshop is Open

One convenience we’re proud to offer is our “open workshop”.   If you’d like to check your lofts and lies, make any required adjustments and get new grips installed – all in one visit – our goal is to get routine maintenance done in one trip.  Coming back is expensive.

This weekend, call ahead to make sure we have the grips you prefer in stock.

Brand new Golf Prides or Lamkins installed – $9 each.

“Putting Club” this Saturday

We’re putting on Putting Club this Saturday afternoon.

Two weeks ago we advertised a “putting checkup” – a session presented by John Ruark and Leith Anderson.

Four players came by and spent most of the afternoon checking aim, testing stroke, adjusting setup, modifying putters, trying new methods.

This weekend, we’re going to broaden the subject matter.  If you’d like an introduction to the Focus Band – a demonstration – and the demonstrator might very well be you.

Starting at 2. (Come after lunch if you want to practice on the Golf Lab precision putting surface.)

$50 for 2 hours or until we run out of gas.

Call for a reservation (650-654-1770) or arrive “by chance”.

Best Regards,

Leith Anderson and the Golf Lab Gang

P.S. - Please forward a link to this blog to your golfing buddies. Thanks.

Posted in Unclassified | Leave a comment

Donate your Swing to Science – Edel Wedge Fitting – Free at Golf Lab

Edel Certified Filter Green

Edel Certified Fitter

Touring Pros hit the green from 50 yards 99% of the time. Mid-index amateurs miss the green from 50 yards 25% of the time. How would you do on that test?

Improving wedge play is a process. Where do you go for “quality practice” if you need a few thousand repetitions?

Mariner’s Point is the answer. Our Edel Wedge Fittings at the beautifully-kept short game practice area have been successful.

We learned a lot, but we haven’t custom fitted any wedges – yet.

It’s all about the wedge swing. We have not found a player yet who made a “correct” wedge swing according to the Mike Adams fitting model.

It doesn’t make any sense to try to fit a wedge until you’ve mastered your wedge swing.   Here’s what that means:

It’s a partial swing. With a 60* wedge for most players that’s going to be a carry distance of 40 to 60 yards. The goal is to “flight” the ball. You’ll know what that looks like when you see it.

A flighted wedge will not look like most of my wedge shots over the years – lobbed onto the green to run out wherever they wanted. It’s going to “zing” up there and put out the hooks when it hits.

Our Mariner’s Point fitting sessions turned out to be great for wedge practice – but until a player’s wedge swing becomes natural and repeatable it doesn’t make sense to try for a precise wedge fit.

A correct wedge swing is not difficult to execute. Get your weight to your left side – and keep it there. Point the handle of your wedge at the meridian of your body. The correct swing finishes leftward and activates the sole of the club for forgiveness.

You can allow your takeaway to be a little outside-in with a quick wrist break. Your left arm will be parallel to the ground at the “top of your swing”. From there, the downswing is left.   Finish is low.

Master the concepts and then practice to make the technique your own.

Your ultimate wedges will probably end up shorter and have flatter lies than today. You will probably hold your hands a little lower. Most wedges are set too upright today.

If you want to check your bag, give the Golf Lab a call and we’ll set up a quick no-charge check of your wedge lie angles. Too upright? The risk is “long left”. Too flat? Not likely.

Edel Wedge Sample

If you are interested in the detailed Edel wedge fitting process - link to text.

For a video that explains the Edel wedge system – link to DevotedGolfer.tv. Click on the Edel video (6th from the left).

 

Expert Opinion – Mick Soli

We booked a brief wedge fitting session with Mick Soli – the senior PGA Teaching Professional at Mariner’s Point. He’s been at Mariner’s for fifteen years. Mick is an accomplished player – making a check in the Senior Open last year. Not many career teachers have done that.

Mick is a tinkerer. He loves to take a wedge to his garage and see the effect of a different sole shape on feel and ball flight.

We hit through the Edel fitting system and the results with Mick were “according to plan”. Lower to higher bounce angles gradually decreased the size of his divot.  It’s nice to know that skill is reflected in results.

Mick liked the feel of the highest bounce Edel wedges “in the dirt”. Hitting a 60 degree wedge with 22* of bounce was a unique experience.  When we took the high bounce wedges to hardpan, we found that high bounce doesn’t mean bladed shots.  Mick resolved to come back for more hands-on testing before forsaking his old friends.

If you’re looking for a recognized teacher in an outdoor environment – especially if you have tournament dreams – Mick Soli is a good choice.

Here’s a link to Mick’s website http://www.micksoli.com/

 

“Donate your Swing to Science” – Free Pre Fitting at the Golf Lab 

We’re adding a new fitting service to our list – “indoor pre-fitting” with your wedge. It makes a lot more sense to do the initial adjustments to your wedge stance and swing with the help of video and mirrors – indoors – in comfort.

To jump-start our Edel custom wedge business we’re offering “indoor pre-fittings” for no charge. (We assume that you’re getting ready for our short game clinics at Mariners’ Point).

Set aside half an hour for the free “wedge pre-fitting”. This makes a great combination with our other fitting services – why not combine a free wedge pre-fitting with a $150 full iron shaft fitting? That will be a good way to spend a couple of hours. Plus, what you learn from the shaft fitting will help determine final shaft choice for your wedges.

We’ll see what your wedge swing looks like. It’s going to take half an hour – minimum – to get the fundamentals down. From there, a couple of hours of additional practice would be good before proceeding to the “next level”.

The Next Level is outdoors at Mariner’s Point.

 

Mariner’s Point – Friday Morning – Wedge and Putting Clinic – Edel Wedge Fitting (and Practice) 

Assume that you’ve either been to the Golf Lab “Edel pre-wedge fitting” or you’re 99% to hit the green from 50 yards.  Think of that as a prerequisite.  It is frustrating to confront realities of the “new wedge swing” for the first time, outdoors, expecting immediately improved wedge play.  Preparation will improve results.

Leith Anderson and John Ruark host a “short game clinic” on Friday mornings. The program is forty five minutes of “Edel Wedge Practice and Fitting” and another forty-five minutes of work on your putting setup and stroke.

We are offering two sessions: 8:30 to 10 and 10:30 to 12. Each session is $75. If you’re ambitious, you can book both sessions and have a great morning of instruction and practice.

As the Mariner’s Point experience evolves, we’re planning to add playing 9 holes on the Mariner’s Point par 3 layout. Where better to work on your wedges and short game than a 1000 yard par three course? Mick Soli promises that the greens at Mariners are “the best greens in the Bay Area”.

Golf doesn’t have to take all day. Come out for a couple of hours or half a day on Friday mornings.

 

“Morning at the Muni” Update

The most efficient way to fit golf clubs is to see a player on the course. “Morning at the Muni” is a completely free service. We play the back nine at Palo Alto and finish the morning with a great breakfast.

The very best way to book a fitting is to reserve a “Morning at the Muni” followed up with an afternoon fitting session for iron and driver shafts. That makes a great day that will finish in mid-afternoon. It is the best bargain in clubfitting – including nine holes of golf – a couple of hours of indoor launch monitor analysis – follow-up range testing if you still have energy. The best way to make maximum headway in a single day.

A link to a short intro video is here.

Call Bob Pegram at the Golf Lab for an appointment. 650-654-1770.

Best regards,

Leith Anderson and the Golf Lab Gang.

P.S. - Please forward a link to this blog to your golfing buddies. Thanks.

Posted in Fitting Services | Leave a comment

Mornings at the Muni

Come and join Leith Anderson, your golf equipment expert, in 9 holes of golf. Helpful to your golf game and equipment choices. You pay for your greens fee and half a cart – no other cost. Call Bob to reserve a spot 650-654-1770.

Posted in Fitting Services | Leave a comment

Game Changers – 2 Clubs that WILL Make a Difference

Something happened last week that never happened in twelve years at the Golf Lab. We put a new club in a player’s bag and she won a tournament the next week. The new club made the difference winning the championship.

The location was the Stanford Golf Course. The unnamed player (due to NCAA regulations) hit the seventh green from 259 yards on Saturday and again from 250 yards on Sunday. Two birdies. Never hit that green before. One more stroke takes second place.

When a very good player hits the green with a layup it is pleasant surprise. The Adams 3 metal traveled 30 yards farther than expected. Matching a hot head with an extra stiff shaft with a soft tip is an unusual fitting technique that works for some players. If you need a miracle from a fairway metal, the Adams Titanium Face is your best choice.

This is not a totally unique experience. We accepted a return from a player in Reno who said his Adams crush zone titanium-faced driver went “too long”. We replaced it with a standard stainless steel model.

Adams broke new ground in 2011 combining their “crush zone” design with a titanium face. If you haven’t taken a close look at 2012 fairway metals – notice that the new engineering design allows the face to “collapse”.

Here is what the fairway metal looks like:

Adams Fairway faceAdams Fairway gray2

The Adams Technical Advantage

What is the “crush zone” all about?

Most of the real breakthroughs in golf technology lately have been about the ball. Extra distance does not come from the face of the club “trampolining” the ball off the face. Just the opposite. When the face of a club collapses the ball compresses a little more. It is the ball compressing and then springing back off the face that produces extra distance.

Adams covered a “top and bottom” crush zone with design patents. Notice that Nike and Taylor Made incorporated a single crush zone in their new fairway metal models. That allows Adams to claim superior performance.

There is no doubt. If you have the skill to hit the relatively small Adams head size on the button, you will have the longest fairway metal on the planet.

Maruman Shuttle Fairway Metal – Forgiveness in Fairway Metals

The other end of the spectrum is the Maruman Shuttle. The Shuttle is a completely different concept. It is large and flat. For players who are challenged to get the ball in the air from the fairway, the Shuttle is the easiest to hit of all fairways currently available.

The surprising thing about the Shuttle is that it is not for high handicap players only. Low single digit players have choosen the Shuttle over other alternatives. Easy to hit is a virtue.

Buyer beware: There is one problem with the Shuttle and with the Adams Titanium. Off the rack fairway metals are delivered with 43″ (or longer) shafts and very lightweight heads. Both the Adams and Maruman heads weigh less than 210 grams. That might be OK for the Japanese market – but North American standards call for shorter lengths and heavier heads.

We match the PGA Tour standard by bringing the head weight up to 217 grams or so with tungsten weights made for the purpose. We like shaft lengths at 42.5″ – experience suggesting that’s the most popular length on Tour. Why would an amateur play a club longer than a professional?

The Maruman Shuttle is the best choice for players who are challenged to get the ball in the air with traditional fairway metals. The Maruman Shuttle is the easiest to hit fairway metal on the planet.

Here is the Maruman Shuttle:

Maruman shuttle top

How about “just plain vanilla?”

There’s another choice if you just need a fairway metal that you like the look of – that’s easy to hit and fit to your swing. We have bins of the best head shapes from the past that can be paired up with a high performance shaft – or a plain old bargain shaft.

If you’re thinking $150 instead of $300 for a fairway metal. That’s the way to go. We can include a fairway metal fitting with any driver fitting.

Working with the Golf Lab you can take the fairway metals of your choice to the range to test from natural grass.   That’s the ultimate fit.

Best regards,

Leith Anderson and the Golf Lab Gang

P.S. - We are working hard to expand our customer list. Please forward a link to this blog to your golfing buddies. Thanks.

Posted in Golf Equipment Reviews | Leave a comment

Follow up on: Accurizer, Shotmaker, Edel Wedges and UST Torque-Rated Shafts

I had a rare complaint this week. It was about the Balance-Certified Accurizer.

The Meadow Club Member argued that I was “hawking gizmos” by advocating adding weight back – spoiling our “ultra-light graphite shafts for irons” mantra.

Let’s nail this one down once and for all. The Accurizer is a legitimate product from an established inventor. It improves the consistency of your swing measured by swing path and face angle at impact. It deserves your attention if you are interested in improving feel and ball flight with your current clubs.

Here is a picture of the insert for wood shafts:

We have tested and installed counterweights in golf clubs for ten years. We called that by various names – counterbalancing, back weighting, and “optimizing” – all depending on the communication style of the day.

Adjusting the balance of golf clubs is a good thing. Launch monitor testing proves that balanced clubs improve consistency. There is no doubt about that.

We have helped dozens of serious senior and junior players win tournaments and scholarships. Every junior player that we have worked with and most of the senior players have chosen to use balanced clubs after testing. We use both Balance-Certified and Tour Lock systems – depending on the application.

(I’m writing the Update on Sunday, March 4th – in front of the television – “killing two birds with one stone”. McElroy just made a 13 footer to save par on number 1 at the Honda. Is that the tournament?)

Offer for “non-believers”. It occurs to me that there are some golfers who don’t believe that their own clubs can be improved, no matter what they are.

Think about this: How many human body types are there? Infinite.

How many “standard” golf club sets are there? One.

Book a “Club Challenge Fitting”. Reserve three hours. The first hour and a half will be at the Golf Lab testing your clubs and alternatives. We’ll measure and test everything in your bag. We’ll record performance statistics with the Flightscope launch monitor. We will find your “hero clubs” and your “haunted clubs”. Then, we’ll figure out “why?”

Then, you’ll take a trip to the range to verify results.

This week only: “Club Challenge Fitting” – to test, measure and alter your own clubs to improve performance. Including length, weight, lie, grip or balance. This is why we built the Golf Lab the way we did – the workshop is at hand and can make modifications in minutes. No other custom golf shop in the Bay Area provides that convenient service.

(And why would you want to ship your clubs to Scottsdale, AZ for analysis? Better to choose a custom shop that does the work on site.)

We will test the Accurizer for both woods and irons. You will know for sure what the Accurizer means to you.

Here’s the kicker. If we don’t improve your own clubs in ways we can measure – the fitting is free. Call Bob Pegram (650) 654-1770 to book the “Club Challenge Fitting” – $150.

No risk.

The Accurizer is a “Structural Reinforcement”

Postulate that the Accurizer weighs 20 grams for irons and 30 grams for woods. You get the same benefits from that Accurizer weight that you would from any counterweights. You don’t get a choice. With the Accurizer, it’s 20 grams or nothing in your irons. Different weights could work better.

In testing over the last ten years, we have found that 20 grams in an iron shaft is the MAXIMUM WEIGHT that we have found to improve performance. There is a danger that 20 grams is too much.

Drivers are different. The earlier version of the Accurizer – the Balance-Certified Stabilizer- came in two weights – 30 grams and 50 grams. Very good players improved consistency and distance with both weights – meaning that the only way to tell the difference is to test with a launch monitor.

The Accurizer is about two things:  Balance and “structural reinforcement” of the shaft.

(McElroy chips at the flag on three. Announcers called for “play it safe”. Guts ball.)

The real “crazy aunt in the attic” – the question no one wants to answer: What if all shafts deform during a swing and the manufacturers can’t do anything about it? What if Jeff Lindner – rogue scientist from Alabama – proves that ALL golf shafts need reinforcement? That would make a pretty big difference in how custom golf clubs are designed and built.

What if the combined benefits of counterweighting and structural reinforcement help a player hit longer, more consistent shots?

That’s the theory behind the Accurizer. The Accurizer is a back weight AND it reinforces the shaft.

We have installed the Accurizer in a few players’ shafts. Some were ecstatic – Kaz Hoffman leading the way on that. Two customers from two weeks ago came back to have Accurizers installed in the rest of their clubs.

That would not happen if they did not “sense” improvement.

We are talking about the first few golfers on the face of the earth that had a chance to test the Accurizer. This is EARLY IN THE GAME.  A year from now, this could be “old news”.

The Accurizer is not even on the market yet. It will not be introduced until next month by Golfsmith. Golfsmith did their due diligence. They tested on their own. They know that Jeff Lindner is an established inventor with a history of improving the performance of golf clubs by adjusting balance. They have sold Balance-Certified products successfully for years.

If you’re still thinking that “balance is voodoo” – try to remember why.

Our “DEAL” with Jeff – because of our long history of working together – was that we would buy a few out of his first production run – and he would send us a few extras so we could “let them go” to players who might try one – like the result – but not feel it was $60 better. He knows that the Golf Lab can get reliable player testing feedback. The work we are doing is important to Balance-Certified. They need to understand player testing.

The Accurizer has been “miracle product” for enough players to make it worth a test for every player.

The Accurizer is a unique design that includes two expandable rubber bushings under the grip. For irons, the reinforcement is positioned under the upper hand. For woods, the Accurizer is positioned under the lower hand. When the bushings are tightened, the machined aluminum rod between the bushings becomes rigid – reinforcing the shaft at the point most at risk for distortion.

Accurizer fitting takes an hour. $75. Call Bob Pegram for an appointment. (650) 654-1770.   Accurizers cost $30 for irons and $60 for woods – installed.

(Tiger makes birdie on 11 – goes 4 under and “charging?” Rory even at 7.)

The Shotmaker – Now that was a “gizmo”.

Most ”discoveries” come from Golf Lab customers.  Some sound preposterous – that was our opinion when the Ice Man brought the “Shotmaker” into the Golf Lab.

If you are a new reader, the Shotmaker is a tiny graphite shaft reinforcement that slides down the shaft to “reinforce the tip”.  It is held in place with a small expansion nut.

We dropped the Shotmaker into Ice Man’s shafts and the launch monitor said that he was hitting straighter drives. He took that driver to the course and found the same thing. Longer and straighter. What’s the matter with that?  BTW:  Shotmaker is still in the Ice Man’s clubs.

I pitched the Shotmaker for a couple of weeks. We ran testing. Some players hit drivers a lot straighter with the Shotmaker installed. I even got a few love letters. It was a rush.

The Shotmaker comes with a few problems that are not apparent at first. The expansion nut can come loose – meaning that the Shotmaker can rattle. If that happened during a tournament, it would be a big problem.

The Shotmaker does not fit all shafts. The internal dimension of the host shaft needs to match the external dimension of the Shotmaker. That is another problem. Shotmaker matches one manufacturer’s products much better than all others – as you might expect.

I lost interest in Shotmaker.  After working closely with Russ Ryden to understand the sophisticated engineering behind the flex profile it became clear that the Shotmaker was a “random override” to whatever the shaft designers had in mind.  Even with better results, the “random override” issue got to me.

The Shotmaker makes you wonder if any sophisticated shaft engineering concepts even matter?

So that’s why my Shotmaker went south. We still have a few in a box for players who would like to try to improve their accuracy. (High handicap players see more benefit.)

So that’s the difference. The Accurizer is intellectually interesting and it comes from an established inventor.

(McElroy makes another 15 footer to save par on 7. Cool player. Tiger 5 under on 12).

Edel Wedge Fitting System

We learned some things our first week out with the Edel wedge fitting system.

First, the short game practice area at Mariner’s Point is fabulous. Several practice greens, great targets, plenty of grass. If you’re going to push yourself to practice at a public facility, Mariner’s Point is the best in San Francisco. We are so happy with that connection.

We suffered a rude awakening. A wedge shot requires just about the most skill of any club in the bag. Alas, most of us don’t have any idea of what a wedge swing is all about. I found that out this week. I’ve been playing golf for 60 years and never hit a “good” wedge shot until last Friday.

I have not lacked advice. I took a lesson from the wedge master himself – Mike Adams a year ago and a couple from the local short game wiz Kevin Lozares. I just didn’t get it.

The underlying question is “sole shape and bounce angle”. Most wedges today are designed with relatively sharp leading edges and low bounce angles. Most common wedges today have between 4* and 14* bounce angles. Edel wedges are designed with bounce angles from 10* to 24*.   What’s that all about?

What a few of the Edel wedges look like:

(Woods posts birdie, eagle = 62. Can he be a “reformed hero?”)

Wedge Swing Fundamentals

Alas, most amateur players hit very poor wedge shots. Technique tends to be “hands ahead” with a downward strike. That motion requires a lot of skill to execute. The player has to “nip” the ball perfectly to avoid “digging”.

Solid contact requires precise touch – missing in most amateurs who lack practice time.

The Guru of Edel Golf wedge design is Mike Adams. Mike teaches a wristy, trappy stroke from a “head ahead, hands back” setup position. It is awkward the first time around.

Kevin Lozares teaches a “Charlie Wi” approach. Flared stance, quick wrist break, very early release.

There are other wedge swing theorists – the one thing that they all have in common is a wedge swing that “engages the bounce” by getting the club flatter on the ground at impact. That’s what lets the sole shape and bounce angle do their job.

It took me about an hour of practice – coached by John Ruark – to fully understand what Mike Adams and Kevin Lozares were trying to explain to me in their lessons. After the lesson, you have to understand and practice the technique.  I lacked that.

After a couple of hours of work I began to “flight” the ball.  The point is that you might be a few hours of work away from your ideal wedge swing.  That could be the way your first “fitting” comes out.

We’re making wedge fittings a standard Thursday and Friday morning Golf Lab activity. Thursday is one session at 9 AM presented by Leith Anderson. Two players maximum for that 9-11 session. $75.

On Friday mornings, John Ruark will make the trip down from Marin County. We will present two “fitting sessions” – 9:00 – 10:30 and 11:00 -12:30.   All Edel wedge fittings are at Mariner’s Point. The “lunchtime” session might be more convenient for some players.

If you would like to add some practice time to your session – you can schedule extra time at the practice area or on the natural grass range at Mariner’s Point.

(Tiger is “hanging around” waiting to see what happens to Rory at the Bear Trap – remembering the double, double, double finish from year ago.)

Finally: The Torque Story

This will be one of the best stories of the year – if it works out.

A week ago we tested Kaz Hoffman indoors with the Flightscope. We were testing three of the new UST “VTS” series shafts – Velocity, Torque, Speed – is what the labels stand for – in three torque values red=high, white=medium and black=low.

In the Lab testing we got extraordinary results. Kaz loved the “red” or higher torque of the three shafts. That was a counter-intuitive result. Good players with high swing speeds (115 maxed out) are supposed to like low torque shafts.

Kaz took three shafts and two interchangeable Nickent heads to the course. The “red” started hooking a little too much. Alas, experience points out that one of the big problems with fitting golf clubs is that indoors analysis can be very different from outdoors “real life”. Players sometimes swing different outdoors.   That’s why any serious fitting session must include an outdoor option.

Kaz didn’t come to the Golf Lab for his scheduled weekly fitting session. He is swapping torque-rated drivers daily. You’re going to have to stay tuned on this one. Torque is going to be a complicated subject.  Feeling the difference in three shafts – each separated by one degree of torque and nothing else might be the equivalent of the Princess counting five peas under five mattresses.

(Rory cruises past the Bear Trap – beats Tiger – the new Champ is crowned. Anyone who loves golf, loved the finish – beyond “Tigeresque” to go birdie, eagle. )

If you’re planning to get better at golf, the Golf Lab is your best ally. Give call and book one of our specialized fitting sessions.

Best regards,

Leith Anderson and the Golf Lab Gang.

P.S. – Final comments on the Honda.

I like picking up the early coverage on the Golf Channel. What’s more important than the first hole? How about saving par with 13 footer on the first? That’s a good sign that your day might be OK.

McElroy did the same thing on 7 – through seven holes just even par with a couple of fabulous “saves”.   Two missed putts and he’s not the same guy.

Tiger could have finished even better. He missed a couple of putts that might have gone in. But, 62 in the final round at the Honda lets the world know that Tiger is capable of a comeback. Let’s hope that the world loves reformed sinners.

The Honda was great drama – all day. I’m done.

P.P.S. -  We are working hard to expand our customer list. Please forward a link to this blog to your golfing buddies. Thanks.

Posted in Fitting Services | Leave a comment

Accurizer Update

We announced the Balance-Certified Accurizer last week. There’s no wonder you haven’t heard about Jeff Lindner’s latest invention. Golfsmith picked up both Accurizers for Driver and Irons for their stores and catalog. That launch will be late March.

That’s why the Golf Equipment Chronicles is an interesting read. You get important golf equipment news here first.

Here’s what you need to know about Accurizers: The Big Hit was the Accurizer for Drivers – also known as the “Power Transfer Insert” or PTI.

Three of four players who installed Accurizers the first week came back immediately for the rest of their fairway metals. One player thought so highly of the Accurizer for his driver that he installed Accurizers for irons without bothering to test.

One very good young amateur brought his Accurizer back because it “took too much spin off”. That should be very interesting to high spin players.

We sold out the first shipment of four. Seven more came in Friday morning. We just reordered another ten for Saturday delivery. The Accurizer is the closest thing to a hot product that we’ve seen in years.

If there is one simple thing that you can do for less than two hundred dollars – that will take less than an hour and has a chance to make a very big difference in your game – do that first. Then come to the Golf Lab and get an Accurizer installed in your driver.

New Fitting Service – “Before and After” Accurizer Fitting

We’re offering a new “Before and After” fitting for players who want “just the facts”. Hit a series of shots with your driver. Install the Accurizer. Hit another series. Compare results. Radar is like an X-Ray at the moment of impact.

Accurizers change the behavior of the shaft just prior to impact. Measuring that change is one of the great miracles in modern clubfitting technology.

Half an hour. $75. Your current driver shaft is checked for performance. All launch ballistics are analyzed.   Accurizer is installed. Comparison testing should show a measurable improvement in performance. Accurizers installed: $60.

The Accurizer Marketing Plan

National distribution and simple installation were Jeff’s goals with the Accurizer. Jeff has been inventing gizmos to change the balance and dynamics of golf shafts for fifteen years. Much of that time, the alterations had to be done by a high level technician. Shafts were cut. Extensions were glued. PITA.

The new Accurizers come in “one size fits all convenience” – bubble packed. Both versions are tightly designed and easy to install and re-use. The installation kit is a small circular saw, an allen wrench and a puller. Cut a hole, drop the Accurizer in, tighten down, you’re good to go.

Link to website chart: http://www.balance-certified.com/

Saturday is Open

If you want to check out the New Golf Lab stop by Saturday afternoon if you’re out and about. We’re happy to spend a few minutes to show you around and get acquainted.

Best Regards,

Leith Anderson and the Golf Lab Gang.

Accurizer for woods:

Accurizer for irons:

Accurizer for Irons

Posted in Fitting Services | Leave a comment